En acq810 fw manual b

ABB industrial drives

Firmware manualStandard pump control program for ACQ810 drives

List of related manuals

1) Delivered in PDF format on a manuals CD with the drive module.2) Delivered as a printed copy with the drive or optional equipment.All manuals are available in PDF format on the Internet. See section Further information on the inside of the back cover.

Drive manuals and guides Code (English)ACQ810-04 drive modules start-up guide 3AUA0000055159 2)ACQ810-04 drive modules (1.1 to 45 kW, 1 to 60 hp) hardware manual

3AUA0000055160 1)

ACQ810-04 drive modules (55 to 160 kW, 75 to 200 hp) hardware manual

3AUA0000055161 1)

ACQ810-04 drive modules (200 to 400 kW, 250 to 600 hp) hardware manual

3AUA0000055155 1)

Option manuals and guidesManuals and quick guides for I/O extension modules, fieldbus adapter, etc.

1)

http://search.abb.com/library/ABBLibrary.asp?DocumentID=3AUA0000055160&LanguageCode=en&DocumentPartId=1&Action=Launch




Firmware ManualACQ810 Standard Pump Control Program

3AUA0000055144 Rev BENEFFECTIVE: 2011-02-14 © 2011 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.

Table of contents

Table of contents 5

Table of contentsList of related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1. About the manualWhat this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

2. The ACQ810 control panelWhat this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Status line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Basics of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19List of tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Help and panel version – Any mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Basic operations – Any mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Assistants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Changed Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Fault Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Time & Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Parameter Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39I/O Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Reference Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Drive Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Parameter Change Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

3. Control locationsWhat this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4. Program featuresWhat this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Safety

6 Table of contents

Pump control features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Sleep function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Soft pipefill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Autochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Flow calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Pump cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Protective functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Control interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Programmable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Programmable analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Programmable digital inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Programmable I/O extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Critical speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Speed controller tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Scalar motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70User-definable load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71User-definable U/f curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Flux braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Application control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Application macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

DC voltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Overvoltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Undervoltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Voltage control and trip limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Safety and protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Thermal motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Automatic fault reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Energy savings calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Energy consumption monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Signal supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Maintenance counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Backup and restore of drive contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Data storage parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Drive-to-drive link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

5. Application macrosWhat this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Factory default macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Table of contents 7

Description and typical application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

External control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Description and typical application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Hand/Auto control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Description and typical application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

TRAD (Traditional pump) control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Description and typical application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Level control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Description and typical application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Multipump control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Description and typical application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Pressure sensor connection examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

6. ParametersWhat this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Summary of parameter groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Parameter listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

01 Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11202 I/O values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11303 Control values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12304 Appl values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12305 Pump values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12406 Drive status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12608 Alarms & faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13109 System info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13410 Start/stop/dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13511 Start/stop mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14012 Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14113 Analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14214 Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14815 Analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15816 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16419 Speed calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16720 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17021 Speed ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17222 Speed ref ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

8 Table of contents

23 Speed ctrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17625 Critical speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18426 Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18527 Process PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18728 Procact sel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19129 Setpoint sel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19330 Fault functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19531 Motor therm prot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19732 Automatic reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20233 Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20234 User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20535 Process variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20736 Timed functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21438 Flux ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21840 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21944 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22145 Energy optimising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22747 Voltage ctrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22849 Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22850 Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22951 FBA settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23152 FBA data in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23253 FBA data out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23356 Panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23358 Embedded Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23464 Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23875 Pump logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24176 MF communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25077 Pump sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25478 Pump autochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25779 Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26280 Flow calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26781 Pump protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27182 Pump cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27883 Energy monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28094 Ext IO conf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28195 Hw configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28197 User motor par . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28299 Start-up data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

7. Additional parameter dataWhat this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Pointer parameter format in fieldbus communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

32-bit integer value pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28832-bit integer bit pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Parameter groups 1…9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Parameter groups 10…99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Table of contents 9

8. Fault tracingWhat this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Alarm messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

9. Control through the embedded fieldbus interfaceWhat this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Connecting the fieldbus to the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Setting the drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Data inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

About the EFB communication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338ABB Drives classic profile and ABB Drives enhanced profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Control word for the ABB Drives profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Status word for the ABB Drives profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343References for the ABB Drives profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Actual values for the ABB Drives profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Modbus register addresses for the ABB Drives classic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Modbus register addresses for the ABB Drives enhanced profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

DCU 16-bit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Control and Status words for the DCU 16-bit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Status word for the DCU 16-bit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348State transition diagram for the DCU 16-bit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348References for the DCU 16-bit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Actual signals for the DCU 16-bit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Modbus register addresses for the DCU 16-bit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

DCU 32-bit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Control and Status words for the DCU 32-bit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Status word for the DCU 32-bit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350State transition diagram for the DCU 32-bit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350References for the DCU 32-bit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Modbus register addresses for the DCU 32-bit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Modbus function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Modbus exception codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

10. Control through a fieldbus adapterWhat this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

10 Table of contents

Drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361The fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

The Control Word and the Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

FBA communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Fieldbus references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364State diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

11. Control block diagramsWhat this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Speed feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Speed reference chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Speed error handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Torque reference modification, operating mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Process PID control setpoint and actual value selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Direct torque control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Further informationProduct and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Document library on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

About the manual 11

1About the manual

What this chapter containsThe chapter describes the contents of the manual. It also contains information on the compatibility, safety and intended audience.

CompatibilityThe manual is compatible with ACQ810 standard pump control program version UIFQ2000 or later.

Safety instructionsFollow all safety instructions delivered with the drive.• Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, or use

the drive. The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the Hardware Manual.

• Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the default settings of the function. For each function, the warnings and notes are given in this manual in the section describing the related user-adjustable parameters.

ReaderThe reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring practices, electronic components, and electrical schematic symbols.

12 About the manual

ContentsThe manual consists of the following chapters:• The ACQ810 control panel provides a description and instructions for use of the

control panel.• Control locations describes the control locations and operation modes of the

drive.• Program features contains descriptions of the features of the ACQ810 standard

program.• Application macros contains a short description of each macro together with a

connection diagram.• Parameters describes the parameters of the drive.• Additional parameter data contains further information on the parameters.• Fault tracing lists the alarm (warning) and fault messages with possible causes

and remedies.• Control through the embedded fieldbus interface describes the communication to

and from a fieldbus network using the embedded fieldbus interface.• Control through a fieldbus adapter describes the communication to and from a

fieldbus network using an optional fieldbus adapter module.• Control block diagrams contains a graphical representation of the control

program.

Terms and abbreviationsTerm/abbreviation DefinitionAI Analog input; interface for analog input signals

AO Analog output; interface for analog output signals

DC link DC circuit between rectifier and inverter

DI Digital input; interface for digital input signals

DIO Digital input/output; interface for digital input or output signals

DO Digital output; interface for digital output signals

DTC Direct torque control

EFB Embedded fieldbus

FBA Fieldbus adapter

FIO-11 Optional analog I/O extension module

FIO-21 Optional analog/digital I/O extension module

FIO-31 Optional digital I/O extension module

FDNA-0x Optional DeviceNet adapter

FENA-0x Optional Ethernet/IP adapter

FLON-0x Optional LONWORKS® adapter

FPBA-0x Optional PROFIBUS DP adapter

FSCA-0x Optional Modbus adapter

About the manual 13

HTL High-threshold logic

IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor; a voltage-controlled semiconductor type widely used in inverters due to their easy controllability and high switching frequency

I/O Input/Output

ID run Motor identification run. During the identification run, the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control.

JCU Control unit of the drive module. The JCU is installed on top of the power unit. The external I/O control signals are connected to the JCU, or optional I/O extensions mounted on it.

JMU Memory unit attached to the control unit of the drive

JPU Power unit; see the definition below.

LSB Least significant bit

LSW Least significant word

MSB Most significant bit

MSW Most significant word

Parameter User-adjustable operation instruction to the drive, or signal measured or calculated by the drive

PI controller Proportional-integral controller

PID controller Proportional–integral–derivative controller. Drive speed control is based on PID algorithm.

PLC Programmable logic controller

Power unit Contains the power electronics and connections of the drive module. The JCU is connected to the power unit.

PTC Positive temperature coefficient

RFG Ramp Function Generator

RO Relay output; interface for a digital output signal. Implemented with a relay.

STO Safe torque off

UIFQ xxxx Firmware of the ACQ810 drive

UPS Uninterruptible power supply; power supply equipment with battery to maintain output voltage during power failure

Term/abbreviation Definition

14 About the manual

The ACQ810 control panel 15

2The ACQ810 control panel

What this chapter containsThis chapter describes the features and operation of the ACQ810 control panel.

The control panel can be used to control the drive, read status data, and adjust parameters.

Features• alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display • copy function – parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later

transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.• context sensitive help• real time clock.

16 The ACQ810 control panel

Installation

Mechanical installation

For mounting options, see the Hardware Manual of the drive.

Instructions for mounting the control panel onto a cabinet door are available in ACS-CP-U Control Panel IP54 Mounting Platform Kit Installation Guide (3AUA0000049072 [English]).

Electrical installation

Use a CAT5 straight-through network cable with a maximum length of 3 meters. Suitable cables are available from ABB.

For the control panel connector location on the drive, see the Hardware Manual of the drive.


Layout

No. Use1 Status LED – Green for normal operation.

2 LCD display – Divided into three main areas:Status line – variable, depending on the mode of operation, see section Status line on page 18.Center – variable; in general, shows signal and parameter values, menus or lists. Shows also faults and alarms.Bottom line – shows current functions of the two soft keys and, if enabled, the clock display.

3 Soft key 1 – Function depends on the context. The text in the lower left corner of the LCD display indicates the function.

4 Soft key 2 – Function depends on the context. The text in the lower right corner of the LCD display indicates the function.

5 Up – Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display. Increments a value if a parameter is selected.Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.Holding the key down changes the value faster.

6 Down – Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display. Decrements a value if a parameter is selected.Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.Holding the key down changes the value faster.

7 LOC/REM – Changes between local and remote control of the drive.

8 Help – Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed. The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display.

9 STOP – Stops the drive in local control.

10 START – Starts the drive in local control.

30.10HzLOC

DIR 12:45 MENU

400RPM

1200 RPM12.4 A

405 dm3/s

3 45

67 8

9 10

30.00rpm

50 A

10 Hz

7 %10.0.

49.LOC

DIR MENU00:00

1

2a

2b

2c

30.00rpm


Status line

The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive.

No. Field Alternatives Significance1 Control location LOC Drive control is local, that is, from the control panel.

REM Drive control is remote, such as the drive I/O or fieldbus.

2 State Forward shaft direction

Reverse shaft direction

Rotating arrow Drive is running at reference.

Dotted rotating arrow

Drive is running but not at reference.

Stationary arrow Drive is stopped.

Dotted stationary arrow

Start command is present, but the motor is not running, e.g. because start enable signal is missing.

3 Panel operation mode • Name of the current mode• Name of the list or menu shown• Name of the operation state, e.g. REF EDIT.

4 Reference value or number of the selected item

• Reference value in the Output mode• Number of the highlighted item, e.g mode, parameter group or fault.

30.00rpmLOC

1 2 4

LOC MAIN MENU 1

1 2 3 4


Operating instructions

Basics of operation

You operate the control panel with menus and keys. The keys include two context-sensitive soft keys, whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the display above each key.

You select an option, e.g. operation mode or parameter, by entering the MENU state using soft key 2, and then by scrolling the and arrow keys until the option is highlighted and then pressing the relevant soft key. With the right soft key you usually enter a mode, accept an option or save the changes. The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level.

The Control Panel has ten options in the Main menu: Parameters, Assistants, Changed Par, Fault Logger, Time & Date, Parameter Backup, I/O Settings, Reference Edit, Drive Info and Parameter Change Log. In addition, the control panel has an Output mode, which is used as default. Also, when a fault or alarm occurs, the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm. You can reset the fault in the Output or Fault mode. The operation in these modes and options is described in this chapter.

Initially, the panel is in the Output mode, where you can start, stop, change the direction, switch between local and remote control, modify the reference value and monitor up to three actual values. To do other tasks, go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate option on the menu. The status line (see section Status line on page 18) shows the name of the current menu, mode, item or state.

PARAMETERS ASSISTANTSCHANGED PAREXIT ENTER00:00

MAIN MENU 1LOC

50 A

10 Hz

7 %10.0.49.

LOC

DIR MENU00:00

30.00rpm


List of tasks

The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them, abbreviations of the options in the Main menu and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail.Task Mode / Main menu

optionAbbreviations of the Main menu options *

Page

How to get help Any - 21

How to find out the panel version Any - 21

How to start and stop the drive Output - 22

How to switch between local and remote control Any - 22

How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any - 23

How to set the speed or frequency reference in the Output mode

Output - 23

How to adjust the display contrast Output - 24

How to change the value of a parameter Parameters PARAMETERS 25

How to change the value of value pointer parameters Parameters PARAMETERS 26

How to change the value of bit pointer parameters Parameters PARAMETERS 28

How to change the value of bit pointer parameter to fixed 0 (FALSE) or 1 (TRUE)

Parameters PARAMETERS 30

How to select the monitored signals Parameters PARAMETERS 31

How to do guided tasks (specification of related parameter sets) with assistants

Assistants ASSISTANTS 32

How to view and edit changed parameters Changed Parameters CHANGED PAR 33

How to view faults Fault Logger FAULT LOGGER 35

How to reset faults and alarms Fault Logger FAULT LOGGER 36

How to show/hide the clock, change date and time formats, set the clock and enable/disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes

Time & Date TIME & DATE 37

How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel

Parameter Backup PAR BACKUP 39

How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive

Parameter Backup PAR BACKUP 39

How to view backup information Parameter Backup PAR BACKUP 45

How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals

I/O Settings I/O SETTINGS 47

How to edit reference value Reference Edit REF EDIT 49

How to view drive info Drive Info DRIVE INFO 50

How to view and edit recently changed parameters Parameter Change Log

PAR CHG LOG 51

* Main menu options actually shown in the control panel.


Help and panel version – Any mode

How to get help

How to find out the panel version

Step Action Display

1. Press to read the context-sensitive help text for the item that is highlighted.

If help text exists for the item, it is shown on the display.

2. If the whole text is not visible, scroll the lines with keys and .

3. After reading the text, return to the previous display by pressing .

Step Action Display

1. If the power is switched on, switch it off.- If the panel cable can be disconnected easily, unplug the panel cable from the control panel, OR- if the panel cable can not be disconnected easily, switch off the control board or the drive.

2. Keep key depressed while you switch on the power and read the information. The display shows the following panel information:Panel SW: Panel firmware versionROM CRC: Panel ROM check sumFlash Rev: Flash content versionFlash content comment.When you release the key, the panel goes to the Output mode.

? TIME FORMATDATE FORMATSET TIMESET DATEDAYLIGHT SAVING

TIME & DATE 6

EXIT SEL00:00

LOC

EXIT 00:00

Use daylight saving to enable or disable automatic clock adjustment according to daylight saving

HELPLOC

EXIT 00:00

to enable or disable automatic clock adjustment according to daylight saving changes

HELPLOC

EXIT TIME FORMATDATE FORMATSET TIMESET DATEDAYLIGHT SAVING

TIME & DATE 6

EXIT SEL00:00

LOC

?

?

Panel SW: x.xxRom CRC: xxxxxxxxxxFlash Rev: x.xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

PANEL VERSION INFO


Basic operations – Any mode

How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control

You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be able to start or stop the drive by using the control panel, the drive must be in local control.

Step Action Display

1. To switch between remote control (REM shown on the status line) and local control (LOC shown on the status line), press .

Note: Switching to local control can be prevented with parameter 16.01 Local lock.

The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in remote control (REM) and controlled through the drive I/O terminals. To switch to local control (LOC) and control the drive using the control panel, press . The result depends on how long you press the key:If you release the key immediately (the display flashes “Switching to the local control mode”), the drive stops. Set the local control reference as instructed on page 23.If you press the key until the text “Keep running” appears, the drive continues running as before. The drive copies the current remote values for the run/stop status and the reference, and uses them as the initial local control settings.

To stop the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the status line stops rotating.

To start the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the status line starts rotating. It is dotted until the drive reaches the setpoint.

LOCREM

00:00

Switching to thelocal control mode.

MESSAGELOC

LOCREM


Output mode

In the Output mode, you can:• monitor actual values of up to three signals• change the direction of the motor rotation • set the speed or frequency reference• adjust the display contrast• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

You get to the Output mode by pressing repeatedly.

The top right corner of the display shows the reference value. The center can be configured to show up to three signal values or bar graphs; see page 31 for instructions on selecting and modifying the monitored signals.

How to change the direction of the motor rotation

How to set the speed or frequency reference in the Output mode

See also section Reference Edit on page 49.

Step Action Display

1. If you are not in the Output mode, press repeatedly until you get there.

2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status line), switch to local control by pressing . The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode.

3. To change the direction from forward ( shown on the status line) to reverse ( shown on the status line), or vice versa, press .

Step Action Display


EXIT

50 A

10 Hz

7 %10.0.49.

LOC

DIR MENU00:00

30.00rpm

EXIT

50 A

10 Hz

7 %10.0.49.

REM

DIR MENU00:00

30.00rpm

LOCREM

50 A

10 Hz

7 %10.0.49.

LOC

DIR MENU00:00

30.00rpm

DIR

EXIT

50 A

10 Hz

7 %10.0.49.

REM

DIR MENU00:00

30.00rpm


How to adjust the display contrast

2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status line), switch to local control by pressing . The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode.

3. To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the top right corner of the display, press . The value changes immediately. It is stored in the permanent memory of the drive and restored automatically after power switch-off.To decrease the value, press .

Step Action Display


2. To increase the contrast, press keys and simultaneously.To decrease the contrast, press keys and simultaneously.

Step Action Display

LOCREM

50 A

10 Hz

7 %10.0.49.

LOC

DIR MENU00:00

30.00rpm

50 A

10 Hz

7 %10.0.49.

LOC

DIR MENU00:00

31.00rpm

EXIT

50 A

10 Hz

7 %10.0.49.

LOC

DIR MENU00:00

30.00rpm

MENU

MENU

50 A

10 Hz

7 %10.0.49.

LOC

DIR MENU00:00

30.00rpm


Parameters

In the Parameters option, you can:• view and change parameter values• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to select a parameter and change its value

Step Action Display

1. Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode.Otherwise press repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.

2. Go to the Parameters option by selecting PARAMETERS on the menu with keys and , and pressing

.

3. Select the appropriate parameter group with keys and .

Press .

4. Select the appropriate parameter with keys and . The current value of the parameter is shown

below the selected parameter. Here the parameter 99.06 Mot nom current is used as an example.

Press .

MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC

ENTER

01 Actual values02 I/O values03 Control values04 Appl values05 Pump valuesEXIT SEL00:00

PAR GROUPS 01LOC

99 Start-up data01 Actual values02 I/O values03 Control values04 Appl valuesEXIT SEL00:00

PAR GROUPS 99LOC

SEL

9901 Language

English9904 Motor type9905 Motor ctrl mode9906 Mot nom current

PARAMETERS

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC

9901 Language9904 Motor type9905 Motor ctrl mode9906 Mot nom current 0.0 A

PARAMETERS

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC

EDIT

9906 Mot nom current

PAR EDIT

0.0 A

CANCEL SAVE00:00

LOC


How to change the value of value pointer parameters

In addition to the parameters shown above, there are two kinds of pointer parameters; value pointer parameters and bit pointer parameters. A value pointer parameter points to the value of another parameter.

5. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys and .Pressing an arrow key once increments or decrements the value. Keeping the key depressed for a while first quickly changes the current digit until the cursor moves left one position. This is repeated until the key is released.After the key is released, step-by-step adjustment of the current digit is possible. If neither key is pressed for a while, the cursor returns to the right one position at a time.Pressing both keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value.

6. To save the new value, press .To cancel the new value and keep the original, press

.

Step Action Display



.

3. Select the appropriate parameter group with keys and . Here the value pointer parameter 21.01 Speed ref1 sel is used as an example.

Step Action Display


PAR EDIT

3.5 A

CANCEL SAVE00:00

LOC

SAVE

CANCEL

9906 Mot nom current 3.5 A9907 Mot nom voltage9908 Mot nom freq9909 Mot nom speed

PARAMETERS

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC

MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC

ENTER


PAR GROUPS 01LOC

15 Analogue outputs16 System19 Speed calculation20 Limits21 Speed refEXIT SEL00:00

PAR GROUPS 21LOC


4. Press to select the appropriate parameter group. Select the appropriate parameter with keys and

, current value of each parameter is shown below it.

5. Press . Current value of the value pointer parameter is shown, as well as the parameter it points to.

6. Specify a new value with keys and . The parameter the value pointer parameter points to changes respectively.

7. Press to accept any of the preselected values and to return to the parameters list.The new value is shown in the parameters list.

To freely define an analog signal as the value, choose Pointer and press . The parameter group and index will be shown.Select the parameter group with and . The text below the cursor displays the currently-selected parameter group.

8. Press to select the parameter index.Again, the text below the cursor reflects the current setting.

9. To save the new value for the pointer parameter, press .

The new value is shown in the parameters list.

Step Action DisplaySEL

2101 Speed ref1 sel AI1 scaled2102 Speed ref2 sel2103 Speed ref1 func2104 Speed ref1/2 sel

PARAMETERS

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC

EDIT

2101 Speed ref1 sel

AI1 scaled

PAR EDIT

CANCEL SEL00:00[P.02.05]

LOC

2101 Speed ref1 sel

FBA ref1

PAR EDIT

CANCEL SEL00:00[P.02.26]

LOC

SEL

2101 Speed ref1 sel FBA ref12102 Speed ref2 sel2105 Speed share2109 SpeedRef min abs

PARAMETERS

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC

NEXT 2101 Speed ref1 sel

P.02.05

PAR EDIT

CANCEL SAVE00:0002 I/O values

LOC

NEXT

2101 Speed ref1 sel

P.02.07

PAR EDIT

CANCEL SAVE00:000207 AI2 scaled

LOC

SAVE 2101 Speed ref1 sel AI2 scaled2102 Speed ref2 sel2105 Speed share2109 SpeedRef min abs

PARAMETERS

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC


How to change the value of bit pointer parameters

The bit pointer parameter points to the value of a bit in another signal, or can be fixed to 0 (FALSE) or 1 (TRUE). For the latter option, see page 30. A bit pointer parameter points to a bit value (0 or 1) of one bit in a 32-bit signal. The first bit from the left is bit number 31, and the first bit from the right is bit number 0.

Step Action Display



.

3. Select the appropriate parameter group with keys and . Here the bit pointer parameter 10.02 Ext1 start in1 is used as an example.

4. Press to select the appropriate parameter group. Current value of each parameter is shown below its name.

Select the parameter 10.02 Ext1 start in1 with keys and .

5. Press .

MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC

ENTER


PAR GROUPS 01LOC

10 Start/stop/dir11 Start/stop mode12 Operating mode13 Analogue inputs14 Digital I/OEXIT SEL00:00

PAR GROUPS 10LOC

SEL

1001 Ext1 start func In11002 Ext1 start in11003 Ext1 start in21004 Ext2 start func

PARAMETERS

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC

1001 Ext1 start func1002 Ext1 start in1 DI11003 Ext1 start in21004 Ext2 start func

PARAMETERS

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC

EDIT

1002 Ext1 start in1

DI1

PAR EDIT

CANCEL SEL00:00[P.02.01.00]

LOC


6. Specify a new value with keys and . The text below the cursor shows the corresponding parameter group, index and bit.

7. Press to accept any of the preselected values and to return to the parameters list.

To freely define a bit of a binary parameter as the value, choose Pointer and press . The parameter group, index and bit will be shown.Select the parameter group with and . The text below the cursor displays the currently-selected parameter group.

8. Press to select the parameter index.Again, the text below the cursor reflects the current setting.

9. Press to select the bit.Again, the text below the cursor reflects the current setting.

10. To save the new value for the pointer parameter, press .

The new value is shown in the parameters list.

Step Action Display

1002 Ext1 start in1

DIO4

PAR EDIT

CANCEL SEL00:00[P.02.03.03]

LOC

SEL

1002 Ext1 start in1 DIO41003 Ext1 start in21004 Ext2 start func1005 Ext2 start in1

PARAMETERS

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC

NEXT 1002 Ext1 start in1

P.02.01.00

PAR EDIT

CANCEL SAVE00:0002 I/O values

LOC

NEXT

1002 Ext1 start in1 P.02.01.00

PAR EDIT

CANCEL SAVE00:000201 DI status

LOC

NEXT

1002 Ext1 start in1 P.02.01.01

PAR EDIT

CANCEL SAVE00:0001 DI2

LOC

SAVE 1002 Ext1 start in1 P.02.01.011003 Ext1 start in21004 Ext2 start func1005 Ext2 start in1

PARAMETERS

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC


How to change the value of bit pointer parameter to fixed 0 (FALSE) or 1 (TRUE)

The bit pointer parameter can be fixed to constant value of 0 (FALSE) or 1 (TRUE).

When adjusting a bit pointer parameter on the control panel, CONST is selected in order to fix the value to 0 (displayed as C.FALSE) or 1 (C.TRUE).

Step Action Display



.

Select the appropriate parameter group with keys and . Here the bit pointer parameter 14.07 DIO2 out src is used as an example.

3. Press to select the appropriate parameter group. Select the appropriate parameter with keys and

. Current value of each parameter is shown below its name.

4. Press .

Select CONST with keys and .

MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC

ENTER


PAR GROUPS 01LOC

10 Start/stop/dir11 Start/stop mode12 Operating mode13 Analogue inputs14 Digital I/OEXIT SEL00:00

PAR GROUPS 14LOC

SEL

1404 DIO1 Ton9901 1405 DIO1 Toff1406 DIO2 conf1407 DIO2 out src P.06.02.03

PARAMETERS

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC

EDIT

1407 DIO2 out src

PAR EDIT

Pointer

CANCEL NEXT00:00

LOC

1407 DIO2 out src

PAR EDIT

Const

CANCEL NEXT00:00

LOC


How to select the monitored signals

5. Press .

6. Specify a new constant value (TRUE or FALSE) for the bit pointer parameterwith keys and .

7. To continue, press .To cancel the new value and keep the original, press

.The new value is shown in the parameters list.

Step Action Display

1. You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they are displayed with group 56 Panel display parameters. See page 25 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values.Note: If you set one of the parameters 56.01…56.03 to zero, in the output mode you can see names for the two remaining signals. The names are also shown if you set one of the mode parameters 56.04…56.06 to Disabled.

Step Action DisplayNEXT

C.FALSE

1407 DIO2 out src

PAR EDIT

CANCEL SAVE00:00[0]

LOC

C.TRUE

1407 DIO2 out src

PAR EDIT

CANCEL SAVE00:00[1]

LOC

SAVE

CANCEL

1407 DIO2 out src C.TRUE1408 DIO2 Ton1409 DIO2 Toff1410 DIO3 conf

PARAMETERS

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC

5601 Signal1 param

PAR EDIT

01.03

CANCEL NEXT00:00

LOC

5602 Signal2 param

PAR EDIT

01.04

CANCEL NEXT00:00

LOC

5603 Signal3 param

PAR EDIT

01.06

CANCEL NEXT00:00

LOC


Assistants

Assistants are routines that guide you through the essential parameter settings related to a specific task, for example application macro selection, entering the motor data, or reference selection.

An assistant may merely consist of a sequence of parameters that the user must adjust, but may also involve questions; based on the answers, one or several parameters are automatically adjusted. The assistant may also display additional information about the selections.

In the Assistants mode, you can:• use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

Different firmware versions may include different assistants.

How to invoke an assistant

The table below shows how assistants are invoked.

Step Action Display


2. Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on the menu with keys and , and pressing

.

3. Select an assistant by highlighting it with and , and by pressing .

• Whenever the assistant prompts the user to adjust a parameter, the adjustment is made as described starting on page 25.

• Whenever the assistant prompts a question, select the most suitable answer with and , and press .

4. After the assistant has been completed, the main menu is displayed. To run another assistant, repeat the procedure from step 2.To abort the assistant at any point, press .

MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC

ENTER

Select assistant:

Motor Set-upApplication MacroStart-up assistant

EXIT OK00:00

CHOICELOC 1/3

OK

OK

9904 Motor type

PAR EDIT

AM

EXIT SAVE00:00[0]

LOC

EXIT


Changed Parameters

In the Changed Parameters mode, you can:• view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default

values• change these parameters• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to view and edit changed parameters

Step Action Display


2. Go to the Changed Parameters mode by selecting CHANGED PAR on the menu with keys and

, and pressing .If there are no changed parameters in the history, corresponding text will be shown.

If parameters have been changed, a list of them is shown. Select the changed parameter on the list with keys and . The value of the selected parameter is shown below it.

3. Press to modify the value.

4. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys and . Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value. Holding the key down changes the value faster. Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value.

MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC

ENTER

00:00

No parameters

MESSAGELOC


CHANGED PAR

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC

EDIT


PAR EDIT

3.5 A

CANCEL SAVE00:00

LOC


PAR EDIT

3.0 A

CANCEL SAVE00:00

LOC


5. To accept the new value, press . If the new value is the default value, the parameter is removed from the list of changed parameters.To cancel the new value and keep the original, press

.

Step Action DisplaySAVE

CANCEL


CHANGED PAR

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC


Fault Logger

In the Fault Logger option, you can: • view the drive fault history• see the details of the most recent faults• read the help text for the fault and make corrective actions• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to view faults

Step Action Display


2. Go to the Fault Logger option by selecting FAULT LOGGER on the menu with keys and , and pressing . If there are no faults in the fault history, corresponding text will be shown.

If there is a fault history, the display shows the fault log starting with the most recent fault. The number on the row is the fault code according to which the causes and corrective actions are listed in chapter Fault tracing (page 313).

3. To see the details of a fault, select it with keys and , and press .

Scroll the text with keys and .To return to the previous display, press .

4. If you want help in diagnosing the fault, press .

MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC

ENTER

No fault historyfound

MESSAGELOC

36: LOCAL CTRL LOSS 29.04.08 10:45:58

FAULT LOGGER

EXIT DETAIL00:00

LOC 1

DETAIL

EXIT

TIME 10:45:58FAULT CODE 36FAULT CODE EXTENSION

LOCAL CTRL LOSS

EXIT DIAG00:00

LOC

DIAG

Check parameter ‘30.03 Local ctrl loss’ setting. Check PC toolor panel connection.

EXIT OK

LOC


How to reset faults

5. Press . The panel allows you to edit necessary parameters to correct the fault.

6. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys and .To accept the new value, press .To cancel the new value and keep the original, press

.

Step Action Display

1. When a fault occurs, a text identifying the fault is shown.To reset the fault, press .To return to the previous display, press .

Step Action DisplayOK

3003 Local ctrl loss

PAR EDIT

Fault

EXIT SAVE00:00[1]

LOC

SAVE

EXIT

3003 Local ctrl loss

PAR EDIT

Spd ref Safe

EXIT SAVE00:00[2]

LOC

RESET

EXIT

FAULT 36LOCAL CTRL LOSS

FAULT

RESET EXIT

LOC


Time & Date

In the Time & Date option, you can:• show or hide the clock• change date and time display formats• set the date and time• enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving

changes• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

The Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the panel is not powered by the drive.

How to show or hide the clock, change display formats, set the date and time and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes

Step Action Display


2. Go to the Time & Date option by selecting TIME & DATE on the menu with keys and , and pressing

.

3. To show (hide) the clock, select CLOCK VISIBILITY on the menu, press , select Show clock (Hide clock) with keys and and press , or, if you want to return to the previous display without making changes, press .

To specify the time format, select TIME FORMAT on the menu, press and select a suitable format with keys

and . Press to save or to cancel your changes.

MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC

ENTER

CLOCK VISIBILITYTIME FORMATDATE FORMATSET TIMESET DATEEXIT SEL00:00

TIME & DATE 1LOC

SEL

SEL

EXIT

Show clockHide clock

EXIT SEL00:00

CLOCK VISIB 1LOC

SEL

SEL CANCEL

24-hour12-hour

CANCEL SEL00:00

TIME FORMAT 1LOC


To specify the date format, select DATE FORMAT on the menu, press and select a suitable format.Press to save or to cancel your changes.

To set the time, select SET TIME on the menu and press .

Specify the hours with keys and , and press .

Then specify the minutes. Press to save or to cancel your changes.

To set the date, select SET DATE on the menu and press .

Specify the first part of the date (day or month depending on the selected date format) with keys and

, and press . Repeat for the second part. After specifying the year, press . To cancel your changes, press .

To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes, select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press . Pressing opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed. Scroll the text with keys and . To return to the previous display, press .To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes, select Off and press .To enable automatic clock transitions, select the country or area whose daylight saving changes are followed and press .To return to the previous display without making changes, press .

Step Action Display

SEL

OK CANCEL

dd.mm.yymm/dd/yydd.mm.yyyymm/dd/yyyy

CANCEL OK00:00

DATE FORMAT 1LOC

SEL

OK

OK CANCEL 15:41

SET TIME

CANCEL OK

LOC

SEL

OK

OK

CANCEL

19.03.2008

SET DATE

CANCEL OK00:00

LOC

SEL

?

EXIT

SEL

SEL

EXIT

OffEUUSAustralia1:NSW,Vict..Australia2:Tasmania..EXIT SEL00:00

DAYLIGHT SAV 1LOC

EXIT 00:00

EU:On: Mar last SundayOff: Oct last Sunday

US:

HELPLOC


Parameter Backup

The Parameter Backup option is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters. Uploading stores all drive parameters, including up to four user sets, to the Control Panel. Selectable subsets of the backup file can then be restored/downloaded from the control panel to the same drive or another drive of the same type.

In the Parameter Backup option, you can:• Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel with MAKE BACKUP TO

PANEL. This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by the user) parameters such as those created by the ID Run.

• View the information about the backup stored in the control panel with SHOW BACKUP INFO. This includes e.g. version information etc. of the current backup file in the panel. It is useful to check this information when you are going to restore the parameters to another drive with RESTORE PARS ALL to ensure that the drives are compatible.

• Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive using the RESTORE PARS ALL command. This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-adjustable motor parameters, to the drive. It does NOT include the user sets of parameters.

Note: Use this function only to restore the parameters from a backup or to restore parameters to systems that are compatible.• Restore all parameters, except motor data, to the drive with RESTORE PARS

NO-IDRUN.• Restore only motor data parameters to the drive with RESTORE PARS IDRUN.• Restore all user sets to the drive with RESTORE ALL USER SETS.• Restore only user set 1…4 to the drive with RESTORE USER SET 1…RESTORE

USER SET 4.

How to backup and restore parameters

For all backup and restore functions available, see page 39.

Step Action Display


MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC


2. Go to the Parameter Backup option by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys and , and pressing .

To copy all parameters (including user sets and internal parameters) from the drive to the control panel, select MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL on the Par Backup with keys

and , and press . Operation starts. Press if you want to stop the operation.

After the backup is completed, the display shows a message about the completion. Press to return to the Par Backup.

To perform restore functions, select the appropriate operation (here RESTORE PARS ALL is used as an example) on the Par Backup with keys and

.

Press . Restoring starts.

A version check is made. Scroll the text with keys and .

If you want to continue, press . Press if you want to stop the operation. If the downloading is continued, the display shows a message about it.

Step Action Display

ENTER

MAKE BACKUP TO PANELSHOW BACKUP INFORESTORE PARS ALLRESTORE PARS NO-IDRUNRESTORE PARS IDRUNEXIT SEL00:00

PAR BACKUP 1LOC

SEL

ABORT

ABORT

PAR BACKUPLOCCopying file 1/2

00:00

OK

OK

Parameter uploadsuccessful

MESSAGELOC

00:00

MAKE BACKUP TO PANELSHOW BACKUP INFORESTORE PARS ALLRESTORE PARS NO-IDRUNRESTORE PARS IDRUNEXIT SEL

PAR BACKUP 3LOC

00:00SEL

Initializing paramrestore operation

PAR BACKUPLOC

00:00

FIRMWARE VERSION

UIFQ,200F,0,UIFQ,200C,0,

OKPRODUCT VARIANTCANCEL CONT

VERSION CHECKLOC 1

00:00CONT CANCEL

Initializing param.restore operation

PAR BACKUPLOC

00:00


Parameter errors

If you try to backup and restore parameters between different firmware versions, the panel shows you the following parameter error information:

Downloading continues, drive is being restarted.

The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion.

Downloading finishes.

Step Action Display

1. Restore operation starts normally.

2. A version check is made.You can see on the panel that the firmware versions are not the same.

Scroll the text with keys and .To continue, press . Press to stop the operation.

Step Action Display

Restarting drive

PAR BACKUPLOC

00:00

PAR BACKUPLOC

50%

Restoring/downloadingall parameters

Finishing restoreoperation

PAR BACKUPLOC

Initializing param.restore operation

PAR BACKUPLOC

00:00

FIRMWARE VERSION


OKPRODUCT VARIANTCANCEL CONT

VERSION CHECKLOC 1

00:00

CONT CANCEL FIRMWARE VERSIONPRODUCT VARIANT

77OK

CANCEL CONT

VER CHECKLOC 2

00:00


3. If the downloading is continued, the display shows a message about it.

Downloading continues, drive is being restarted.

The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion.

Downloading continues.

Downloading finishes.

4. The panel shows a list of erroneous parameters.

You can scroll the parameters with keys and . The reason for parameter error is also shown.

Step Action Display


PAR BACKUPLOC

00:00

Restarting drive

PAR BACKUPLOC

00:00

PAR BACKUPLOC

50%

Restoring/downloadingall parameters

Restarting drive

PAR BACKUPLOC

00:00


PAR BACKUPLOC

9401 Ext IO1 sel 0 ? INCORRECT VALUE TYPE9402 Ext IO2 selREADY

PARAM ERRORSLOC 1

00:00

2111021201 1 ? PARAMETER NOT FOUNDREADY

PARAM ERRORSLOC 13

00:00


Trying to restore a user set between different firmware versions

If you try to backup and restore a user set between different firmware versions, the panel shows you the following alarm information:

5. You can edit parameters by pressing when EDIT command is visible. Parameter 95.01 Ctrl boardSupply is used as an example.

Edit the parameter as shown in section Parameters on page 25.

6. Press to save the new value.

Press to return to the list of erroneous parameters.

7. The parameter value you chose is visible under the parameter name.

Press when you have finished editing the parameters.

Step Action Display

1. Restore operation starts normally.

2. Version check is also OK.You can see on the panel that the firmware versions are not the same.

You can scroll the text with keys and .

Step Action DisplayEDIT

9501 Ctrl boardSupply

PAR EDIT

External 24V

CANCEL SAVE00:00[1]

LOC

SAVE

CANCEL

9501 Ctrl boardSupply

PAR EDIT

Internal 24V

CANCEL SAVE00:00[0]

LOC

READY

9501 Ctrl boardSupply 0 0 INCORRECT VALUE TYPE9503READY EDIT

PARAM ERRORSLOC 9

00:00


PAR BACKUPLOC

00:00

FIRMWARE VERSION


OKPRODUCT VARIANT CANCEL CONT

VER CHECKLOC 1

00:00

FIRMWARE VERSIONPRODUCT VARIANT 7 7 OK CANCEL CONT

VER CHECKLOC 2

00:00


3. If the downloading is continued, the display shows a message about it.

4. Downloading continues, drive is being restarted.

5. The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion.

6. Downloading continues.

7. Downloading continues, drive is being restarted.

8. Downloading finishes.

9. Panel shows a text identifying the alarm and returns to the Par Backup.

Step Action Display


PAR BACKUPLOC

00:00

Restarting drive

PAR BACKUPLOC

00:00

PAR BACKUPLOC

50%

Restoring/downloadinguser set 1


PAR BACKUPLOC

00:00

Restarting drive

PAR BACKUPLOC

00:00


PAR BACKUPLOC

ALARM 2036RESTORE

ALARM

EXIT

LOC


Trying to load a user set between different firmware versions

If you try load a user set between different firmware versions, the panel shows you the following fault information:

How to view information about the backup

Step Action Display

1. Go to the Parameters option by selecting PARAMETERS on the main menu as shown in section Parameters on page 25.A user set is loaded through parameter 16.09 User set sel. Select parameter group 16 System with keys and .

2. Press to select parameter group 16. Select parameter 16.09 User set sel with keys and

. Current value of each parameter is shown below its name.

3. Press .

Select the user set you want to load with keys and .

Press .

4. Panel shows a text identifying the fault.

Step Action Display


EXIT SEL00:00

12 Operating mode13 Analogue inputs14 Digital I/O15 Analogue outputs16 System

PAR GROUPS 16LOC

SEL

1603 Pass code9901 1604 Param restore1607 Param save1609 User set sel No request

PARAMETERS

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC

EDIT

1609 User set sel

PAR EDIT

No request

CANCEL SAVE00:00[1]

LOC

SAVE

1609 User set sel

PAR EDIT

Load set 1

CANCEL SAVE00:00[2]

LOC

FAULT 310USERSET LOAD

FAULT

RESET EXIT

LOC

MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC


2. Go to the Par Backup option by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys and , and pressing

.Select SHOW BACKUP INFO with keys and

.

3. Press . The display shows the following information about the drive from where the backup was made:BACKUP INTERFACE VER: Format version of the backup file FIRMWARE VERSION: Information on the firmwareUIFQ: Firmware of the ACQ810 drive2010: Firmware version0: Firmware patch versionPRODUCT VARIANT:7: ACQ810 (Pump control program)You can scroll the information with and .

4. Press to return to the Par Backup.

Step Action Display

ENTER


PAR BACKUP 2LOC

SEL

LOC

EXIT 00:00

BACKUP INTERFACE VER 0.4 0.4FIRMWARE VERSION UIFQ,2010,0,

BACKUP INFO

EXIT 00:00

FIRMWARE VERSION UIFQ,2010,0, UIFQ,200F,0, PRODUCT VARIANT 7

BACKUP INFOLOC

EXIT


PAR BACKUP 1LOC


I/O Settings

In the I/O Settings mode, you can:• check the parameter settings that configure the I/Os of the drive• check the parameters that have an input or output selected as their source or

target• edit the parameter setting• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals

Step Action Display


2. Go the I/O Settings mode by selecting I/O SETTINGS on the menu with keys and , and pressing

.

Select the I/O group, e.g. Digital inputs, with keys and .

3. Press . After a brief pause, the display shows the current settings for the selection.You can scroll digital inputs and parameters with keys

and .

4. Press . The panel shows information related to I/O selected (in this case, DI1).You can scroll information with keys and .Press to return to the digital inputs.

MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC

ENTER

Analog outputsAnalog inputsDigital I/OsDigital inputsRelay outputsEXIT SEL00:00

I/O SETTINGS 1LOC

Analog outputsAnalog inputsDigital I/OsDigital inputsRelay outputsEXIT SEL00:00

I/O SETTINGS 4LOC

SEL

DI11002 Ext1 start in1DI2DI31010 Fault reset sel

I/O SETTINGS 1LOC

EXIT INFO00:00INFO

EXIT

LOC

EXIT 00:00

NUM OF I/O ITEMS0SLOT NUMBER0NODE NUMBER

I/O INFO


5. Select the setting (line with a parameter number) with keys and . You can edit the parameter (INFO selection turns into EDIT selection).

6. Press .

7. Specify a new value for the setting with keys and .

Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value. Holding the key down changes the value faster. Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value.

8. To save the new value, press .To cancel the new value and keep the original, press

.

Step Action Display


I/O SETTINGS 1LOC

EXIT EDIT00:00EDIT

1002 Ext1 start in1

PAR EDIT

DI1

CANCEL SEL00:00[P.02.01.00]

LOC

1002 Ext1 start in1

PAR EDIT

DI04

CANCEL SEL00:00[P.02.03.03]

LOC

SEL

CANCEL


I/O SETTINGS 1LOC

EXIT EDIT00:00


Reference Edit

In the Reference Edit option, you can:• accurately control the local reference value,• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

Editing is allowed only in the LOC state, the option always edits the local reference value.

How to edit reference value

Step Action Display

1. If the panel is in the remote control mode (REM shown on the status line), switch to local control (LOC shown on the status line) by pressing . Reference editing is not possible in remote control mode. (See page 22 for more information on switching between the local and remote control modes.)The display shows a message about that if you try to enter REF EDIT in the remote control mode.

2. Otherwise, go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode.Otherwise press repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.

3. Go to the Reference Edit option by selecting REF EDIT on the menu with keys and , and pressing

.

4. Select the correct sign with keys and , and press . Select the correct numbers with keys and , and after each number is selected, press

.

5. After the last number is selected, press . Go to the Output mode by pressing . The selected reference value is shown in the status line.

LOCREM

Reference editingenabled only inlocal control mode

MESSAGEREM

00:00

MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC

ENTER

0000.00rpm

REF EDIT

CANCEL NEXT00:00

LOC

NEXT

NEXT

–1250.00rpm

REF EDIT

CANCEL SAVE00:00

LOC

SAVE

EXIT-1250.00rpm

50 A

10 Hz

7 %10.0.49.

LOC

DIR MENU00:00


Drive Info

In the Drive Info option, you can:• view information on the drive,• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to view drive info

Step Action Display


2. Go to the Drive info option by selecting DRIVE INFO on the menu with keys and , and pressing

.

3. The display shows information about the drive. You can scroll the information with keys and . Note: The information shown may vary according to the firmware version of the drive.DRIVE NAME: Drive name defined as a text in DriveStudio commissioning and maintenance toolDRIVE TYPE: e.g. ACQ810DRIVE MODEL: Type code of the driveFW VERSION: See page 45.SOLUTION PROGRAM: Version information of the active application programBASE SOLUTION PROGRAM: Version information of the application program templateSTANDARD LIBRARY: Version information of the standard libraryTECHNOLOGY LIBRARY: Not applicable to the ACQ810POWER UNIT SERNO: Serial number of the power stage (JPU)MEM UNIT HW SERNO: Serial number in manufacturing the memory unit (JMU)MEM UNIT CONFIG SERNO: Serial number in configuring the memory unit (JMU).Press to return to the Main menu.

MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC

ENTER

EXIT 00:00

DRIVE NAME -DRIVE TYPE ACQ810DRIVE MODEL

DRIVE INFOLOC

EXIT

EXIT 00:00

FW VERSION UIFQ,2010,0,SOLUTION PROGRAM -BASE SOLUTION PROGRAM

DRIVE INFOLOC


Parameter Change Log

In the Parameter Change Log option, you can:• view latest parameter changes made via control panel or PC tool,• edit these parameters,• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to view latest parameter changes and edit parameters

Step Action Display


2. Go to the Parameter Change Log option by selecting PAR CHG LOG on the menu with keys and

, and pressing .If there are no parameter changes in the history, corresponding text will be shown.

If there are parameter changes in the history, the panel shows a list of the last parameter changes starting from the most recent change. The order of the changes is also indicated with a number in the top right corner (1 stands for most recent change, 2 the second latest change etc.) If a parameter has been changed twice, it is shown as one change in the list. The current value of the parameter and the parameter change date and time are also shown below the selected parameter. You can scroll the parameters with keys and .

3. If you want to edit a parameter, select the parameter with keys and and press .

4. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys and .To save the new value, press .To cancel the new value and keep the original, press

.

MENU

EXIT


MAIN MENU 1LOC

ENTER

No parametersavailable

MESSAGELOC

00:00

9402 Ext IO2 sel None 11.09.2008 12:04:55 9401 Ext IO1 sel9402 Ext IO2 sel

LAST CHANGES

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC 1

EDIT 9402 Ext IO2 sel

PAR EDIT

None

CANCEL SAVE00:00[0]

LOC

SAVE

CANCEL

9402 Ext IO2 sel

PAR EDIT

FIO-01

CANCEL SAVE00:00[1]

LOC


5. The parameter change is shown as the first one in the list of last parameter changes.Note: You can reset the parameter change log by setting parameter 16.14 Reset ChgParLog to Reset.

Step Action Display

9402 Ext IO2 sel FIO-01 12.09.2008 15:09:33 9402 Ext IO2 sel9401 Ext IO1 sel

LAST CHANGES

EXIT EDIT00:00

LOC 1

Control locations 53

3Control locations

What this chapter containsThis chapter describes the control locations of the drive.

54 Control locations

Local control vs. external controlThe drive has two main control locations: external and local. The control location is selected with the LOC/REM key on the control panel or with the PC tool (Take/Release button).

Local control

The control commands are given from the control panel keypad or from a PC equipped with DriveStudio when the drive is in local control. A speed control mode is available for local control.

Local control is mainly used during commissioning and maintenance. The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local control. Changing the control location to local can be disabled by parameter 16.01 Local lock.

The user can select by a parameter (30.03 Local ctrl loss) how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break.

Control panel or PC tool (DriveStudio/SPC)

(optional)Fieldbus adapter Fxxx in Slot 2

*Extra inputs/outputs can be added by installing an optional I/O extension module (FIO-xx) into drive Slot 1.

MOTOR

PLC (= Programmable Logic Controller)

M3~

ACQ810

Drive-to-drive link or embedded fieldbus interface

*I/O

Local control

External control

Control locations 55

External control

When the drive is in external control, control commands are given through the fieldbus interface (via the embedded fieldbus interface or an optional fieldbus adapter module), the I/O terminals (digital and analog inputs), optional I/O extension modules or the drive-to-drive link. External references are given through the fieldbus interface, analog inputs, or drive-to-drive link.

Two external control locations, EXT1 and EXT2, are available. The user can select control signals (e.g. start and stop) and control modes separately for both external control locations. Depending on the user selection, either EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time. Selection between EXT1/EXT2 is done via digital signal or fieldbus control word.

56 Control locations

Program features 57

4Program features

What this chapter containsThis chapter describes the features of the control program.

58 Program features

Pump control features

PID control

There is a built-in PID controller in the drive. The controller can be used to control process variables such as pressure, flow or fluid level.

In process PID control, a process setpoint (reference) is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference. A process actual value (feedback) is also brought back to the drive. The process PID control adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity (actual value) at the desired level (setpoint). The control program allows switching between two different setpoints and actual values.

The simplified block diagram below illustrates the process PID control. For a more detailed diagram, see page 372.

Settings

Parameter groups 12 Operating mode (page 141), 27 Process PID (page 187), 28 Procact sel (page 191), and 29 Setpoint sel (page 193).

0AIFBA29.04Pointer

Setpoint sources

29.02

04.240AIFBA29.05Pointer

29.03

29.01

Setpoint 1/2 selection04.23 27.01

0

04.25

27.30

27.31

27.1227.1327.1427.1527.1627.1827.19

PID

04.05

0AIFBA05.05Pointer

Actual value sources

28.02

0AIFBA05.05Pointer

28.03

28.01

04.21

04.20

Act1

AddSub…Sqrt add

28.04

04.22

Actual value 1/2 selection

Program features 59

Diagnostics

Parameters 04.01…04.05 (page 123), 04.20…04.25 (page 123) and 06.20 Pump status word (page 130).

Sleep function

The sleep function is suitable for PID control applications where the consumption varies, such as clean water pumping systems. When used, it stops the pump completely during low demand, instead of running the pump slowly below its efficient operating range. The following example visualizes the operation of the function.

The drive controls a pressure boost pump. The water consumption falls at night. As a consequence, the process PID controller decreases the motor speed. However, due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds, the motor would never stop rotating. The sleep function detects the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed. The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the pressure. The pumping resumes when the pressure falls under the predefined minimum level and the wake-up delay has passed.

60 Program features

Settings

Parameter group 77 Pump sleep (page 254).

Diagnostics

Parameters 04.26 Wake up level (page 124), 06.02 Status word2 (page 127), 06.20 Pump status word (page 130) and 08.21 Pump alarm word (page 134).

Soft pipefill

Filling up an empty system using normal PID control would cause a sudden pressure peak. To avoid this, a soft pipefill function is available. This involves running the pump at a lower speed until a predefined threshold of process actual value (for example, measured pressure) is achieved. If a specified increase in the actual value is not achieved within a specified time, pump speed is stepped up. This is repeated until the

Wake-up level (77.10)

t < tsd

Signal selected by 77.02(for example, motor speed)

Selected process actual value

STOP

tsd = Sleep delay (77.04)

Sleep level (77.03)

START

Wake-up delay (77.11)

tsd

Setpoint

Time

Sleep boost step (77.06)

Control panel:SLEEPING

Sleep boost time (77.08)Control panel:

BOOSTING

Time

Time

Program features 61

process actual value reaches the threshold level, after which normal process PID control is resumed. A timeout for the whole pipefill phase can also be defined.

The following drawing illustrates the operation of the pipefill function.

Settings

Parameters 27.32 Pipefill ref acc (page 190) and 27.33 Pipefill ref dec (page 190); parameter group 81 Pump protection (page 271).

Diagnostics

Parameters 06.20 Pump status word (page 130), 08.20 Pump fault word (page 133) and 08.21 Pump alarm word (page 134).

Autochange

The Autochange function can be used to equalize duty time between multiple pumps by varying the sequence in which pumps are started as the required pumping capacity increases.

There are three autochange modes selectable by parameter 78.01 Autochg style:

Actual value [%]

t

t

81.30 Req act change

81.32 Pid enable dev

81.33 Pid enb dev dly

81.29 Pipefill step

81.29

81.29Speed reference [rpm]

81.30 Req act change

27.32 Pipefill ref acc

PID controlPipefill

62 Program features

• Fixed intervals (Fixed): The starting sequence is shifted periodically at pre-defined intervals (parameter 78.05 Autochg interval). In traditional pump control, the pump speed must also be below the level defined by parameter 78.04 Autochg level.

• Runtime equalization (Hourcount): The starting sequence is rearranged when the difference between the runtimes of two pumps exceed a limit, 78.15 Runtime diff. In the new sequence, the pump with the lowest runtime will be started first, the pump with the highest runtime will be started last.

• Autochange when stopped (All stop): The starting sequence is shifted every time the drive (in traditional pump control) or the master drive (in multipump or level control) stops.

All pumps take part in the autochange sequence, except in a traditional pump control configuration where a fixed pump is controlled by the drive at all times and the remaining pumps are only turned on/off by the drive logic (an example is shown starting on page 96). In this case, the fixed pump is always started first, and the starting sequence of the auxiliary pumps is determined by the autochange function.

Settings

Parameter group 78 Pump autochange (page 257).

Diagnostics

Parameters 04.29…04.36 (pump runtime counters; page 124), 05.02 Trad pump cmd (page 125), 05.03 Trad master (page 125), 05.04 Nbr aux pumps on (page 125), 05.36 First in order (page 126), 05.37 Time autochg (page 126), 06.20 Pump status word (page 130), 08.21 Pump alarm word (page 134).

Flow calculation

The flow calculation function provides a reasonably accurate (typically ±3…6%) calculation of the flow without the installation of a separate flow meter. The flow is calculated on the basis of parameter data such as pump inlet and outlet diameters, pressure at pump inlet and outlet, height difference of pressure sensors, and pump characteristics.

The user can either define a PQ (power/flow) or HQ (head/flow) performance curve that is used as the basis for the calculation. It is also possible to use both curve types together with a breakpoint setting.

Notes:• The flow calculation function is not to be used for invoicing purposes.• The flow calculation function cannot be used outside the normal operating range

of the pump.

Program features 63

Settings

Parameter group 80 Flow calculation (page 267). The presence of pressure sensors in the system determines which parameters should be set; refer to the following table for recommendations.

Diagnostics

Parameters 05.05…05.08 (page 125).

Pump cleaning

The drive has a pump cleaning function that can be used to prevent solids from building up on pump impellers or piping. The function consists of a programmable sequence of forward and reverse runs of the pump to shake off any residue on the impeller or piping. This is especially useful with booster and wastewater pumps.

The cleaning sequence can be programmed to occur at suitable intervals, or whenever certain triggering conditions are met.

Note: Not all pumps can be rotated in the reverse direction.

Settings

Parameter group 82 Pump cleaning (page 278).

Diagnostics


Parameter Without pressure sensors With pressure sensors

80.01 Flow calc mode Typically PQ curve Typically HQ curve

80.02 Pump inlet sel Not required Required

80.03 Pump outlet sel Not required Required

80.04…80.13 (HQ curve definition)

Typically not required Typically required

80.14…80.23 (PQ curve definition)

Typically required Typically not required

80.25 Pump inlet diam Not required Required

80.26 Pump outlet diam Not required Required

80.27 Sensors hgt diff Not required Required

80.28 Pump nom speed Required Required

80.29 Density Not required Required

80.30 Efficiency Required Not required

80.31 Flow calc gain Optional correction factor

80.32 Calc low sp Optional pump speed low limit for calculation

64 Program features

Protective functions

Pressure monitoring

The control program contains protective functions for two-level analog or single-level digital pressure monitoring of both the inlet and outlet of the pump.

In analog monitoring, whenever the pressure being monitored meets the first limit, the drive indicates a warning, trips on a fault, or starts to follow a pre-defined reference. When the second limit is met, the drive either stops or trips on a fault.

In digital pressure monitoring, one limit is observed. Whenever the limit is met, the drive indicates an alarm, trips on a fault, or starts to follow a pre-defined reference.

Flow monitoring

The control program has a monitoring function for flow that can be configured to generate an alarm or a fault whenever the flow falls below or rises above predefined limits.

The flow can either be calculated or measured using a flow meter connected to, for example, an analog input.

Application profile monitoring

The application profile monitoring function can be used for long-term supervision of an actual signal. If the selected signal remains above the supervision limit for a specified time, an alarm is generated.

For example, monitoring the deviation between the PID controller setpoint and actual value (parameter 04.04 Process PID err) gives an indication of the general condition of the pump, piping and valves. On the other hand, the PID controller output (parameter 04.05 Process PID out) remaining at 100% for a long time would indicate a leak in the outlet piping.

Settings

Parameter group 81 Pump protection (page 271).

Diagnostics


Program features 65

Control interfaces

Programmable analog inputs

The drive has two programmable analog inputs. Each of the inputs can be independently set as a voltage (0/2…10 V or -10…10 V) or current (0/4…20 mA) input by a jumper on the JCU Control Unit. Each input can be filtered, inverted and scaled. The number of analog inputs can be increased by using FIO-xx I/O extensions.

See also Pressure sensor connection examples on page 108.

Settings

Parameter group 13 Analogue inputs (page 142).

Diagnostics


Programmable analog outputs

The drive has two programmable current-type analog outputs. Each output can be filtered, inverted and scaled. The number of analog outputs can be increased by using FIO-xx I/O extensions.

Settings

Parameter group 15 Analogue outputs (page 158).

Diagnostics


Programmable digital inputs and outputs

The drive has five digital inputs, a digital start interlock input, and two digital input/outputs.

One digital input (DI5) doubles as a PTC thermistor input. See section Thermal motor protection on page 78.

One of the digital input/outputs can be used as a frequency input, the other as a frequency output.

The number of digital input/outputs can be increased by using FIO-xx I/O extensions.

Settings

Parameter group 14 Digital I/O (page 148).

66 Program features

Diagnostics

Parameters 02.01 DI status (page 113), 02.03 DIO status (page 113), 02.20 Freq in (page 114) and 02.21 Freq out (page 114).

Programmable I/O extensions

The number of inputs and outputs can be increased by using FIO-xx I/O extensions. The drive I/O configuration parameters include the maximum number of DI, DIO, AI, AO and RO that can be taken into use with different FIO-xx combinations.

The table below shows the possible I/O combinations of the drive:

For example, with an FIO-21 connected to the drive, parameters controlling DI1…7, DIO1…4, AI1…3, AO1…2 and RO1…4 are in use.

Settings

Parameter groups 13 Analogue inputs (page 142), 14 Digital I/O (page 148), 15 Analogue outputs (page 158) and 94 Ext IO conf (page 281).

Programmable relay outputs

The drive has two relay outputs. The signals to be indicated by the outputs can be selected by parameters.

Relay outputs can be added by using FIO-xx I/O extensions.

Settings

Parameter group 14 Digital I/O (page 148).

Diagnostics

Parameter 02.02 RO status (page 113).

Fieldbus control

The drive can be connected to several different automation systems through its fieldbus interface. See chapters Control through the embedded fieldbus interface (page 329) and Control through a fieldbus adapter (page 357).

Digital inputs

(DI)

Digital I/O (DIO)

Analog inputs

(AI)

Analog outputs

(AO)

Relay outputs

(RO)

JCU Control Unit 6 2 2 2 2

FIO-11 - 2 3 1 -

FIO-21 1 - 1 - 2

FIO-31 - - - - 4

Program features 67

Settings

Parameter groups 50 Fieldbus (page 229), 51 FBA settings (page 231), 52 FBA data in (page 232), 53 FBA data out (page 233) and 58 Embedded Modbus (page 234).

68 Program features

Motor control

Constant speeds

It is possible to predefine up to 7 constant speeds. Constant speeds can be activated, for example, through digital inputs. Constant speeds override the speed reference.

Settings

Parameter group 26 Constant speeds (page 185).

Critical speeds

A Critical speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed ranges because of, for example, mechanical resonance problems.

Settings

Parameter group 25 Critical speed (page 184).

Speed controller tuning

The speed controller of the drive can be automatically adjusted using the autotune function (parameter 23.20 PI tune mode). Autotuning is based on the load and inertia of the motor and the machine. It is, however, also possible to manually adjust the controller gain, integration time and derivation time.

Autotuning can be performed in four different ways depending on the setting of parameter 23.20 PI tune mode. The selections Smooth, Middle and Tight define how the drive torque reference should react to a speed reference step after tuning. The selection Smooth will produce a slow response; Tight will produce a fast response. The selection User allows customized control sensitivity adjustment through parameters 23.21 Tune bandwidth and 23.22 Tune damping. Detailed tuning status information is provided by parameter 06.03 Speed ctrl stat. If the autotuning routine fails, the AUTOTUNE FAILED alarm will occur for approximately 15 seconds. If a stop command is given to the drive during the autotuning, the routine is aborted.

The prerequisites for performing the autotune routine are:• The ID run has been successfully completed• Speed, torque, current and acceleration limits (parameter groups 20 Limits and 22

Speed ref ramp) are set• Speed feedback filtering, speed error filtering and zero speed are set (parameter

groups 19 Speed calculation and 23 Speed ctrl)• The drive is stopped.

The results of the autotune routine are automatically transferred into parameters• 23.01 Proport gain (proportional gain of the speed controller)

Program features 69

• 23.02 Integration time (integration time of the speed controller)• 01.31 Mech time const (mechanical time constant of the machinery).

The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step (typically 1…20%).

The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller output is the reference for the torque controller.

A: UndercompensatedB: Normally tuned (autotuning)C: Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with BD: Overcompensated speed controller

%

t

n

CB D

nN

A

Derivative

Proportional,integral

Derivativeaccelerationcompensation

Torquereference

Speedreference

Actual speed

Errorvalue-

+ +++

70 Program features

Settings

Parameter group 23 Speed ctrl (page 176).

Diagnostics

Parameters 01.01 Motor speed rpm (page 112), 01.02 Motor speed % (page 112) and 01.14 Motor speed est (page 112).

Scalar motor control

It is possible to select scalar control as the motor control method instead of Direct Torque Control (DTC). In scalar control mode, the drive is controlled with a frequency reference. However, the outstanding performance of DTC is not achieved in scalar control.

It is recommended to activate the scalar motor control mode in the following situations:• In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if

the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after motor identification (ID run)

• If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive

• If the drive is used without a motor connected (for example, for test purposes).

In scalar control, some standard features are not available.

Settings

Parameter 99.05 Motor ctrl mode (page 283).

IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive

IR compensation is active only when the motor control mode is scalar. When IR compensation is activated, the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. IR compensation is useful in applications that require a high break-away torque.

In Direct Torque Control (DTC), no IR compensation is possible or needed.

Settings

Parameter 40.07 IR-compensation (page 220).

f (Hz)

Motor voltage

No compensation

IR Compensation

Program features 71

User-definable load curve

The drive output can be limited by defining a load curve. In practice, the user load curve consists of an overload and an underload curve, even though neither is compulsory. Each curve is formed by five points that represent output current or torque as a function of frequency.

An alarm or fault can be set up to occur when the curve is exceeded. The upper boundary (overload curve) can also be used as a torque or current limiter.

Settings

Parameter group 34 User load curve (page 205).

f (Hz)

Load (%)

Par. 34.03 Par. 34.04 Par. 34.05 Par. 34.06 Par. 34.07

Allowed operating range

Overload area

Underload area

34.13

34.1434.15 34.16 34.17

34.08 34.09

34.1034.11

34.12

72 Program features

User-definable U/f curve

The user can define a custom U/f curve (output voltage as a function of frequency). The curve can be used in special applications where linear and quadratic U/f ratios are not adequate (e.g. when motor break-away torque needs to be boosted).

Notes:• The U/f curve can be used in scalar control only, i.e., when parameter 99.05 Motor

ctrl mode is set to Scalar.• Each user-defined point defined must have a higher frequency and higher voltage

than the previous point.

WARNING! High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance or motor damage due to overheating.

Settings

Parameter group 38 Flux ref (page 218).

f (Hz)

Custom U/f ratio Voltage (V)

Par. 38.13Par. 38.12Par. 38.11

Par. 38.10

Par. 38.09

Par. 38.04 Par. 38.05 Par. 38.06 Par. 38.07 Par. 38.08

Program features 73

Flux braking

The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during braking can be converted to motor thermal energy.

The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during flux braking. Therefore, flux braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed. The other benefits of flux braking are:• The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does

not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking.• The cooling of the induction motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor

increases during flux braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more efficiently than the rotor.

Two braking power levels are available:• Moderate braking provides faster deceleration compared to a situation where flux

braking is disabled. The flux level of the motor is limited to prevent excessive heating of the motor.

• Full braking exploits almost all available current to convert the mechanical braking energy to motor thermal energy. Braking time is shorter compared to moderate braking. In cyclic use, motor heating may be significant.

Settings

Parameter 40.10 Flux braking (page 220).

TBrTN

20

40

60

(%)Motor speed

No flux braking

Flux braking

TBr = Braking torqueTN = 100 Nm

Flux braking

No flux brakingt (s) f (Hz)

74 Program features

Application control

Application macros

See chapter Application macros (page 87).

Timers

It is possible to define four different daily or weekly time periods. The time periods can be used to control four different timers. The on/off statuses of the four timers are indicated by bits 0…3 of parameter 06.14 Timed func stat, from where the signal can be connected to any parameter with a bit pointer setting (see page 109). In addition, bit 4 of parameter 06.14 is on if any one of the four timers is on.

Each time period can be assigned to multiple timers; likewise, a timer can be controlled by multiple time periods.

The figure below presents how different time periods are active in daily and weekly modes.

Mon

day

Tues

day

Wed

nesd

ay

Thur

sday

Frid

ay

Satu

rday

Sun

day

Mon

day

Tues

day

Wed

nesd

ay

Time period 1: Start time 00:00:00; Stop time 00:00:00 or 24:00:00; Start on Tuesday; Stop day Sunday

Time period 2: Start time 03:00:00; Stop time 23:00:00; Start day Wednesday; Stop day Wednesday

Time period 3: Start time 21:00:00; Stop time 03:00:00; Start day Tuesday; Stop day SaturdayTime period 4: Start time 12:00:00; Stop time 00:00:00 or 24:00:00; Start day Thursday; Stop

day Tuesday

Thur

sday

Time period 1(weekly)

Time period 4(daily)







Program features 75

A “boost” function is also available for the activation of the timers: a signal source can be selected to extend the activation time for a parameter-adjustable time period.

Settings

Parameter group 36 Timed functions (page 214).

Diagnostics

Parameter 06.14 Timed func stat (page 129).

Timer active

Timer enable signal

Boost signal

Boost time

76 Program features

DC voltage control

Overvoltage control

Overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link is needed with two-quadrant line-side converters when the motor operates within the generating quadrant. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the overvoltage control limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the generating torque when the limit is reached.

Undervoltage control

If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed.

Note: Units equipped with a main contactor must be equipped with a hold circuit (e.g. UPS) to keep the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break.

Voltage control and trip limits

The control and trip limits of the intermediate DC voltage regulator are relative either to a supply voltage value provided by the user, or to an automatically-determined

130

260

390

520

1.6 4.8 8 11.2 14.4t (s)

UDC

fout

TM

UDC= intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = output frequency of the drive,TM = motor torqueLoss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the mains is switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy.

Umains

20

40

60

80

40

80

120

160

UDC(V DC)

fout(Hz)

TM(Nm)

Program features 77

supply voltage. The actual voltage used is shown by parameter 01.19 Used supply volt. The DC voltage (UDC) equals 1.35 times this value.

Automatic identification of the supply voltage is performed every time the drive is powered on. Automatic identification can be disabled by parameter 47.03 SupplyVoltAutoId; the user can then define the voltage manually at parameter 47.04 Supply voltage.

The intermediate DC circuit is charged over an internal resistor which is bypassed when the capacitors are considered charged and the voltage is stabilized.

Settings

Parameter group 47 Voltage ctrl (page 228).

Diagnostics

Parameters 01.07 Dc-voltage (page 112), 01.19 Used supply volt (page 112) and 06.05 Limit word1 (page 128).

01.07 Dc-voltage

Undervoltage control level (0.8 × UDC; 400 V min.)

Undervoltage fault level (UDC, low - 50 V; 350 V min.)

Overvoltage control level (1.25 × UDC; 810 V max.)

Overvoltage fault level (UDC, high + 70 V; 880 V max.)*

UDC = 1.35 × 01.19 Used supply volt

UDC, high = 1.25 x UDC

UDC, low = 0.8 x UDC

*Drives with 230 V supply voltage (ACQ810-04-xxxx-2): The overvoltage fault level is set to 500 V and the minimum levels for undervoltage control and fault are removed.

78 Program features

Safety and protections

Emergency stop

Note: The user is responsible for installing the emergency stop devices and all the additional devices needed for the emergency stop to fulfil the required emergency stop category classes. For more information, contact your local ABB representative.

The emergency stop signal is to be connected to the digital input which is selected as the source for the emergency stop activation (par. 10.13 Em stop off3 or 10.15 Em stop off1). Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus (02.22 FBA main cw or 02.36 EFB main cw).

Note: When an emergency stop signal is detected, the emergency stop function cannot be cancelled even though the signal is cancelled.

Thermal motor protection

The motor can be protected against overheating by• the motor thermal protection model• measuring the motor temperature with 1…3 PTC sensors. This will result in a

more accurate motor model.

Thermal motor protection model

The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions:

1) When power is applied to the drive for the first time, the motor is at ambient temperature (defined by parameter 31.09 Mot ambient temp). After this, when power is applied to the drive, the motor is assumed to be at the estimated temperature.

2) Motor temperature is calculated using the user-adjustable motor thermal time and motor load curve. The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 °C.

It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the drive reacts when overtemperature is detected.

Note: The motor thermal model can be used when only one motor is connected to the inverter.

Temperature measurement

It is possible to detect motor overtemperature by connecting a motor temperature sensor between +24 V and digital input DI5 on the drive.

Constant current is fed through the sensor. The resistance of the sensor increases as the motor temperature rises over the sensor reference temperature Tref, as does the voltage over the resistor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage and converts it into ohms.

Program features 79

The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature.

It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the drive reacts when overtemperature is detected.

For further information on the wiring, refer to the Hardware Manual of the drive.

Settings

Parameter group 31 Motor therm prot (page 197).

Diagnostics

Parameters 01.17 Motor temp1 (page 112) and 01.18 Motor temp2 (page 112).

Programmable protection functions

Start interlock (parameter 10.20)

The parameter selects how the drive reacts to loss of start interlock signal (DIIL).

External fault (parameter 30.01)

A source for an external fault signal is selected by this parameter. When the signal is lost, a fault is generated.

Local control loss detection (parameter 30.03)

The parameter selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break.

Motor phase loss detection (parameter 30.04)

The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a motor phase loss is detected.

100

550

1330

4000

Ohm

T

Temperature PTC resistance

Normal 0…1 kohm

Excessive > 1 kohm

80 Program features

Earth fault detection (parameter 30.05)

The earth fault detection function is based on sum current measurement. Note that• an earth fault in the supply cable does not activate the protection• in a grounded supply, the protection activates in 200 milliseconds• in an ungrounded supply, the supply capacitance should be 1 microfarad or more• the capacitive currents caused by shielded motor cables up to 300 metres will not

activate the protection• the protection is deactivated when the drive is stopped.

Supply phase loss detection (parameter 30.06)

The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a supply phase loss is detected.

Safe torque off detection (parameter 30.07)

The drive monitors the status of the Safe torque off input. For more information on the Safe torque off function, see the Hardware Manual of the drive, and Application guide - Safe torque off function for ACSM1, ACS850 and ACQ810 drives (3AFE68929814 [English]).

Switched supply and motor cabling (parameter 30.08)

The drive can detect if the supply and motor cables have accidentally been switched (for example, if the supply is connected to the motor connection of the drive). The parameter selects if a fault is generated or not.

Stall protection (parameters 30.09…30.12)

The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision limits (current, frequency and time) and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition.

Automatic fault reset

The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, external and “analog input below minimum” faults. By default, automatic resets are off and must be separately activated by the user.

Settings

Parameter group 32 Automatic reset (page 202).

Diagnostics

Parameter 08.07 Alarm word3 (page 132).

Program features 81

Diagnostics

Energy savings calculator

This feature consists of three functionalities:• An energy optimizer that adjusts the motor flux in such a way that the total

efficiency is maximized• A counter that monitors used and saved energy by the motor and displays them in

kWh, currency, or volume of CO2 emission, and• A load analyzer showing the load profile of the drive (see section Load analyzer

on page 82).

Note: The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on the accuracy of the reference motor power given in parameter 45.08 Pump ref power.

Settings

Parameter group 45 Energy optimising (page 227).

Energy consumption monitoring

The control program monitors the energy consumption of the drive and pump, and provides the consumption during the last 12 calendar months as actual signals.

There is also a comparison function that generates an alarm if the consumption rises significantly compared to past consumption. The length of a monitoring period is set by a parameter. The energy consumption within the currently running period is compared to a parameter-adjustable limit, the previous monitoring period, or the average of two previous periods. Whenever the consumption within the current period exceeds the reference by a predefined margin (or tolerance), an alarm is given.

Settings

Parameter group 83 Energy monitoring (page 280).

Diagnostics


Signal supervision

Three signals can be selected to be supervised by this function. Whenever the signal exceeds (or falls below) a predefined limit, a bit of 06.13 Superv status is activated. Absolute values can be used.

Settings

Parameter group 33 Supervision (page 202).

82 Program features

Diagnostics

Parameter 06.13 Superv status (page 129).

Maintenance counters

The program has six different maintenance counters that can be configured to generate an alarm when the counter reaches a pre-defined limit. The counter can be set to monitor any parameter. This feature is especially useful as a service reminder.

There are three types of counters:• Ontime counter. Measures the time a digital source (for example, a bit in a status

word) is on.• Rising edge counter. This counter is incremented whenever the monitored digital

source changes state from 0 to 1.• Value counter. This counter measures, by integration, the monitored parameter.

An alarm is given when the calculated area below the signal peak exceeds a user-defined limit.

Settings

Parameter group 44 Maintenance (page 221).

Diagnostics

Parameters 04.09…04.14 (page 123) and 06.15 Counter status (page 129).

Load analyzer

Peak value logger

The user can select a signal to be monitored by the peak value logger. The logger records the peak value of the signal along with the time the peak occurred, as well as motor current, DC voltage and motor speed at the time of the peak.

Amplitude loggers

The drive has two amplitude loggers.

For amplitude logger 2, the user can select a signal to be sampled at 200 ms intervals when the drive is running, and specify a value that corresponds to 100%. The collected samples are sorted into 10 read-only parameters according to their

Program features 83

amplitude. Each parameter represents an amplitude range 10 percentage points wide, and displays the percentage of the collected samples that fall within that range.

Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current, and cannot be reset. With amplitude logger 1, 100% corresponds to the maximum output current of the drive (Imax).

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group 64 Load analyzer (page 238).

Perc

enta

ge o

f sam

ples

0…10

%

10…

20%

20…

30%

30…

40%

40…

50%

50…

60%

60…

70%

70…

80%

80…

90%

>90%

Amplitude ranges (parameters 64.24…64.33)

84 Program features

Miscellaneous

Backup and restore of drive contents

General

The drive offers a possibility of backing up numerous settings and configurations to external storage such as a PC file (using the DriveStudio tool) and the internal memory of the control panel. These settings and configurations can then be restored to the drive, or a number of drives.

Backup using DriveStudio includes• Parameter settings• User parameter sets• Application program.

Backup using the drive control panel includes• Parameter settings• User parameter sets.

For detailed instructions for performing the backup/restore, refer to page 39 and the DriveStudio documentation.

Limitations

A backup can be done without interfering with drive operation, but restoring a backup always resets and reboots the control unit, so restore is not possible with the drive running.

Restoring backup files from one firmware version to another is considered risky, so the results should be carefully observed and verified when done for the first time. The parameters and application support are bound to change between firmware versions and backups are not always compatible with other firmware versions even if restore is allowed by the backup/restore tool. Before using the backup/restore functions between different firmware versions, refer to the release notes of each version.

Applications should not be transferred between different firmware versions. Contact the supplier of the application when it needs to be updated for a new firmware version.

Parameter restore

Parameters are divided into three different groups that can be restored together or individually:• Motor configuration parameters and identification (ID) run results• Fieldbus adapter and encoder settings• Other parameters.

Program features 85

For example, retaining the existing ID run results in the drive will make a new ID run unnecessary.

Restore of individual parameters can fail for the following reasons:• The restored value does not fall within the minimum and maximum limits of the

drive parameter• The type of the restored parameter is different from that in the drive• The restored parameter does not exist in the drive (often the case when restoring

the parameters of a new firmware version to a drive with an older version)• The backup does not contain a value for the drive parameter (often the case when

restoring the parameters of an old firmware version to a drive with a newer version).

In these cases, the parameter is not restored; the backup/restore tool will warn the user and offer a possibility to set the parameter manually.

User parameter sets

The drive has four user parameter sets that can be saved to the permanent memory and recalled using drive parameters. It is also possible to use digital inputs to switch between different user parameter sets. See the descriptions of parameters 16.09…16.12.

A user parameter set contains all values of parameter groups 10 to 99 (except the configuration settings for fieldbus adapter communication).

As the motor settings are included in the user parameter sets, make sure the settings correspond to the motor used in the application before recalling a user set. In an application where different motors are used with one drive, the motor ID run needs to be performed with each motor and saved to different user sets. The appropriate set can then be recalled when the motor is switched.

Settings

Parameter group 16 System (page 164).

Data storage parameters

Four 16-bit and four 32-bit parameters are reserved for data storage. These parameters are unconnected and can be used for linking, testing and commissioning purposes. They can be written to and read from using other parameters’ pointer settings.

Settings

Parameter group 49 Data storage (page 228).

86 Program features

Drive-to-drive link

The drive-to-drive (D2D) link is a daisy-chained RS-485 transmission line that allows basic master/follower communication with one master drive and multiple followers.

The drive-to-drive link is used for connecting drives when forming a station with multiple pumps.

Settings

Parameter group 76 MF communication (page 250).

Application macros 87

5Application macros

What this chapter containsThis chapter describes the intended use, operation, default control connections, start-up procedure and an application example of each application macro.

More information on the connectivity of the JCU control unit is given in the Hardware Manual of the drive.

GeneralApplication macros are pre-defined parameter sets. When starting up the drive, the user typically selects one of the macros as a basis, makes the essential changes and saves the result as a user parameter set. User parameter sets are managed by the parameters in group 16 System (page 164).

Application macros are activated through the control panel Main menu by selecting ASSISTANTS – Application Macro. A few basic questions about the application appear on the panel; based on the answers, the most suitable macro is applied by the drive. Parameter 16.20 Macro selected indicates which application macro is active.

After the activation of an application macro, an assistant can optionally be launched to set up the essential configuration parameters related to the application. Each of these assistants can also be invoked later by selecting ASSISTANTS in the control panel Main menu.

88 Application macros

Factory default macro

Description and typical application

This macro is suitable for a pump station consisting of one drive controlling a single pump. The system can consist of e.g. one ACQ810 drive, one pump, and a sensor. The sensor typically measures either flow or pressure, and is located at the output of the pump.

By default, process reference (setpoint) is set to 40%, but can alternatively be adjusted through e.g. analog input AI1. The process actual value, or feedback signal, should be connected to analog input AI2. The start command is given through digital input DI1.

The sleep function is activated to optimize the energy efficiency of the installation. By default, the drive is stopped if the motor speed is below 20% of its nominal speed for longer than 60 seconds.

Default settings

See chapter Additional parameter data (page 287).


Default control connectionsXPOW

External power input24 V DC, 1.6 A

+24VI 1GND 2

XRO1, XRO2Relay output RO1 [Ready]250 V AC / 30 V DC2 A

NO 1COM 2NC 3

Relay output RO2 [Fault(-1)]250 V AC / 30 V DC2 A

NO 4COM 5NC 6

XD24+24 V DC +24VD 1Digital input ground DIGND 2+24 V DC +24VD 3Digital input/output ground DIOGND 4Ground selection jumper

XDIDigital input DI1 [Stop/Start] DI1 1Digital input DI2 [Constant speed 1] DI2 2Digital input DI3 [Reset] DI3 3Digital input DI4 DI4 4Digital input DI5 [EXT1/EXT2 selection] DI5 5Start interlock (0 = Stop) DIIL A

XDIODigital input/output DIO1 [Output: Ready] DIO1 1Digital input/output DIO2 [Output: Running] DIO2 2

XAIReference voltage (+) +VREF 1Reference voltage (–) -VREF 2Ground AGND 3Analog input AI1 (Current or voltage, selectable by jumper AI1) [Current] [Speed reference 1]

AI1+ 4AI1- 5

Analog input AI2 (Current or voltage, selectable by jumper AI2) [Current] [Process actual value 1*]

AI2+ 6AI2- 7

AI1 current/voltage selection jumper AI1AI2 current/voltage selection jumper AI2

XAO

Analog output AO1 [Current] AO1+ 1AO1- 2

Analog output AO2 [Speed rpm] AO2+ 3AO2- 4

XD2DDrive-to-drive link termination jumper T

Drive-to-drive link.B 1A 2

BGND 3XSTO

Safe torque off. Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start.

OUT1 1OUT2 2

IN1 3IN2 4

Control panel connectionMemory unit connection

*See Pressure sensor connection examples on page 108.


External control macro


The external control macro can be used in single-pump systems where the process is controlled by other devices than the drive. The drive is speed-controlled.

By default, the drive receives a speed reference through analog input AI1. The reference can alternatively be received through one of the supported fieldbus adapters.

Default settings

Below is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed in chapter Additional parameter data (page 287).

Parameter External control macro defaultNo. Name

12.01 Ext1/Ext2 sel Ext116.16 Menu set active Ext short16.20 Macro selected Ext ctrl26.02 Const speed sel1 C.FALSE77.01 Sleep mode sel Not used




+24VI 1GND 2


NO 1COM 2NC 3


NO 4COM 5NC 6


XDIDigital input DI1 [Stop/Start] DI1 1Digital input DI2 DI2 2Digital input DI3 [Reset] DI3 3Digital input DI4 DI4 4Digital input DI5 DI5 5Start interlock (0 = Stop) DIIL A



AI1+ 4AI1- 5


AI2+ 6AI2- 7


XAO





BGND 3XSTO


OUT1 1OUT2 2

IN1 3IN2 4




Hand/Auto control macro


Start and stop commands and references (setpoints) can be given from one of two external control locations, EXT1 (Hand) or EXT2 (Auto). The start/stop commands received through EXT1 (Hand) are connected to digital input DI1, while the reference is connected to analog input AI1. The start/stop commands from EXT2 (Auto) are connected to DI2 while the reference is connected to AI2. The selection between Hand/Auto is dependent on the status of DI5. The drive is speed-controlled. The speed reference and start/stop commands can also be given from the control panel.

Default settings


Parameter Hand/Auto macro defaultNo. Name

10.05 Ext2 start in1 DI212.05 Ext2 ctrl mode Speed16.16 Menu set active H/A short16.20 Macro selected Hand/Auto21.02 Speed ref2 sel AI2 scaled26.02 Const speed sel1 C.FALSE77.01 Sleep mode sel Not used




+24VI 1GND 2


NO 1COM 2NC 3


NO 4COM 5NC 6


XDIDigital input DI1 [Stop/Start, Hand] DI1 1Digital input DI2 [Stop/Start, Auto] DI2 2Digital input DI3 [Reset] DI3 3Digital input DI4 DI4 4Digital input DI5 [Hand/Auto selection] DI5 5Start interlock (0 = Stop) DIIL A


XAIReference voltage (+) +VREF 1Reference voltage (–) -VREF 2Ground AGND 3Analog input AI1 (Current or voltage, selectable by jumper AI1) [Current] [Speed reference 1, Hand]

AI1+ 4AI1- 5

Analog input AI2 (Current or voltage, selectable by jumper AI2) [Current] [Speed reference 2, Auto]

AI2+ 6AI2- 7


XAO





BGND 3XSTO


OUT1 1OUT2 2

IN1 3IN2 4



TRAD (Traditional pump) control macro


This macro is suitable for a pump station where one pump at a time is directly controlled by the drive, and the rest of the pumps are direct-on-line and switched on and off by the drive via a relay/contactor system. It is possible to have one pump permanently connected to the drive, or to connect any one of the pumps to the drive using contactors. The drive is capable of controlling up to eight parallel pumps.

By default, process reference (setpoint) is set to 40%, but can alternatively be adjusted through e.g. analog input AI1. The process actual value, or feedback signal, should be connected to analog input AI2. The start command is given through digital input DI1. Relay outputs are used to control auxiliary pumps.

Default settings


Parameter Trad. pump control macro defaultNo. Name

14.07 DIO2 out src Fault(-1)14.42 RO1 src Trad pump114.45 RO2 src Trad pump216.16 Menu set active Trad short16.20 Macro selected Trad ctrl26.02 Const speed sel1 C.FALSE75.01 Operation mode Trad ctrl75.02 Nbr of pumps 275.25 Drive start dly 1 s78.01 Autochg style All stop78.03 Interlock mode On78.06 Interlock pump 1 DI278.07 Interlock pump 2 DI4




+24VI 1GND 2

XRO1, XRO2Relay output RO1 [Start pump 1]250 V AC / 30 V DC2 A

NO 1COM 2NC 3

Relay output RO2 [Start pump 2]250 V AC / 30 V DC2 A

NO 4COM 5NC 6


XDIDigital input DI1 [Stop/Start] DI1 1Digital input DI2 [Interlock pump 1] DI2 2Digital input DI3 [Reset] DI3 3Digital input DI4 [Interlock pump 2] DI4 4Digital input DI5 [EXT1/EXT2 selection] DI5 5Start interlock (0 = Stop) DIIL A

XDIODigital input/output DIO1 [Output: Ready] DIO1 1Digital input/output DIO2 [Output: Fault(-1)] DIO2 2


AI1+ 4AI1- 5


AI2+ 6AI2- 7


XAO





BGND 3XSTO


OUT1 1OUT2 2

IN1 3IN2 4




Application examples

Fixed drive-controlled pump with direct-on-line auxiliary pumps

In this example, the drive always controls the same pump. Auxiliary pumps are connected to the supply through contactors that are controlled by the drive.

Below is a listing of typical parameter values that would be used in this configuration.


14.42 RO1 src Ready14.45 RO2 src Trad pump214.48 RO3 src Trad pump316.20 Macro selected Trad ctrl26.02 Const speed sel1 C.FALSE75.01 Operation mode Trad ctrl75.02 Nbr of pumps 375.25 Drive start dly 1 s78.01 Autochg style All stop78.02 Autochg trad Aux78.03 Interlock mode On78.06 Interlock pump 1 DI278.07 Interlock pump 2 DI478.07 Interlock pump 3 Not used




Pump alternation using contactors

In this example, two pumps both have a contactor configuration that enables them to be connected either to the drive output or the supply. At any given time, one pump is connected to the drive, the other is connected to the supply.

Below is a listing of typical parameter values that would be used in this configuration.


14.42 RO1 src Trad pump114.45 RO2 src Trad pump216.20 Macro selected Trad ctrl26.02 Const speed sel1 C.FALSE75.01 Operation mode Trad ctrl75.02 Nbr of pumps 275.25 Drive start dly 1 s78.01 Autochg style All stop78.02 Autochg trad All78.03 Interlock mode On78.06 Interlock pump 1 DI278.07 Interlock pump 2 DI478.07 Interlock pump 3 Not used




Level control macro


The level control macro is designed for controlling a station of 1 to 8 pumps that is used for either emptying or filling a container.

The level control functionality is activated by setting parameter 79.01 Level mode to Emptying or Filling and selecting external control location EXT2. The start levels for the pumps (as well as the alarm levels) are set by parameters in group 79 Level control.

At any given time, one of the drives acts as master. The master status can be rotated between the drives using the Autochange function, or one drive can be fixed to master status. The start/stop level settings of the master are the ones in effect.

The following drawing represents a station with three submersible pumps in emptying mode. Each pump has a pre-defined start level, and more pumps are started as the level in the container rises. The level sensor is connected to an analog input that is selected as the process actual value in parameter group 28 Procact sel.

XD2D

DI

DI

XD2D XD2D

3 3 3

Digital highlevel sensor

DI

DI

DI

DI

Digital low levelsensor

High level alarmPumps at high speed

Low level alarm

Start level for pump 3


Stop level

AI AI AI

Analog levelsensor



Default settings


Parameter Level control macro defaultNo. Name Single pump Multiple pumps16.16 Menu set active Level short M lvl short16.20 Macro selected Level ctrl Multi level76.01 Enable MF comm No Yes77.01 Sleep mode sel Not used Not used79.01 Level mode Emptying Emptying




+24VI 1GND 2


NO 1COM 2NC 3


NO 4COM 5NC 6





AI1+ 4AI1- 5


AI2+ 6AI2- 7


XAO





BGND 3XSTO


OUT1 1OUT2 2

IN1 3IN2 4



Multipump control macro


This macro is suitable for pump stations that consist of multiple pumps, each controlled by a separate drive.

The configuration supports redundancy so that in case of a pump failure or maintenance action on one drive, the remaining drives continue operation. The drives communicate with each other through the drive-to-drive (D2D) link. It is possible to distribute two analog and five digital signals from a specific drive to the other drives via the drive-to-drive link (see parameters 76.11…76.16).

The multipump macro has three modes selectable by parameter.• In master-regulated operation, when the load increases, the master’s speed

increases. After the master has reached full speed, other drives are started one by one. Depending on a parameter setting, the master status is retained by the first drive, or passed on to the drive that was started last.

• Follower drives are run either at a pre-set speed (i.e. at the optimal operating point of the pump) or at the same speed as the master. In both these modes, drives can be prioritized so that the one with the highest priority is the first to be started.

• In direct follower operation, all drives run in synchronization with the master. This mode can be used in time-critical applications or for testing of the pump installation.

Default settings


Parameter Multipump control macro defaultNo. Name

16.16 Menu set active M pump short16.20 Macro selected Multi pump

XD2D XD2D XD2D

DI

AI

XD2D

Drive 1 Drive 2 Drive 3 Drive 8

Control data + shared signals


75.01 Operation mode Multipump76.01 Enable MF comm Yes




+24VI 1GND 2


NO 1COM 2NC 3


NO 4COM 5NC 6





AI1+ 4AI1- 5


AI2+ 6AI2- 7


XAO





BGND 3XSTO


OUT1 1OUT2 2

IN1 3IN2 4




Pressure sensor connection examples

PI

67

AI2+AI2-

Actual value measurement. -20…20 mA. Rin = 100 ohm

XAI0/4…20 mA

Note: The sensor must be powered externally.

PI

XAI+ 1 +VREF Reference voltage output

+–

PI

67

AI2+AI2-

Drive 1 / XAI0/4…20 mA–

+Actual value measurement. -20…20 mA. Rin = 100 ohm

+24V– 6

7AI2+AI2-

Drive 2 / XAI


67

AI2+AI2-

Drive 3 / XAI


–

67

AI2+AI2-


3 AGND Ground0/4…20 mA

OUT

PI

XAI+ 1 +VREF Reference voltage output

–

67

AI2+AI2-


3 AGND Ground0/4…20 mA

Power supply

Parameters 109

6Parameters

What this chapter containsThe chapter describes the parameters, including actual signals, of the control program.

Note: By default, a selective list of parameters is shown by the drive panel or DriveStudio. All parameters can be displayed by setting parameter 16.21 Menu selection to Full.

Terms and abbreviationsTerm DefinitionActual signal Type of parameter that is the result of a measurement or calculation by

the drive. Actual signals can be monitored, but not adjusted, by the user. Parameter groups 1…9 typically contain actual signals.

Bit pointer setting A parameter setting that points to the value of a bit in another parameter (usually an actual signal), or that can be fixed to 0 (FALSE) or 1 (TRUE).When adjusting a bit pointer setting on the optional control panel, “Const” is selected in order to fix the value to 0 (displayed as “C.False”) or 1 (“C.True”). “Pointer” is selected to define a source from another parameter.A pointer value is given in the format P.xx.yy.zz, where xx = parameter group, yy = parameter index, zz = bit number.Pointing to a nonexisting bit will be interpreted as 0 (FALSE).In addition to the “Const” and “Pointer” selections, bit pointer settings may also have other pre-selected settings.

FbEq Fieldbus equivalent. The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication.

p.u. Per unit

Value pointer setting A parameter that points to the value of another actual signal or parameter.A pointer value is given in the format P.xx.yy, where xx = parameter group, yy = parameter index.

110 Parameters

Summary of parameter groupsGroup Contents Page01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring of the drive. 112

02 I/O values Input and output states and values; control and status words. 113

03 Control values Speed and torque control values. 123

04 Appl values Process and counter values. 123

05 Pump values Pump station actual values. 124

06 Drive status Drive status words. 126

08 Alarms & faults Alarm and fault information. 131

09 System info Drive type, program revision and option slot occupation information. 134

10 Start/stop/dir Start/stop/direction, run enable and emergency stop source selections; start inhibit and start interlock configuration.

135

11 Start/stop mode Start and stop modes; magnetization settings; DC hold configuration. 140

12 Operating mode Selection of external control location and EXT2 operating mode. 141

13 Analogue inputs Analog input signal processing. 142

14 Digital I/O Configuration of digital input/outputs, relay outputs, the frequency input, and the frequency output.

148

15 Analogue outputs Selection and processing of actual signals to be indicated through the analog outputs.

158

16 System Local lock and parameter lock settings; parameter restore; user parameter set load/save; parameter change log reset; parameter list settings; unit of power selection; application macro display.

164

19 Speed calculation Speed scaling, feedback and supervision settings. 167

20 Limits Drive operation limits. 170

21 Speed ref Speed reference source selection and processing. 172

22 Speed ref ramp Speed reference and emergency stop (OFF3) ramp settings. 173

23 Speed ctrl Speed controller settings. 176

25 Critical speed Configuration of critical speeds (or ranges of speed) that are avoided due to, for example, mechanical resonance problems.

184

26 Constant speeds Constant speed selection and values. 185

27 Process PID Configuration of process PID control. 187

28 Procact sel Process actual value (feedback) settings. 191

29 Setpoint sel Process setpoint (reference) settings. 193

30 Fault functions Configuration of behavior of the drive upon various fault situations. 195

31 Motor therm prot Motor temperature measurement and thermal protection settings. 197

32 Automatic reset Configuration of conditions for automatic fault resets. 202

33 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision. 202

34 User load curve Configuration of user load curve. 205

35 Process variable Selection and modification of process variables for display as parameters 04.06 … 04.08.

207

36 Timed functions Configuration of timers. 214

38 Flux ref Flux reference and U/f curve settings. 218

40 Motor control Motor control settings such as performance/noise optimization, slip gain, voltage reserve and IR compensation.

219

Parameters 111

44 Maintenance Maintenance counter configuration. 221

45 Energy optimising Energy optimization settings. 227

47 Voltage ctrl Overvoltage and undervoltage control settings. 228

49 Data storage Data storage parameters reserved for the user. 228

50 Fieldbus Settings for configuration of communication via a fieldbus adapter. 229

51 FBA settings Fieldbus adapter-specific settings. 231

52 FBA data in Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus controller via fieldbus adapter.

232

53 FBA data out Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to drive via fieldbus adapter.

233

56 Panel display Selection of signals to be displayed on control panel. 233

58 Embedded Modbus Configuration parameters for the embedded fieldbus (EFB) interface. 234

64 Load analyzer Peak value and amplitude logger settings. 238

75 Pump logic Configuration settings for the pump station. 241

76 MF communication Communication configuration for applications consisting of multiple pumps with dedicated drives.

250

77 Pump sleep Sleep function settings. 254

78 Pump autochange Pump Autochange and interlock settings. 257

79 Level control Settings for level control applications. 262

80 Flow calculation Settings for the flow calculation function. 267

81 Pump protection Settings for pump protection functions. 271

82 Pump cleaning Settings for the pump cleaning sequence. 278

83 Energy monitoring Energy consumption monitoring settings. 280

94 Ext IO conf I/O extension configuration. 281

95 Hw configuration Diverse hardware-related settings. 281

97 User motor par Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor model. 282

99 Start-up data Language selection, motor configuration and ID run settings. 283

Group Contents Page

112 Parameters

Parameter listingNo. Name/Value Description FbEq0101 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring of the drive.

01.01 Motor speed rpm Filtered, estimated motor speed in rpm. The filter time constant can be adjusted using parameter 19.03 MotorSpeed filt.

100 = 1 rpm

01.02 Motor speed % Actual speed in percent of the motor synchronous speed. 100 = 1%

01.03 Output frequency Estimated drive output frequency in Hz. 100 = 1 Hz

01.04 Motor current Measured motor current in A. 100 = 1 A

01.05 Motor current % Motor current in percent of the nominal motor current. 10 = 1%

01.06 Motor torque Motor torque in percent of the nominal motor torque. See also parameter 01.29 Torq nom scale.

10 = 1%

01.07 Dc-voltage Measured intermediate circuit voltage. 100 = 1 V

01.14 Motor speed est Estimated motor speed in rpm. 100 = 1 rpm

01.15 Temp inverter Estimated IGBT temperature in percent of fault limit. 10 = 1%

01.17 Motor temp1 Measured temperature of motor 1 in degrees Celsius when a KTY sensor is used. (With a PTC sensor, the value is always 0.)

10 = 1 °C

01.18 Motor temp2 Measured temperature of motor 2 in degrees Celsius when a KTY sensor is used. (With a PTC sensor, the value is always 0.)

10 = 1 °C

01.19 Used supply volt Either the user-given supply voltage (parameter 47.04 Supply voltage), or, if auto-identification is enabled by parameter 47.03 SupplyVoltAutoId, the automatically determined supply voltage.

10 = 1 V

01.21 Cpu usage Microprocessor load in percent. 1 = 1%

01.22 Power inu out Drive output power in kW or hp, depending on setting of parameter 16.17 Power unit.

100 = 1 kW or hp

01.23 Motor power Measured motor shaft power in kW or hp, depending on setting of parameter 16.17 Power unit.

100 = 1 kW or hp

01.24 kWh inverter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in kilowatt-hours. Can be reset by entering a 0 using the DriveStudio PC tool.

1 = 1 kWh

01.25 kWh supply Amount of energy that the drive has taken from the AC supply in kilowatt-hours. Can be reset by entering a 0 using the DriveStudio PC tool.

1 = 1 kWh

01.26 On-time counter On-time counter. The counter runs when the drive is powered. Can be reset by entering a 0 using the DriveStudio PC tool.

1 = 1 h

01.27 Run-time counter Motor run-time counter. The counter runs when the inverter modulates. Can be reset by entering a 0 using the DriveStudio PC tool.Note: The drive logic uses this value for equalization of pump running duties. See section Autochange (page 61).

1 = 1 h

01.28 Fan on-time Running time of the drive cooling fan. Can be reset by entering a 0 using the DriveStudio PC tool.

1 = 1 h

01.29 Torq nom scale Nominal torque which corresponds to 100%.Note: This value is copied from parameter 99.12 Mot nom torque if entered. Otherwise the value is calculated.

1000 = 1 N•m

Parameters 113

01.30 Polepairs Calculated number of pole pairs in the motor. 1 = 1

01.31 Mech time const Mechanical time constant of the drive and the machinery as determined by the speed controller autotune function.See parameter group 23 Speed ctrl on page 176.

1000 = 1 s

01.32 Temp phase A Measured temperature of phase U power stage in percent of fault limit.

10 = 1%

01.33 Temp phase B Measured temperature of phase V power stage in percent of fault limit.

10 = 1%

01.34 Temp phase C Measured temperature of phase W power stage in percent of fault limit.

10 = 1%

01.35 Saved energy Energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on-line motor connection.Note: This value is derived from subtracting the drive’s energy consumed from the direct-on-line consumption calculated on the basis of parameter 45.08 Pump ref power. As such, the accuracy of this signal is dependent on the accuracy of the direct-on-line power estimate entered in that parameter.See parameter group 45 Energy optimising on page 227.

1 = 1 kWh

01.36 Saved amount Monetary savings compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is a multiplication of parameters 01.35 Saved energy and 45.02 Energy tariff1.See parameter group 45 Energy optimising on page 227.

100 = 1

01.37 Saved CO2 Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is calculated by multiplying the saved energy in MWh by 45.07 CO2 Conv factor (default 0.5 tn/MWh).See parameter group 45 Energy optimising on page 227.

10 = 1 metric ton

01.38 Temp int board Measured temperature of the interface board in degrees Celsius.

10 = 1 °C

0202 I/O values Input and output states and values; control and status words.

02.01 DI status Status of digital inputs DI6…DI1. Example: 000001 = DI1 is on, DI2…DI6 are off.

-

02.02 RO status Status of relay outputs RO5…RO1. Example: 00001 = RO1 is energized, RO2…RO5 are de-energized.

-

02.03 DIO status Status of digital input/outputs DIO4…DIO1. Example: 0000001001 = DIO1 and DIO4 are on, remainder are off. DIO3…DIO4 are available only with an FIO I/O extension module.

-

02.04 AI1 Value of analog input AI1 in V or mA. Input type is selected with a jumper on the JCU Control Unit.

1000 = 1 unit

02.05 AI1 scaled Scaled value of analog input AI1. See parameters 13.04 AI1 max scale and 13.05 AI1 min scale.

1000 = 1 unit

02.06 AI2 Value of analog input AI2 in V or mA. Input type is selected with a jumper on the JCU Control Unit.

1000 = 1 unit


1000 = 1 unit

02.08 AI3 Value of analog input AI3 in V or mA. For input type information, see the extension module manual.

1000 = 1 unit


1000 = 1 unit

No. Name/Value Description FbEq

114 Parameters


1000 = 1 unit


1000 = 1 unit


1000 = 1 unit


1000 = 1 unit

02.16 AO1 Value of analog output AO1 in mA. 1000 = 1 mA




02.20 Freq in Scaled value of DIO1 when it is used as a frequency input. See parameters 14.02 DIO1 conf and 14.57 Freq in max.

1000 = 1

02.21 Freq out Frequency output value of DIO2 when it is used as a frequency output (parameter 14.06 is set to Freq output).

1000 = 1 Hz


Parameters 115

02.22 FBA main cw Internal Control Word of the drive received through the fieldbus adapter interface. See also chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter on page 357.Log. = Logical combination (i.e. Bit AND/OR Selection parameter); Par. = Selection parameter.

-


Bit Name Value Information Log. Par.0* Stop 1 Stop according to the stop mode selected by par. 11.03

Stop mode or according to the requested stop mode (bits 2…6). Note: Simultaneous stop and start commands result in a stop command.

OR 10.01, 10.04

0 No action.1 Start 1 Start. Note: Simultaneous stop and start commands

result in a stop command. OR 10.01, 10.04

0 No action.2* StpMode

em off1 Emergency OFF2 (bit 0 must be 1). Drive is stopped by

cutting off motor power supply (the motor coasts to stop). The drive will restart only with the next rising edge of the start signal when the run enable signal is on.

AND –


em stop1 Emergency stop OFF3 (bit 0 must be 1). Stop within

time defined by 22.12 Em stop time. AND 10.130 No action.

4* StpMode off1

1 Emergency stop OFF1 (bit 0 must be 1). Stop along the currently active deceleration ramp. AND 10.15


ramp1 Stop along the currently active deceleration ramp.

– 11.030 No action.

6* StpMode coast

1 Coast to stop.– 11.03

0 No action.7 Run

enable1 Activate run enable.

AND 10.110 Activate run disable.

8 Reset 0 -> 1 Fault reset if an active fault exists.OR 10.10

other No action.(continued)* If all stop mode bits (2…6) are 0, stop mode is selected by parameter 11.03 Stop mode. Coast stop (bit 6) overrides the emergency stop (bits 2/3/4). Emergency stop overrides normal ramp stop (bit 5).

116 Parameters


Bit Name Value Information Log. Par.(continued)9…10 Reserved11 Remote

cmd1 Fieldbus control enabled.

– –0 Fieldbus control disabled.

12 Ramp out 0

1 Force output of Ramp Function Generator to zero. The drive ramps to a stop (current and DC voltage limits are in force). – –

0 No action.13 Ramp hold 1 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).

– –0 No action.

14 Ramp in 0 1 Force input of Ramp Function Generator to zero.– –

0 No action.15 Ext1 / Ext2 1 Switch to external control location EXT2.

OR 12.010 Switch to external control location EXT1.

16 Req startinh

1 Activate start inhibit.– –

0 No start inhibit.17 Local ctl 1 Request local control for Control Word. Used when the

drive is controlled from a PC tool or panel or local fieldbus.• Local fieldbus: Transfer to fieldbus local control

(control through Control Word or reference). Fieldbus steals the control.

• Panel or PC tool: Transfer to local control.

– –

0 Request external control.18 FbLocal ref 1 Request fieldbus local control.

– –0 No fieldbus local control.

19…27 Reserved28 CW B28 Freely programmable control bits. See parameters

50.08…50.11 and the user manual of the fieldbus adapter.– –

29 CW B2930 CW B3031 CW B31

Parameters 117

02.24 FBA main sw Internal Status word of the drive to be sent through the fieldbus adapter interface. See also chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter on page 357.

-


Bit Name Value Information0 Ready 1 Drive is ready to receive start command.

0 Drive is not ready.1 Enabled 1 External run enable signal is received.

0 No external run enable signal is received.2 Relay

running1 Drive is modulating.0 Drive is not modulating.

3 Ref running

1 Normal operation is enabled. Drive is running and following given reference.

0 Normal operation is disabled. Drive is not following given reference (for example, it is modulating during magnetization).

4 Em off (OFF2)

1 Emergency OFF2 is active.0 Emergency OFF2 is inactive.

5 Em stop (OFF3)

1 Emergency stop OFF3 (ramp stop) is active.0 Emergency stop OFF3 is inactive.

6 Ack startinh

1 Start inhibit is active.0 Start inhibit is inactive.

7 Alarm 1 An alarm is active. See chapter Fault tracing on page 3130 No alarm is active.

8 At setpoint 1 Drive is at setpoint. Actual value equals reference value (i.e. the difference between the actual speed and speed reference is within the speed window defined by parameter 19.10 Speed window).

0 Drive has not reached setpoint.(continued)

118 Parameters

02.26 FBA main ref1 Internal and scaled reference 1 of the drive received through the fieldbus adapter interface. See parameter 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel and chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter on page 357.

1 = 1

02.27 FBA main ref2 Internal and scaled reference 2 of the drive received through the fieldbus adapter interface. See parameter 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel and chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter on page 357.

1 = 1

02.34 Panel ref Reference given from the control panel. See also parameter 56.07 Local ref unit.

100 = 1 rpm10 = 1%


Bit Name Value Information(continued)9 Limit 1 Operation is limited by any of the torque limits.

0 Operation is within the torque limits.10 Above limit 1 Actual speed exceeds limit defined by parameter 19.08 Above speed

lim.0 Actual speed is within the defined limits.

11 Ext2 act 1 External control location EXT2 is active.0 External control location EXT1 is active.

12 Local fb 1 Fieldbus local control is active.0 Fieldbus local control is inactive.

13 Zero speed

1 Drive speed is below limit defined by parameter 19.06 Zero speed limit.

0 Drive has not reached zero speed limit.14 Rev act 1 Drive is running in reverse direction.

0 Drive is running in forward direction.15 Reserved16 Fault 1 A fault is active. See chapter Fault tracing on page 313.

0 No fault is active.17 Local

panel1 Local control is active, i.e. the drive is controlled from PC tool or

control panel.0 Local control is inactive.

18…26 Reserved27 Request ctl 1 Control Word is requested from fieldbus.

0 Control Word is not requested from fieldbus.28 SW B28 Programmable control bits (unless fixed by the used profile). See parameters

50.08…50.11 and the user manual of the fieldbus adapter.29 SW B2930 SW B3031 SW B31

Parameters 119

02.36 EFB main cw Internal Control Word of the drive received through the embedded fieldbus interface. See chapter Control through the embedded fieldbus interface on page 329. Log. = Logical combination (i.e. Bit AND/OR Selection parameter); Par. = Selection parameter.

-


Bit Name Value Information Log. Par.0* Stop 1 Stop according to the stop mode selected by par. 11.03

Stop mode or according to the requested stop mode (bits 2…6). Note: Simultaneous stop and start commands result in a stop command.

OR 10.01, 10.04

0 No action.1 Start 1 Start. Note: Simultaneous stop and start commands

result in a stop command. OR 10.01, 10.04


em off1 Emergency OFF2 (bit 0 must be 1). Drive is stopped by

cutting off motor power supply (the motor coasts to stop). The drive will restart only with the next rising edge of the start signal when the run enable signal is on.

AND –


em stop1 Emergency stop OFF3 (bit 0 must be 1). Stop within

time defined by 22.12 Em stop time. AND 10.130 No action.

4* StpMode off1

1 Emergency stop OFF1 (bit 0 must be 1). Stop along the currently active deceleration ramp. AND 10.15


ramp1 Stop along the currently active deceleration ramp.

– 11.030 No action.

6* StpMode coast

1 Coast to stop.– 11.03

0 No action.7 Run

enable1 Activate run enable.

AND 10.110 Activate run disable.

8 Reset 0 -> 1 Fault reset if an active fault exists.OR 10.10

other No action.(continued)* If all stop mode bits (2…6) are 0, stop mode is selected by parameter 11.03 Stop mode. Coast stop (bit 6) overrides the emergency stop (bits 2/3/4). Emergency stop overrides normal ramp stop (bit 5).

120 Parameters


Bit Name Value Information Log. Par.(continued)9…10 Reserved11 Remote

cmd1 Fieldbus control enabled.

– –0 Fieldbus control disabled.

12 Ramp out 0

1 Force output of Ramp Function Generator to zero. The drive ramps to a stop (current and DC voltage limits are in force). – –

0 No action.13 Ramp hold 1 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).

– –0 No action.

14 Ramp in 0 1 Force input of Ramp Function Generator to zero.– –

0 No action.15 Ext1 / Ext2 1 Switch to external control location EXT2.

OR 12.010 Switch to external control location EXT1.

16 Req startinh

1 Activate start inhibit.– –

0 No start inhibit.17 Local ctl 1 Request local control for Control Word. Used when the

drive is controlled from a PC tool or panel or local fieldbus.• Local fieldbus: Transfer to fieldbus local control

(control through Control Word or reference). Fieldbus steals the control.

• Panel or PC tool: Transfer to local control.

– –

0 Request external control.18 FbLocal ref 1 Request fieldbus local control.

– –0 No fieldbus local control.

19…27 Reserved28 CW B28 Freely programmable control bits. See parameters

50.08…50.11.– –

29 CW B2930 CW B3031 CW B31

Parameters 121

02.37 EFB main sw Internal Status word of the drive to be sent through the embedded fieldbus interface. See chapter Control through the embedded fieldbus interface on page 329.

-


Bit Name Value Information0 Ready 1 Drive is ready to receive start command.

0 Drive is not ready.1 Enabled 1 External run enable signal is received.

0 No external run enable signal is received.2 Running 1 Drive is modulating.

0 Drive is not modulating.3 Ref

running1 Normal operation is enabled. Drive is running and following given

reference.0 Normal operation is disabled. Drive is not following given reference

(for example, it is modulating during magnetization).4 Em off

(OFF2)1 Emergency OFF2 is active.0 Emergency OFF2 is inactive.

5 Em stop (OFF3)

1 Emergency stop OFF3 (ramp stop) is active.0 Emergency stop OFF3 is inactive.

6 Ack startinh

1 Start inhibit is active.0 Start inhibit is inactive.

7 Alarm 1 An alarm is active. See chapter Fault tracing on page 313.0 No alarm is active.

8 At setpoint 1 Drive is at setpoint. Actual value equals reference value (i.e. the difference between the actual speed and speed reference is within the speed window defined by parameter 19.10 Speed window).

0 Drive has not reached setpoint.(continued)

122 Parameters

02.38 EFB main ref1 Internal and scaled reference 1 of the drive received through the embedded fieldbus interface. See parameter 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel and chapter Control through the embedded fieldbus interface on page 329.

-

02.39 EFB main ref2 Internal and scaled reference 2 of the drive received through the embedded fieldbus interface. See parameter 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel and chapter Control through the embedded fieldbus interface on page 329.

--

02.40 FBA setpoint Target parameter for writing the setpoint from the fieldbus. The unit and scaling are defined by parameters 28.06 Act unit sel and 28.07 Act FBA scaling respectively.

-

02.41 FBA act val Target parameter for writing a feedback value from the fieldbus. The unit and scaling are defined by parameters 28.06 Act unit sel and 28.07 Act FBA scaling respectively.

-

02.42 Shared DI Status of shared digital inputs received through the drive-to-drive link. Example: 00000001 = DI1 is on, DI2…DI6 are off. See parameters 76.11…76.16.

-

02.43 Shared signal 1 Shows the value of shared signal 1 as received through the drive-to-drive link. See parameters 76.11…76.16.

-

02.44 Shared signal 2 Shows the value of shared signal 2 as received through the drive-to-drive link. See parameters 76.11…76.16.

-


Bit Name Value Information(continued)9 Limit 1 Operation is limited by any of the torque limits.

0 Operation is within the torque limits.10 Above limit 1 Actual speed exceeds limit defined by parameter 19.08 Above speed

lim.0 Actual speed is within the defined limits.

11 Ext2 act 1 External control location EXT2 is active.0 External control location EXT1 is active.

12 Local fb 1 Fieldbus local control is active.0 Fieldbus local control is inactive.

13 Zero speed

1 Drive speed is below limit defined by parameter 19.06 Zero speed limit.

0 Drive has not reached zero speed limit.14 Rev act 1 Drive is running in reverse direction.

0 Drive is running in forward direction.15 Reserved16 Fault 1 A fault is active. See chapter Fault tracing on page 313.

0 No fault is active.17 Local

panel1 Local control is active, i.e. the drive is controlled from PC tool or

control panel.0 Local control is inactive.

18…26 Reserved27 Request ctl 1 Control Word is requested from fieldbus.

0 Control Word is not requested from fieldbus.28 SW B28 Programmable control bits (unless fixed by the used profile). See parameters

50.08…50.11.29 SW B2930 SW B3031 SW B31

Parameters 123

0303 Control values Speed and torque control values.

03.03 SpeedRef unramp Used speed reference ramp input in rpm. 100 = 1 rpm

03.05 SpeedRef ramped Ramped and shaped speed reference in rpm. 100 = 1 rpm

03.06 SpeedRef used Used speed reference in rpm (reference before speed error calculation).

100 = 1 rpm

03.07 Speed error filt Filtered speed error value in rpm. 100 = 1 rpm

03.08 Acc comp torq Output of the acceleration compensation (torque in percent). 10 = 1%

03.09 Torq ref sp ctrl Limited speed controller output torque in percent. 10 = 1%

03.13 Torq ref to TC Torque reference in percent for the torque control. 10 = 1%

03.14 Torq ref used Torque reference after frequency, voltage and torque limiters. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque.

10 = 1%

03.17 Flux actual Actual flux reference in percent. 1 = 1%

03.20 Max speed ref Maximum speed reference. 100 = 1 rpm

03.21 Min speed ref Minimum speed reference. 100 = 1 rpm

0404 Appl values Process and counter values.

04.01 Act val Final actual value after selection (see parameter group 28 Procact sel). The unit and scaling are defined by parameters 28.06 Act unit sel and 28.07 Act FBA scaling respectively.See also parameters 04.20…04.22.

-

04.02 Setpoint Final setpoint (reference) value after selection (see parameter group 29 Setpoint sel). The unit and scaling are defined by parameters 28.06 Act unit sel and 28.07 Act FBA scaling respectively.See also parameters 04.23…04.25.

-

04.04 Process PID err Process PID error, i.e. difference between PID setpoint and actual value.

10 = 1%

04.05 Process PID out Output of the process PID controller. 10 = 1%

04.06 Process var1 Process variable 1. See parameter group 35 Process variable.

1000 = 1%


1000 = 1%


1000 = 1%

04.09 Counter ontime1 Reading of on-time counter 1. See parameter 44.01 Ontime1 func. Can be reset by entering a 0.

1 = 1 s

04.10 Counter ontime2 Reading of on-time counter 2. See parameter group 44.05 Ontime2 func. Can be reset by entering a 0.

1 = 1 s

04.11 Counter edge1 Reading of rising edge counter 1. See parameter group 44.09 Edge count1 func. Can be reset by entering a 0.

1 = 1

04.12 Counter edge2 Reading of rising edge counter 2. See parameter group 44.14 Edge count2 func. Can be reset by entering a 0.

1 = 1

04.13 Counter value1 Reading of value counter 1. See parameter group 44.19 Val count1 func. Can be reset by entering a 0.

1 = 1

04.14 Counter value2 Reading of value counter 2. See parameter group 44.24 Val count2 func. Can be reset by entering a 0.

1 = 1

04.20 Act val 1 out Actual value 1 (selected by parameter 28.02 Act val 1 src). 100 = 1 unit


124 Parameters

04.21 Act val 2 out Actual value 2 (selected by parameter 28.03 Act val 2 src). 100 = 1 unit

04.22 Act val % Final actual value in %. 100 = 1%

04.23 Setpoint val 1 Setpoint 1 (selected by parameter 29.02 Setpoint 1 src). 100 = 1 unit

04.24 Setpoint val 2 Setpoint 2 (selected by parameter 29.03 Setpoint 2 src). 100 = 1 unit

04.25 Setpoint val % Final setpoint in %. 100 = 1%

04.26 Wake up level Final calculated wake-up level. See the selections of parameter 77.08 Wake up mode sel.

100 = 1

04.27 Shared source Node number of the drive that is currently the source of shared signals. See parameters 76.11…76.16.

TBA

04.28 Pump runtime Pump run-time counter. The counter runs when the drive is running (started). Can be reset using parameter 78.14 Runtime change.

1 = 1 h

04.29 Trad 1 runtime Pump 1 run-time counter (for traditional control – see page 94). Can be reset using parameter 78.14 Runtime change.

1 = 1 h


1 = 1 h


1 = 1 h


1 = 1 h


1 = 1 h


1 = 1 h


1 = 1 h


1 = 1 h

0505 Pump values Pump station actual values.

05.01 MF status State of drive in a multipump configuration (several drives connected by the drive-to-drive link).

No Drive-to-drive communication is not active. 0

Standby The drive is ready to start and waiting for a start command from the master.

1

Master The drive is running and currently the master. 2

Follower The drive is running and currently a follower. 3


Parameters 125

05.02 Trad pump cmd Pump control word. The bits of this parameter can be used to control the relay outputs that switch pumps on and off.

-

05.03 Trad master In traditional pump control, the number of the pump that is directly controlled by the drive.

1 = 1

05.04 Nbr aux pumps on Number of auxiliary pumps running. 1 = 1

05.05 Flow act Actual flow as calculated by the drive. See parameter group 80 Flow calculation (page 267).

100 = 1 m3/h

05.06 Flow by head Flow calculated on the basis of the HQ performance curve. See parameter group 80 Flow calculation (page 267).

100 = 1 m3/h

05.07 Flow by power Flow calculated on the basis of the PQ performance curve. See parameter group 80 Flow calculation (page 267).

100 = 1 m3/h

05.08 Total flow Total calculated flow. Stored when the drive is not powered. Can be reset using parameter 80.33 Sum flow reset.

1 = 1 m3

05.09 Bypass ref Reference used when parameter 75.01 Operation mode is set to Reg bypass.

10 = 1 rpm

05.10 Speed ref Final speed reference from the pump control logic. 10 = 1 rpm

05.20 kWh current read Energy consumed during the current period.The length of the period is set by parameter 83.02 Mon period.

1 = 1 kWh

05.21 kWh prev read Energy consumed during the last completed period. The length of the period is set by parameter 83.02 Mon period.

1 = 1 kWh

05.22 kWh posprev read Energy consumed during the period before the last completed period. The length of the period is set by parameter 83.02 Mon period.

1 = 1 kWh

05.23 kWh cur mon read Energy consumed during the current month. 1 = 1 kWh

05.24 kWh January Energy consumed during last January. 1 = 1 kWh

05.25 kWh February Energy consumed during last February. 1 = 1 kWh

05.26 kWh March Energy consumed during last March. 1 = 1 kWh

05.27 kWh April Energy consumed during last April. 1 = 1 kWh

05.28 kWh May Energy consumed during last May. 1 = 1 kWh

05.29 kWh June Energy consumed during last June. 1 = 1 kWh

05.30 kWh July Energy consumed during last July. 1 = 1 kWh

05.31 kWh August Energy consumed during last August. 1 = 1 kWh

05.32 kWh September Energy consumed during last September. 1 = 1 kWh

05.33 kWh October Energy consumed during last October. 1 = 1 kWh

05.34 kWh November Energy consumed during last November. 1 = 1 kWh


Bit Name0 Pump 1. Note: The setting of parameter 78.02 Autochg trad determines whether “Pump

1” refers to the first pump of the station, or the first auxiliary pump of the station.1 Pump 22 Pump 33 Pump 44 Pump 55 Pump 66 Pump 77 Pump 8

126 Parameters

05.35 kWh December Energy consumed during last December. 1 = 1 kWh

05.36 First in order The first pump in the current Autochange sequence. 1 = 1

05.37 Time autochg Time elapsed since last Autochange. 1 = 1 ms

05.39 Next start node (Only valid when the drive is master.) Node number of the next drive to be started.

1 = 1

0606 Drive status Drive status words.

06.01 Status word1 Status word 1 of the drive. -


Bit Name Information0 Ready 1 = Drive is ready to receive start command.

0 = Drive is not ready.1 Enabled 1 = External run enable signal is received.

0 = No external run enable signal is received.2 Started 1 = Drive has received start command.

0 = Drive has not received start command.3 Running 1 = Drive is modulating.

0 = Drive is not modulating.4 Em off

(off2)1 = Emergency OFF2 is active.0 = Emergency OFF2 is inactive.

5 Em stop (off3)

1 = Emergency OFF3 (ramp stop) is active.0 = Emergency OFF3 is inactive.

6 Ack startinh 1 = Start inhibit is active.0 = Start inhibit is inactive.

7 Alarm 1 = Alarm is active. See chapter Fault tracing.0 = No alarm is active.

8 Ext2 act 1 = External control EXT2 is active.0 = External control EXT1 is active.

9 Local fb 1 = Fieldbus local control is active.0 = Fieldbus local control is inactive.

10 Fault 1 = Fault is active. See chapter Fault tracing.0 = No fault is active.

11 Local panel 1 = Local control is active, ie. drive is controlled from PC tool or control panel.0 = Local control is inactive.

12 Fault(-1) 1 = No fault is active.0 = Fault is active. See chapter Fault tracing.

13…15 Reserved

Parameters 127

06.02 Status word2 Status word 2 of the drive. -


Bit Name Information0 Start act 1 = Drive start command is active.

0 = Drive start command is inactive.1 Stop act 1 = Drive stop command is active.

0 = Drive stop command is inactive.2 Ready relay 1 = Ready to function: run enable signal on, no fault, emergency stop signal

off, no ID run inhibition. Connected by default to DIO1 by par. 14.03 DIO1 out src.0 = Not ready to function.

3 Modulating 1 = Modulating: IGBTs are controlled, ie. the drive is RUNNING.0 = No modulation: IGBTs are not controlled.

4 Ref running 1 = Normal operation is enabled. Running. Drive follows the given reference.0 = Normal operation is disabled. Drive is not following the given reference (eg. in magnetization phase drive is modulating).

5 Reserved6 Off1 1 = Emergency stop OFF1 is active.

0 = Emergency stop OFF1 is inactive.7 Start inh

mask1 = Maskable (by par. 12.01 Start inhibit) start inhibit is active.0 = No maskable start inhibit is active.

8 Start inh nomask

1 = Non-maskable start inhibit is active.0 = No non-maskable start inhibit is active.

9 Chrg rel closed

1 = Charging relay is closed.0 = Charging relay is open.

10 Sto act 1 = Safe torque off function is active. See parameter 30.07 Sto diagnostic.0 = Safe torque off function is inactive.

11 Sleep active

1 = Sleep mode active.0 = Sleep mode inactive.

12 Ramp in 0 1 = Ramp Function Generator input is forced to zero.0 = Normal operation.

13 Ramp hold 1 = Ramp Function Generator output is held.0 = Normal operation.

14 Ramp out 0 1 = Ramp Function Generator output is forced to zero.0 = Normal operation.

15 Reserved

128 Parameters

06.03 Speed ctrl stat Speed control status word. -

06.05 Limit word1 Limit word 1. -


Bit Name Information0 Speed act

neg1 = Actual speed is negative.

1 Zero speed 1 = Actual speed has reached the zero speed limit (parameters 19.06 Zero speed limit and 19.07 Zero speed delay).

2 Above limit 1 = Actual speed has exceeded the supervision limit (parameter 19.08 Above speed lim).

3 At setpoint 1 = The difference between the actual speed and the unramped speed reference is within the speed window (parameter 19.10 Speed window).

4 Bal active 1 = Speed controller output is being forced to value of parameter 27.35 PID bal ref.

5 PI tune active

1 = Speed controller autotuning procedure is active.

6 PI tune request

1 = Speed controller autotuning has been requested by parameter 23.20 PI tune mode.

7 PI tune done

1 = Speed controller autotuning procedure has been completed successfully.

8…15 Reserved

Bit Name Information0 Torq lim 1 = Drive torque is being limited by the motor control (undervoltage control,

current control, or pull-out control), or by the torque limit parameters in group 20 Limits.

1 Spd ctl tlim min

1 = Speed controller output minimum torque limit is active. The limit is defined by parameter 23.10 Min torq sp ctrl.

2 Spd ctl tlim max

1 = Speed controller output maximum torque limit is active. The limit is defined by parameter 23.09 Max torq sp ctrl.

3…4 Reserved5 Tlim max

speed1 = Torque reference maximum value is limited by the rush control, because of maximum speed limit 20.01 Maximum speed.

6 Tlim min speed

1 = Torque reference minimum value is limited by the rush control, because of maximum speed limit 20.02 Minimum speed.

7…15 Reserved

Parameters 129

06.07 Torq lim status Torque controller limitation status word. -

06.12 Op mode ack Operation mode acknowledge: 0 = Stopped, 1 = Speed, 10 = Scalar, 11 = Forced Magn (i.e. DC Hold)

1 = 1

06.13 Superv status Supervision status word. Bits 0…2 reflect the status of supervisory functions 1…3 respectively. The functions are configured in parameter group 33 Supervision (page 202).

-

06.14 Timed func stat Bits 0…3 show the on/off status of the four timers (1…4 respectively) configured in parameter group 36 Timed functions (page 214). Bit 4 is on if any one of the four timers is on.

-

06.15 Counter status Counter status word. Shows whether the maintenance counters configured in parameter group 44 Maintenance (page 221) have exceeded their limits.

-


Bit Name Information0 Undervolt-

age1 = Intermediate circuit DC undervoltage. *

1 Overvoltage 1 = Intermediate circuit DC overvoltage. *2…3 Reserved4 Internal cur-

rent1 = An inverter current limit is active. The limit is identified by bits 8…11.

5 Reserved6 Motor pull-

out1 = Motor pull-out limit is active, i.e. the motor cannot produce more torque.

7 Reserved8 Thermal 1 = Input current is limited by main circuit thermal limit.9 INU maxi-

mum1 = Inverter maximum output current limit is active (limits the drive output current IMAX). **

10 User cur-rent

1 = Maximum inverter output current limit is active. The limit is defined by parameter 20.05 Maximum current. **

11 Thermal IGBT

1 = Calculated thermal current value limits the inverter output current. **

12…15 Reserved* One of bits 0…3 can be on simultaneously. The bit typically indicates the limit that is exceeded first.** Only one of bits 9…11 can be on simultaneously. The bit typically indicates the limit that is exceeded first.

Bit Name Information0 Ontime1 1 = On-time counter 1 has reached its preset limit.1 Ontime2 1 = On-time counter 2 has reached its preset limit.2 Edge1 1 = Rising edge counter 1 has reached its preset limit.3 Edge2 1 = Rising edge counter 2 has reached its preset limit.4 Value1 1 = Value counter 1 has reached its preset limit.5 Value2 1 = Value counter 2 has reached its preset limit.

130 Parameters

06.20 Pump status word Pump status word. -

06.21 Level status Level control status word. -


Bit Name Value Information0 Trad 1 Traditional pump control mode active.1 Reg bypass 1 PID controller bypass mode active.2 Multi pump 1 Multipump functionality (via drive-to-drive link) active.3 Level control 1 Level control active.4 Sleep 1 Sleep mode active.5 Boosting 1 Sleep boost active.6 Pipe filling 1 Soft pipefill function active.7 Bypass 1 TBA8 Cleaning 1 Cleaning sequence active.9 Analyzer ID run 1 Reserved10 PID ref freeze 1 PID controller input frozen.11 PID out freeze 1 PID controller output frozen.12 Balancing 1 PID balancing reference in force.13 No aux pumps 1 No auxiliary pumps available to be started.14 Autochange 1 Autochange function active.15 High prot spd 1 Outlet pressure monitoring: forced reference active.16 Low prot spd 1 Inlet pressure monitoring: forced reference active.17 Speed ref 2 act 1 Speed reference 2 active.18 Ext2 Speed

mode1 Speed control selected for external control location EXT2 by

parameter 12.05 Ext2 ctrl mode.19…31 Reserved

Bit Name Value Information0 Low level 1 1 Low level 1 reached.1 Low level 2 1 Low level 2 reached.2 Stop level 1 Stop level reached.3 Start level 1 1 Start level 1 reached.4 Start level 2 1 Start level 2 reached.5 Start level 3 1 Start level 3 reached.6 Start level 4 1 Start level 4 reached.7 Start level 5 1 Start level 5 reached.8 Start level 6 1 Start level 6 reached.9 Start level 7 1 Start level 7 reached.10 Start level 8 1 Start level 8 reached.11 High level 1 1 High level 1 reached.12 High level 2 1 High level 2 reached.13 High speed 1 High speed reached.14…31 Reserved

Parameters 131

06.22 MF status word Multipump communication status word. -

0808 Alarms & faults Alarm and fault information.

08.01 Active fault Fault code of the latest fault. 1 = 1

08.02 Last fault Fault code of the 2nd latest fault. 1 = 1

08.03 Fault time hi Time (real time or power-on time) at which the active fault occurred in format dd.mm.yy (day, month and year).

1 = 1 d

08.04 Fault time lo Time (real time or power-on time) at which the active fault occurred in format hh.mm.ss (hours, minutes and seconds).

1 = 1

08.05 Alarm word1 Alarm word 1. Can be reset by entering a 0. -


Bit Name Value Information0 Master 1 Drive is master.1 Follower 1 Drive is follower.2 Master running 1 Master drive is running.3 Copy of mstr 1 Sync mode active (par. 75.03 is set to Copy of mstr).4 Node 1 1 (Only valid if the drive is master.) Drive with node number 1 is

present on the drive-to-drive link.5 Node 2 1 (Only valid if the drive is master.) Drive with node number 2 is







present on the drive-to-drive link.12…31 Reserved

Bit Name0…2 Reserved3 SAFE TORQUE OFF (page 314)4 STO MODE CHANGE (page 314)5 MOTOR TEMPERATURE (page 314)6 EMERGENCY OFF (page 314)7 RUN ENABLE (page 314)8 ID-RUN (page 315)9 EMERGENCY STOP (page 315)10…12 Reserved13 DEVICE OVERTEMP (page 315)14 INTBOARD OVERTEMP (page 315)15 Reserved

132 Parameters





Bit Name0 Reserved1 FIELDBUS COMM (page 315)2 LOCAL CTRL LOSS (page 315)3 AI SUPERVISION (page 315)4 FB PAR CONF (page 315)5 NO MOTOR DATA (page 315)6…15 Reserved

Bit Name0…2 Reserved3 PS COMM (page 316)4 RESTORE (page 316)5 CUR MEAS CALIBRATION (page 316)6 Reserved7 EARTH FAULT (page 316)8 AUTORESET (page 316)9 MOTOR NOM VALUE (page 316)10 Reserved11 STALL (page 316)12 LCURVE (page 316)13 LCURVE PAR (page 316)14 FLUX REF PAR (page 316)15 Reserved

Bit Name0 OPTION COMM LOSS (page 316)1 SOLUTION ALARM (page 320)2 MOTTEMPAL2 (page 317)3 IGBTOLALARM (page 317)4 IGBTTEMPALARM (page 317)5 COOLALARM (page 317)6 MENU CHANGED (page 317)7 TEMP MEAS FAILURE (page 318)8 Maintenance counter alarms 2055…2071 (page 318)9 DC NOT CHARGED (page 318)10 AUTOTUNE FAILED (page 318)11 START INTERLOCK (page 318)12 EFB COMM LOSS (page 319)13…15 Reserved

Parameters 133



08.20 Pump fault word Pump fault word. -


Bit Name0 PIPEFILL TIMEOUT (page 319)1 MIN FLOW (page 319)2 MAX FLOW (page 319)3 LOW PRESSURE (page 319)4 HIGH PRESSURE (page 319)5 VERY LOW PRESS (page 319)6 VERY HIGH PRESS (page 319)7 PROFILE HIGH (page 319)8 MAX CLEANINGS (page 319)9 ALL PUMPS INLOCKD (page 319)10 ENERGY LIMIT (page 319)11 DATE WRONG (page 320)12…13 Reserved14 BOOSTING (page 320)15 PIPE FILLING (page 320)

Bit Name0 NO MORE PUMPS (page 320)1 CLEANING (page 320)2 AUTOCHANGE (page 320)3 SLEEPING (page 320)4 START DELAY (page 320)5 LC TANK FULL (page 320)6 LC TANK EMPTY (page 320)7 MF MASTER LOST (page 320)8 MF NO SHARED DATA (page 320)9…15 Reserved

Bit Name0 MIN FLOW (page 328)1 MAX FLOW (page 328)2 LOW PRESSURE (page 328)3 HIGH PRESSURE (page 328)4 VERY LOW PRESS (page 328)5 VERY HIGH PRESS (page 328)6 MAX CLEANINGS (page 328)7 PIPEFILL TOUT (page 328)8 MF MASTER LOST (page 328)9 MF NO SHARED DATA (page 328)10…31 Reserved

134 Parameters

08.21 Pump alarm word Pump alarm word. -

0909 System info Drive type, program revision and option slot occupation

information.

09.01 Drive type Displays the drive type (for example, ACQ810). -

09.02 Drive rating ID Displays the inverter type (ACQ810-…) of the drive.0 = Unconfigured,201 = 02A7-4, 202 = 03A0-4, 203 = 03A5-4, 204 = 04A9-4, 205 = 06A3-4, 206 = 08A3-4, 207 = 11A0-4, 208 = 14A4-4, 209 = 021A-4, 210 = 028A-4, 211 = 032A-4, 212 = 035A-4, 213 = 040A-4, 214 = 053A-4, 215 = 067A-4, 216 = 080A-4, 217 = 098A-4, 218 = 138A-4, 220 = 162A-4, 221 = 203A-4, 222 = 240A-4, 223 = 286A-4, 224 = 302A-4, 225 = 361A-4, 226 = 414A-4, 227 = 477A-4, 228 = 550A-4, 229 = 616A-4, 230 = 704A-4, 241 = 02A7-2, 242 = 03A0-2, 243 = 03A5-2, 244 = 04A9-2, 245 = 06A3-2, 246 = 08A3-2, 247 = 11A0-2, 248 = 14A4-2, 249 = 021A-2, 250 = 028A-2, 251 = 032A-2, 252 = 035A-2, 253 = 040A-2, 254 = 053A-2, 255 = 067A-2, 256 = 080A-2

1 = 1

09.03 Firmware ID Displays the firmware name. E.g. UIFQ. -

09.04 Firmware ver Displays the version of the firmware package in the drive, e.g. 2002 hex.

-

09.05 Firmware patch Displays the version of the firmware patch in the drive. 1 = 1


Bit Name0 MIN FLOW (page 319)1 MAX FLOW (page 319)2 LOW PRESSURE (page 319)3 HIGH PRESSURE (page 319)4 VERY LOW PRESS (page 319)5 VERY HIGH PRESS (page 319)6 PROFILE HIGH (page 319)7 MAX CLEANINGS (page 319)8 CLEANING (page 320)9 PIPEFILL TIMEOUT (page 319)10 ALL PUMPS INLOCKD (page 319)11 ENERGY LIMIT (page 319)12 DATE WRONG (page 320)13…14 Reserved15 BOOSTING (page 320)16 PIPE FILLING (page 320)17 NO MORE PUMPS (page 320)18 AUTOCHANGE (page 320)19 SLEEPING (page 320)20 START DELAY (page 320)21 MF MASTER LOST (page 320)22 Reserved23 LC TANK FULL (page 320)24 LC TANK EMPTY (page 320)25 MF NO SHARED DATA (page 320)26…31 Reserved

Parameters 135

09.10 Int logic ver Displays the version of the logic on the main circuit board of the drive.

-

09.20 Option slot1 Displays the type of the optional module in option slot 1.0 = No option, 1 = No comm, 2 = Unknown, 6 = FIO-01, 7 = FIO-11, 8 = FPBA-01, 9 = FPBA-02, 10 = FCAN-01, 11 = FDNA-01, 12 = FENA-01, 13 = FENA-02, 14 = FLON-01, 15 = FRSA-00, 16 = FMBA-01, 17 = FFOA-01, 18 = FFOA-02, 19 = FSEN-01, 21 = FIO-21, 22 = FSCA-01, 23 = FSEA-21, 24 = FIO-31, 25 = FECA-01

1 = 1

09.21 Option slot2 Displays the type of the optional module in option slot 2. See 09.20 Option slot1.

1 = 1

1010 Start/stop/dir Start/stop/direction, run enable and emergency stop source

selections; start inhibit and start interlock configuration.

10.01 Ext1 start func Selects the source of start and stop commands for external control location 1 (EXT1).Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.

Not sel No start or stop command sources selected. 0

In1 The source of the start and stop commands is selected by parameter 10.02 Ext1 start in1. The state transitions of the source bit are interpreted as follows:

1

3-wire The sources of the start and stop commands is selected by parameters 10.02 Ext1 start in1 and 10.03 Ext1 start in2. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:

2

FBA The start and stop commands are taken from the fieldbus Control Word selected by parameter 50.15 Fb cw used.

3

D2D Reserved. 4

In1F In2R The source selected by 10.02 Ext1 start in1 is the forward start signal, the source selected by 10.03 Ext1 start in2 is the reverse start signal.

5


State of source (via par 10.02) Command

0 -> 1 Start1 -> 0 Stop

State of source 1 (via par. 10.02)

State of source 2 (via par. 10.03) Command

0 -> 1 1 StartAny 1 -> 0 StopAny 0 Stop



0 0 Stop1 0 Start forward0 1 Start reverse1 1 Stop

136 Parameters

In1St In2Dir The source selected by 10.02 Ext1 start in1 is the start signal (0 = stop, 1 = start), the source selected by 10.03 Ext1 start in2 is the direction signal (0 = forward, 1 = reverse).

6

10.02 Ext1 start in1 Selects source 1 of start and stop commands for external control location EXT1. See parameter 10.01 Ext1 start func, selections In1 and 3-wire.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.

DI1 Digital input DI1 (as indicated by 02.01 DI status, bit 0). 1073742337

DIO4 Digital input/output DIO4 (as indicated by 02.03 DIO status, bit 3).

1073938947

Timed func Bit 4 of parameter 06.14 Timed func stat. The bit is on when at least one of the four timers configured in parameter group 36 Timed functions is on.

1074005518

Const Constant and bit pointer settings (see Terms and abbreviations on page 109).

-

Pointer

10.03 Ext1 start in2 Selects source 2 of start and stop commands for external control location EXT1. See parameter 10.01 Ext1 start func, selection 3-wire.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.




1074004483

Const Bit pointer setting (see Terms and abbreviations on page 109).

-

Pointer

10.04 Ext2 start func Selects the source of start and stop commands for external control location 2 (EXT2).Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.

Not sel No start or stop command sources selected. 0

In1 The source of the start and stop commands is selected by parameter 10.05 Ext2 start in1. The state transitions of the source bit are interpreted as follows:

1

3-wire The sources of the start and stop commands is selected by parameters 10.05 Ext2 start in1 and 10.06 Ext2 start in2. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:

2


State of source (via par 10.05) Command

0 -> 1 Start1 -> 0 Stop



0 -> 1 1 StartAny 1 -> 0 StopAny 0 Stop

Parameters 137

FBA The start and stop commands are taken from the fieldbus Control Word selected by parameter 50.15 Fb cw used.

3

D2D Reserved. 4

In1F In2R The source selected by 10.05 Ext2 start in1 is the forward start signal, the source selected by 10.06 Ext2 start in2 is the reverse start signal.

5

In1St In2Dir The source selected by 10.05 Ext2 start in1 is the start signal (0 = stop, 1 = start), the source selected by 10.06 Ext2 start in2 is the direction signal (0 = forward, 1 = reverse).

6

10.05 Ext2 start in1 Selects source 1 of start and stop commands for external control location EXT2. See parameter 10.04 Ext2 start func, selections In1 and 3-wire.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.




1073938947

Timed func Bit 4 of parameter 06.14 Timed func stat. The bit is on when any one of the four timers configured in parameter group 36 Timed functions is on.

1074005518


-

Pointer

10.06 Ext2 start in2 Selects source 2 of start and stop commands for external control location EXT2. See parameter 10.04 Ext2 start func, selection 3-wire.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.




-

Pointer

10.10 Fault reset sel Selects the source of the external fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists.0 -> 1 = Fault reset.









0 0 Stop1 0 Start forward0 1 Start reverse1 1 Stop

138 Parameters


-

Pointer

10.11 Run enable Selects the source of the external run enable signal. If the run enable signal is switched off, the drive will not start, or coasts to stop if running.1 = Run enable.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.






COMM.CW External signal required through the fieldbus Control Word (as indicated by 02.22 FBA main cw, bit 7).

1074201122


-

Pointer

10.13 Em stop off3 Selects the source of the emergency stop OFF3 signal. The drive is stopped along the emergency stop ramp time defined by parameter 22.12 Em stop time.0 = OFF3 active.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.







-

Pointer

10.15 Em stop off1 Selects the source of the emergency stop OFF1 signal. The drive is stopped using the active deceleration time.Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus (02.22 FBA main cw or 02.36 EFB main cw).0 = OFF1 active.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.







-

Pointer


Parameters 139

10.17 Start enable Selects the source for the Start enable signal.1 = Start enable.If the signal is switched off, the drive will not start or coasts to stop if running.







-

Pointer

10.19 Start inhibit Enables the start inhibit function. The function prevents drive restart (i.e. protects against unexpected start) if• the drive trips on a fault and the fault is reset,• the run enable signal is activated while the start command

is active (see parameter 10.11 Run enable),• control changes from local to remote, or• external control switches from EXT1 to EXT2 or vice versa.A new rising edge of the start command is needed after the start inhibit has been activated.Note that in certain applications it is necessary to allow the drive to restart.

Disabled The start inhibit function is disabled. 0

Enabled The start inhibit function is enabled. 1

10.20 Start intrl func Defines how the start interlock input (DIIL) on the JCU control unit affects the drive operation.

Off2 stop With the drive running:• 1 = Normal operation.• 0 = Stop by coasting. The drive can be restarted by

restoring the start interlock signal and switching the start signal from 0 to 1.

With the drive stopped:• 1 = Starting allowed.• 0 = Starting not allowed.

0

Off3 stop With the drive running:• 1 = Normal operation.• 0 = Stop by ramping. The deceleration time is defined by

parameter 22.12 Em stop time. The drive can be restarted by restoring the start interlock signal and switching the start signal from 0 to 1.

With the drive stopped:• 1 = Starting allowed.• 0 = Starting not allowed.

1


140 Parameters

1111 Start/stop mode Start and stop modes; magnetization settings; DC hold

configuration.

11.01 Start mode Selects the motor start function.Notes:• Selections Fast and Const time are ignored if parameter

99.05 is set to Scalar.• Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC

magnetizing is selected (Fast or Const time).

Fast The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The pre-magnetizing time is determined automatically, being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on motor size. This mode should be selected if a high break-away torque is required.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.

0

Const time The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The pre-magnetizing time is defined by parameter 11.02 Dc-magn time. This mode should be selected if constant pre-magnetizing time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be synchronized with the release of a mechanical brake). This setting also guarantees the highest possible break-away torque when the pre-magnetizing time is set long enough.

WARNING! The drive will start after the set magnetizing time has passed even if motor magnetization is not completed. In applications

where a full break-away torque is essential, ensure that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque.

1

Automatic Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases. It includes the flying start function (starting to a rotating machine) and the automatic restart function (a stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor flux to die away). The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all conditions.Note: If parameter 99.05 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar, no flying start or automatic restart is possible by default.

2

11.02 Dc-magn time Defines the constant DC magnetizing time. See parameter 11.01 Start mode. After the start command, the drive automatically premagnetizes the motor the set time.To ensure full magnetizing, set this value to the same value as or higher than the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-of-thumb value given in the table below:

Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.

0 … 10000 ms Constant DC magnetizing time. 1 = 1 ms


Motor rated power Constant magnetizing time

< 1 kW > 50 to 100 ms

1 to 10 kW > 100 to 200 ms

10 to 200 kW > 200 to 1000 ms

200 to 1000 kW > 1000 to 2000 ms

Parameters 141

11.03 Stop mode Selects the motor stop function.

Coast Stop by cutting of the motor power supply. The motor coasts to a stop.

WARNING! If the mechanical brake is used, ensure it is safe to stop the drive by coasting.

1

Ramp Stop along ramp. See parameter group 22 Speed ref ramp on page 173.

2

11.04 Dc hold speed Defines the DC hold speed. See parameter 11.06 Dc hold.

0.0 … 1000.0 rpm DC hold speed. 10 = 1 rpm

11.05 Dc hold curr ref Defines the DC hold current in percent of the motor nominal current. See parameter 11.06 Dc hold.

0 … 100% DC hold current. 1 = 1%

11.06 Dc hold Enables the DC hold function. The function makes it possible to lock the rotor at zero speed.When both the reference and the speed drop below the value of parameter 11.04 Dc hold speed, the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC into the motor. The current is set by parameter 11.05 Dc hold curr ref. When the reference speed exceeds parameter 11.04 Dc hold speed, normal drive operation continues.

Notes:• The DC hold function has no effect if the start signal is

switched off.• The DC hold function can only be activated in speed

control mode.• The DC hold function cannot be activated if parameter

99.05 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar.• Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to

heat up. In applications where long DC hold times are required, externally ventilated motors should be used. If the DC hold period is long, the DC hold cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor.

Disabled The DC hold function is disabled. 0

Enabled The DC hold function is enabled. 1

1212 Operating mode Selection of external control location and EXT2 operating

mode.

12.01 Ext1/Ext2 sel Selects the external control location (EXT1 or EXT2), or the source of a selection signal (0 = EXT1; 1 = EXT2).

Ext1 EXT1 is active. 0


Reference

Motor speedDC hold

11.04 Dc holdspeed

t

t

142 Parameters

Ext2 EXT2 is active. 1

DI1 The external control location is determined by the status of digital input DI1 (as indicated by 02.01 DI status, bit 0).

1073742337


1073807873


1073873409


1073938945


1074004481


-

Pointer

12.05 Ext2 ctrl mode Selects the operating mode for external control location EXT2.

Speed Speed control. The reference is taken from the source defined by parameter 21.02 Speed ref2 sel.

1

PID PID control. 2

1313 Analogue inputs Analog input signal processing.

13.01 AI1 filt time Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1.

Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware (approximately 0.25 ms time constant). This cannot be changed by any parameter.

0.000 … 30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s

13.02 AI1 max Defines the maximum value for analog input AI1. The input type is selected a jumper on the JCU Control Unit (see the Hardware Manual of the drive).

-22.000 … 22.000 mA or-11.000 … 11.000 V

Maximum AI1 value. 1000 = 1 unit


63

%

100

Tt

O = I × (1 - e-t/T)

I = filter input (step)O = filter outputt = timeT = filter time constant

Unfiltered signal

Filtered signal

Parameters 143

13.03 AI1 min Defines the minimum value for analog input AI1. The input type is selected with a jumper on the JCU Control Unit (see the Hardware Manual of the drive)..

-22.000 … 22.000 mA or-11.000 … 11.000 V

Minimum AI1 value. 1000 = 1 unit

13.04 AI1 max scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analog input AI1 value defined by parameter 13.02 AI1 max.

-32768.000 … 32768.000

Real value corresponding to maximum AI1 value. 1000 = 1

13.05 AI1 min scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analog input AI1 value defined by parameter 13.03 AI1 min. See the drawing at parameter 13.04 AI1 max scale.

-32768.000 …32768.000

Real value corresponding to minimum AI1 value. 1000 = 1

13.06 AI2 filt time Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI2. See parameter 13.01 AI1 filt time.


13.07 AI2 max Defines the maximum value for analog input AI2. The input type is selected with a jumper on the JCU Control Unit (see the Hardware Manual of the drive)..

-22.000 … 22.000 mA or-11.000 … 11.000 V

AI2 maximum value. 1000 = 1 unit

13.08 AI2 min Defines the minimum value for analog input AI2. The input type is selected with a jumper on the JCU Control Unit (see the Hardware Manual of the drive)..

-22.000 … 22.000 mA or-11.000 … 11.000 V

AI2 minimum value. 1000 = 1 unit


AI (scaled)

AI (mA/V)

13.04

13.02

13.03

13.05

144 Parameters


-32768.000 … 32768.000



-32768.000 … 32768.000




13.12 AI3 max Defines the maximum value for analog input AI3. The input type depends on the type and/or settings of the I/O extension module installed. See the user documentation of the extension module.

-22.000 … 22.000 mA or-11.000 … 11.000 V


13.13 AI3 min Defines the minimum value for analog input AI3. The input type depends on the type and/or settings of the I/O extension module installed. See the user documentation of the extension module.

-22.000 … 22.000 mA or-11.000 … 11.000 V



AI (scaled)

AI (mA/V)

13.09

13.07

13.08

13.10

Parameters 145


-32768.000 … 32768.000



-32768.000 … 32768.000





-22.000 … 22.000 mA or-11.000 … 11.000 V



-22.000 … 22.000 mA or-11.000 … 11.000 V



AI (scaled)

AI (mA/V)

13.14

13.12

13.13

13.15

146 Parameters


-32768.000 … 32768.000



-32768.000 … 32768.000





-22.000 … 22.000 mA or-11.000 … 11.000 V



-22.000 … 22.000 mA or-11.000 … 11.000 V



AI (scaled)

AI (mA/V)

13.19

13.17

13.18

13.20

Parameters 147


-32768.000 … 32768.000



-32768.000 … 32768.000


13.31 AI tune Triggers the AI tuning function.Connect the signal to the input and select the appropriate tuning function.

No action AI tune is not activated. 0

AI1 min tune Current analog input AI1 signal value is set as minimum value of AI1 into parameter 13.03 AI1 min. The value reverts back to No action automatically.

1

AI1 max tune Current analog input AI1 signal value is set as maximum value of AI1 into parameter 13.02 AI1 max. The value reverts back to No action automatically.

2

AI2 min tune Current analog input AI2 signal value is set as minimum value of AI2 into parameter 13.08 AI2 min. The value reverts back to No action automatically.

3

AI2 max tune Current analog input AI2 signal value is set as maximum value of AI2 into parameter 13.07 AI2 max. The value reverts back to No action automatically.

4

13.32 AI superv func Selects how the drive reacts when analog input signal limit is reached. The limit is selected by parameter 13.33 AI superv cw.

No No action taken. 0

Fault The drive trips on an AI SUPERVISION (0x8110) fault. 1

Spd ref Safe The drive generates an AI SUPERVISION (0x8110) alarm and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 30.02 Speed ref safe.

WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.

2


AI (scaled)

AI (mA/V)

13.24

13.22

13.23

13.25

148 Parameters

Last speed The drive generates an AI SUPERVISION (0x8110) alarm and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds.


3

13.33 AI superv cw Selects the analog input signal supervision limit.

Example: If parameter value is set to 0b0010, bit 1 AI1 max sup is selected.

1414 Digital I/O Configuration of digital input/outputs, relay outputs, the

frequency input, and the frequency output.

14.01 DI invert mask Inverts status of digital inputs as reported by 02.01 DI status.

14.02 DIO1 conf Selects whether DIO1 is used as a digital output or input.

Output DIO1 is used as a digital output. 0

Input DIO1 is used as a digital input. 1

Freq input DIO1 is used as a frequency input. 2

14.03 DIO1 out src Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital output DIO1 (when 14.02 DIO1 conf is set to Output).

Trad pump7 Bit 6 of 05.02 Trad pump cmd (see page 125). 1074136322


Ready Bit 0 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 126). 1073743361

Enabled Bit 1 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 126). 1073808897

Started Bit 2 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 126). 1073874433

Running Bit 3 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 126). 1073939969

Alarm Bit 7 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 126). 1074202113

Ext2 active Bit 8 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 126). 1074267649

Fault Bit 10 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 126). 1074398721


Bit Supervision Action selected by parameter 13.32 AI superv func is taken if

0 AI1 min sup AI1 signal value falls below the value defined by equation: par. 13.03 AI1 min - 0.5 mA or V

1 AI1 max sup AI1 signal value exceeds the value defined by equation: par. 13.02 AI1 max + 0.5 mA or V

2 AI2 min sup AI2 signal value falls below the value defined by equation: par. 13.08 AI2 min - 0.5 mA or V

3 AI2 max sup AI1 signal value exceeds the value defined by equation: par. 13.07 AI2 max + 0.5 mA or V

Bit Name0 1 = Invert DI11 1 = Invert DI22 1 = Invert DI33 1 = Invert DI44 1 = Invert DI5

Parameters 149

Fault(-1) Bit 12 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 126). 1074529793

Ready relay Bit 2 of 06.02 Status word2 (see page 127). 1073874434

RunningRelay Bit 3 of 06.02 Status word2 (see page 127). 1073939970

Ref running Bit 4 of 06.02 Status word2 (see page 127). 1074005506

Charge ready Bit 9 of 06.02 Status word2 (see page 127). 1074333186

Neg speed Bit 0 of 06.03 Speed ctrl stat (see page 128). 1073743363

Zero speed Bit 1 of 06.03 Speed ctrl stat (see page 128). 1073808899

Above limit Bit 2 of 06.03 Speed ctrl stat (see page 128). 1073874435

At setpoint Bit 3 of 06.03 Speed ctrl stat (see page 128). 1073939971

Supervision1 Bit 0 of 06.13 Superv status (see page 129). 1073743373




-

Pointer

14.04 DIO1 Ton Defines the on (activation) delay for digital input/output DIO1 when 14.02 DIO1 conf is set to Output.

0.0 … 3000.0 s On (activation) delay for DIO1 when set as an output. 10 = 1 s

14.05 DIO1 Toff Defines the off (deactivation) delay for digital input/output DIO1 when 14.02 DIO1 conf is set to Output. See parameter 14.04 DIO1 Ton.

0.0 … 3000.0 s Off (deactivation) delay for DIO1 when set as an output. 10 = 1 s

14.06 DIO2 conf Selects whether DIO2 is used as a digital output, digital input or frequency input.



Freq output DIO2 is used as a frequency output. 2





1

0

1

0

tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn 14.04 DIO1 Ton

tOff 14.05 DIO1 Toff

Drive status

DIO1 status

Time

150 Parameters



















-

Pointer

14.08 DIO2 Ton Defines the on (activation) delay for digital input/output DIO2 when 14.06 DIO2 conf is set to Output.

0.0 … 3000.0 s On (activation) delay for DIO2 when set as an output. 10 = 1 s

14.09 DIO2 Toff Defines the off (deactivation) delay for digital input/output DIO2 when 14.06 DIO2 conf is set to Output. See parameter 14.08 DIO2 Ton.

0.0 … 3000.0 s Off (deactivation) delay for DIO2 when set as an output. 10 = 1 s

14.10 DIO3 conf Selects whether DIO3 is used as a digital output or digital input.




1

0

1

0

tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn 14.08 DIO2 Ton

tOff 14.09 DIO2 Toff

Drive status

DIO2 status

Time

Parameters 151






















-

Pointer

14.14 DIO4 conf Selects whether DIO4 is used as a digital output or input.



















152 Parameters







-

Pointer

14.42 RO1 src Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO1.






















-

Pointer


Parameters 153

14.43 RO1 Ton Defines the on (activation) delay for relay output RO1.

0.0 … 3000.0 s On (activation) delay for RO1. 10 = 1 s

14.44 RO1 Toff Defines the off (deactivation) delay for relay output RO1. See parameter 14.43 RO1 Ton.

0.0 … 3000.0 s Off (deactivation) delay for RO1. 10 = 1 s























-

Pointer


1

0

1

0

tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn 14.43 RO1 Ton

tOff 14.44 RO1 Toff

Drive status

RO1 status

Time

154 Parameters























-

Pointer




















Parameters 155





-

Pointer























-

Pointer


156 Parameters

14.57 Freq in max Defines the maximum input frequency for DIO1 when parameter 14.02 DIO1 conf is set to Freq input.The frequency signal connected to DIO1 is scaled into an internal signal (02.20 Freq in) by parameters 14.57…14.60 as follows:

3 … 32768 Hz DIO1 maximum frequency. 1 = 1 Hz

14.58 Freq in min Defines the minimum input frequency for DIO1 when parameter 14.02 DIO1 conf is set to Freq input. See parameter 14.57 Freq in max.

3 … 32768 Hz DIO1 minimum frequency. 1 = 1 Hz

14.59 Freq in max scal Defines the value that corresponds to the maximum input frequency defined by parameter 14.57 Freq in max. See parameter 14.57 Freq in max.

-32768 … 32768 Scaled value corresponding to DIO1 maximum frequency. 1 = 1

14.60 Freq in min scal Defines the value that corresponds to the minimum input frequency defined by parameter 14.58 Freq in min. See diagram at parameter 14.57 Freq in max.

-32768 … 32768 Scaled value corresponding to DIO1 minimum frequency. 1 = 1

14.61 Freq out src Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output DIO2 (when 14.06 DIO2 conf is set to Freq output).

Value pointer setting (see Terms and abbreviations on page 109).

-


fDIO1 (Hz)14.57

14.59

14.60

14.58

02.20 Freq in

Parameters 157

14.62 Freq out max src When 14.06 DIO2 conf is set to Freq output, defines the real value of the signal (selected by parameter 14.61 Freq out src) that corresponds to the maximum DIO2 frequency output value (defined by parameter 14.64 Freq out max sca).

0 … 32768 Real signal value corresponding to maximum DIO2 output frequency.

1 = 1

14.63 Freq out min src When 14.06 DIO2 conf is set to Freq output, defines the real value of the signal (selected by parameter 14.61 Freq out src) that corresponds to the minimum DIO2 frequency output value (defined by parameter 14.65 Freq out min sca).

0 … 32768 Real signal value corresponding to minimum DIO2 output frequency.

1 = 1

14.64 Freq out max sca When 14.06 DIO2 conf is set to Freq output, defines the maximum DIO2 output frequency.

3 … 32768 Hz Maximum DIO2 output frequency. 1 = 1 Hz

14.65 Freq out min sca When 14.06 DIO2 conf is set to Freq output, defines the minimum DIO2 output frequency.

3 … 32768 Hz Minimum DIO2 output frequency. 1 = 1 Hz







fDIO2 (Hz)

14.64

14.65

14.62 14.63

14.6214.63

14.64

14.65

Signal (real)selected by par. 14.61

fDIO2 (Hz)


158 Parameters


















-

Pointer

14.72 DIO invert mask Inverts status of digital input/outputs as reported by 02.03 DIO status.

1515 Analogue outputs Selection and processing of actual signals to be indicated

through the analog outputs.See also section Programmable analog outputs on page 65.

15.01 AO1 src Selects a drive signal to be connected to analog output AO1.

Speed rpm 01.01 Motor speed rpm (see page 112). 1073742081

Speed % 01.02 Motor speed % (see page 112). 1073742082

Frequency 01.03 Output frequency (see page 112). 1073742083

Current 01.04 Motor current (see page 112). 1073742084

Current % 01.05 Motor current % (see page 112). 1073742085

Torque 01.06 Motor torque (see page 112). 1073742086

Dc-voltage 01.07 Dc-voltage (see page 112). 1073742087


Bit Name0 1 = Invert DIO11 1 = Invert DIO22 1 = Invert DIO3 (on optional FIO-01 I/O Extension)3 1 = Invert DIO4 (on optional FIO-01 I/O Extension)4 1 = Invert DIO5 (on optional FIO-01 I/O Extension)5 1 = Invert DIO6 (on optional FIO-01 I/O Extension)6 1 = Invert DIO7 (on optional FIO-01 I/O Extension)7 1 = Invert DIO8 (on optional FIO-01 I/O Extension)8 1 = Invert DIO9 (on optional FIO-01 I/O Extension)9 1 = Invert DIO10 (on optional FIO-01 I/O Extension)

Parameters 159

Power inu 01.22 Power inu out (see page 112). 1073742102

Power motor 01.23 Motor power (see page 112). 1073742103

SpRef unramp 03.03 SpeedRef unramp (see page 123). 1073742595

SpRef ramped 03.05 SpeedRef ramped (see page 123). 1073742597

SpRef used 03.06 SpeedRef used (see page 123). 1073742598

TorqRef used 03.14 Torq ref used (see page 123). 1073742606

Proc PID out 04.05 Process PID out (see page 123). 1073742853

Process act% 04.22 Act val % (see page 124). 1073742870

Pointer Value pointer setting (see Terms and abbreviations on page 109).

-

15.02 AO1 filt time Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO1.


15.03 AO1 out max Defines the maximum output value for analog output AO1.

0.000 … 22.700 mA Maximum AO1 output value. 1000 = 1 mA

15.04 AO1 out min Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO1.

0.000 … 22.700 mA Minimum AO1 output value. 1000 = 1 mA


63

%

100

Tt

O = I × (1 - e-t/T)


Unfiltered signal

Filtered signal

160 Parameters

15.05 AO1 src max Defines the real value of the signal (selected by parameter 15.01 AO1 src) that corresponds to the maximum AO1 output value (defined by parameter 15.03 AO1 out max).

-32768.000 … 32768.000

Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO1 output value.

1000 = 1

15.06 AO1 src min Defines the real value of the signal (selected by parameter 15.01 AO1 src) that corresponds to the minimum AO1 output value (defined by parameter 15.04 AO1 out min). See parameter 15.05 AO1 src max.

-32768.000 … 32768.000

Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO1 output value.

1000 = 1














IAO1 (mA)

15.03

15.04

15.05 15.06

15.0515.06

15.03

15.04


IAO1 (mA)


Parameters 161






-

15.08 AO2 filt time Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO2. See parameter 15.02 AO1 filt time.



-10.000 … 10.000 V Maximum AO2 output value. 1000 = 1 V


-10.000 … 10.000 V Minimum AO2 output value. 1000 = 1 mA


-32768.000 … 32768.000


1000 = 1


IAO2 (V)

15.09

15.10

15.11 15.12

15.1115.12

15.09

15.10


IAO2 (V)


162 Parameters


-32768.000 … 32768.000


1000 = 1


















-

15.14 AO3 filt time Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO3. See parameter 15.02 AO1 filt time.



0.000 … 22.700 mA Maximum AO3 output value. 1000 = 1 mA


0.000 … 22.700 mA Minimum AO3 output value. 1000 = 1 mA


Parameters 163


-32768.000 … 32768.000


1000 = 1


-32768.000 … 32768.000


1000 = 1

15.25 AO ctrl word Defines how a signed source is processed before output.


IAO3 (mA)

15.15

15.16

15.17 15.18

15.1715.18

15.15

15.16


IAO3 (mA)


Bit Name Information

0 AO1 func1 = AO1 is bipolar0 = AO1 is absolute value of source

1 AO2 func1 = AO2 is bipolar0 = AO2 is absolute value of source

164 Parameters

1616 System Local lock and parameter lock settings; parameter restore;

user parameter set load/save; parameter change log reset; parameter list settings; unit of power selection; application macro display.

16.01 Local lock Selects the source for disabling local control (Take/Release button in the PC tool, LOC/REM key of the panel).0 = Local control enabled.1 = Local control disabled.

WARNING! Before activating, ensure that the control panel is not needed for stopping the drive!


-

Pointer

16.02 Parameter lock Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents parameter changing.

Locked Locked. Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel. The lock can be opened by entering the valid code into parameter 16.03 Pass code.

0

Open The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed. 1

Not saved The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed, but the changes will not be stored at power switch-off.

2

16.03 Pass code Selects the pass code for the parameter lock (see parameter 16.02 Parameter lock).After entering 358 at this parameter, parameter 16.02 Parameter lock can be adjusted. The value reverts back to 0 automatically.

0 … 2147483647 Pass code for parameter lock. 1 = 1

16.04 Param restore Restores the original settings of the application, i.e. parameter factory default values.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.

Done Restoring is completed. 0

Restore defs All parameter values are restored to default values, except motor data, ID run results, and fieldbus adapter and drive-to-drive link configuration data.

1

Clear all All parameter values are restored to default values, including motor data, ID run results, and fieldbus adapter and drive-to-drive link configuration data. PC tool communication is interrupted during the restoring. Drive CPU is re-booted after the restoring is completed.

2

16.07 Param save Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory.Note: A new parameter value is saved automatically when changed from the PC tool or panel but not when altered through a fieldbus adapter connection.

Done Save completed. 0

Save Save in progress. 1


Parameters 165

16.09 User set sel Enables the saving and restoring of up to four custom sets of parameter settings.The set that was in use before powering down the drive is in use after the next power-up.Notes:• Fieldbus adapter parameters (groups 50…53) are not part

of user parameter sets.• Any parameter changes made after loading a set are not

automatically stored – they must be saved using this parameter.

No request Load or save operation complete; normal operation. 1

Load set 1 Load user parameter set 1. 2




Save set 1 Save user parameter set 1. 6




IO mode Load user parameter set using parameters 16.11 User IO sel lo and 16.12 User IO sel hi.

10

16.10 User set log Shows the status of the user parameter sets (see parameter 16.09 User set sel). Read-only.

N/A No user sets have been saved. 0

Loading A user set is being loaded. 1

Saving A user set is being saved. 2

Faulted Invalid or empty parameter set. 4

Set1 IO act User parameter set 1 has been selected by parameters 16.11 User IO sel lo and 16.12 User IO sel hi.

8


16


32


64

Set1 par act User parameter set 1 has been loaded using parameter 16.09 User set sel.

128


256


512


1024


166 Parameters

16.11 User IO sel lo When parameter 16.09 User set sel is set to IO mode, selects the user parameter set together with parameter 16.12 User IO sel hi. The status of the source defined by this parameter and parameter 16.12 select the user parameter set as follows:


-

Pointer

16.12 User IO sel hi See parameter 16.11 User IO sel lo.


-

Pointer

16.14 Reset ChgParLog Resets the log of latest parameter changes.

Done Reset not requested (normal operation). 0

Reset Reset log of latest parameter changes. The value reverts automatically to Done.

1

16.16 Menu set active Shows which parameter list is active. Parameter lists determine which parameters are displayed.See also parameter 16.21 Menu selection.

None No specific parameter list is active. 0

Single short A selective list of parameters relevant to the single pump (factory default) application macro is displayed.

1

Single long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the single pump (factory default) application macro is displayed.

2

Trad short A selective list of parameters relevant to the traditional pump control application macro is displayed.

3

Trad long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the traditional pump control application macro is displayed.

4

Ext short A selective list of parameters relevant to the external control application macro is displayed.

5

Ext long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the external control application macro is displayed.

6

H/A short A selective list of parameters relevant to the Hand/Auto control application macro is displayed.

7

H/A long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the Hand/Auto control application macro is displayed.

8

Level short A selective list of parameters relevant to the Level control application macro (single-pump) is displayed.

9

Level long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the Level control application macro (single-pump) is displayed.

10


Status of source defined by par.

16.11

Status of source defined by par.

16.12

User parameter set selected

FALSE FALSE Set 1

TRUE FALSE Set 2

FALSE TRUE Set 3

TRUE TRUE Set 4

Parameters 167

M lvl short A selective list of parameters relevant to the Level control application macro (multipump) is displayed.

11

M lvl long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the Level control application macro (multipump) is displayed.

12

M pump short A selective list of parameters relevant to the Multipump control application macro (single-pump) is displayed.

13

M pump long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the Multipump control application macro (single-pump) is displayed.

14

Full All parameters are displayed. 15

16.17 Power unit Selects the unit of power for parameters such as 01.22 Power inu out, 01.23 Motor power and 99.10 Mot nom power.

kW Kilowatt. 0

hp Horsepower. 1

16.20 Macro selected Shows which application macro is currently selected. For more information, see chapter Application macros (page 87).Note: Changing the value of this parameter does not change the current application macro. To change the application macro, use the Application macro assistant available through the control panel instead.

Factory def Factory default macro. 0

Ext ctrl External control macro. 1

Trad ctrl Traditional pump control macro. 2

Hand/Auto Hand/Auto macro. 3

Level ctrl Level control macro (for a single pump). 4

Multi level Level control macro (for multiple pumps). 5

Multi pump Multipump control macro. 6

16.21 Menu selection Loads a short, long or full parameter list.

Short Only a selective list of parameters will be displayed. 0

Long Only the parameters relevant to the current application macro are displayed.

1

Full All parameters are displayed, including those not relevant to the current application macro.

2

1919 Speed calculation Speed scaling, feedback and supervision settings.

19.01 Speed scaling Defines the terminal speed value used in acceleration and the initial speed value used in deceleration (see parameter group 22 Speed ref ramp). Also defines the rpm value that corresponds to 20000 for fieldbus communication with ABB Drives communication profile.

0 … 30000 rpm Acceleration/deceleration terminal/initial speed. 1 = 1 rpm

19.02 Speed fb sel Selects the speed feedback value used in control.Note: The speed feedback value is always estimated.

Estimated A calculated speed estimate is used. 0


168 Parameters

19.03 MotorSpeed filt Defines the time constant of the actual speed filter, i.e. time within the actual speed has reached 63% of the nominal speed (filtered speed = 01.01 Motor speed rpm).If the used speed reference remains constant, the possible interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered with the actual speed filter. Reducing the ripple with filter may cause speed controller tuning problems. A long filter time constant and fast acceleration time contradict one another. A very long filter time results in unstable control.If there are substantial interferences in the speed measurement, the filter time constant should be proportional to the total inertia of the load and motor, in this case 10…30% of the mechanical time constant tmech = (nnom / Tnom) × Jtot × 2π / 60, whereJtot = total inertia of the load and motor (the gear ratio between the load and motor must be taken into account)nnom = motor nominal speedTnom = motor nominal torqueSee also parameter 23.07 Speed err Ftime.

0.000 … 10000.000 ms

Time constant of the actual speed filter. 1000 = 1 ms

19.06 Zero speed limit Defines the zero speed limit. The motor is stopped along a speed ramp until the defined zero speed limit is reached. After the limit, the motor coasts to stop.

0.00 … 30000.00 rpm

Zero speed limit. 100 = 1 rpm


Parameters 169

19.07 Zero speed delay Defines the delay for the Zero speed delay function. The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential. During the delay, the drive knows accurately the rotor position.Without Zero speed delay:The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the motor actual speed falls below the value of 19.06 Zero speed limit, the speed controller is switched off. The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill.

With Zero speed delay:The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the actual motor speed falls below the value of 19.06 Zero speed limit, the Zero speed delay function activates. During the delay the function keeps the speed controller live: the inverter modulates, motor is magnetized and the drive is ready for a quick restart.

0 … 30000 ms Zero speed delay. 1 = 1 ms

19.08 Above speed lim Defines the supervision limit for the actual speed.

0 … 30000 rpm Actual speed supervision limit. 1 = 1 rpm


Speed controller switched off: Motor coasts to stop.

19.06 Zero speed limit

Speed

Time

Speed controller remains active. Motor is decelerated to true zero speed.

19.06 Zero speed limit

Speed

TimeDelay

170 Parameters

19.09 Speed TripMargin Defines, together with 20.01 Maximum speed and 20.02 Minimum speed, the maximum allowed speed of the motor (overspeed protection). If actual speed (01.01 Motor speed rpm) exceeds the speed limit defined by parameter 20.01 or 20.02 by more than the value of this parameter, the drive trips on the OVERSPEED (0x7310) fault.Example: If the maximum speed is 1420 rpm and speed trip margin is 300 rpm, the drive trips at 1720 rpm.

0.0 … 10000.0 rpm Overspeed trip margin. 10 = 1 rpm

19.10 Speed window Defines the absolute value for the motor speed window supervision, i.e. the absolute value for the difference between the actual speed and the unramped speed reference (01.01 Motor speed rpm - 03.03 SpeedRef unramp). When the motor speed is within the limits defined by this parameter, signal 02.24 FBA main sw bit 8 (AT_SETPOINT) is 1. If the motor speed is not within the defined limits, bit 8 is 0.

0 … 30000 rpm Absolute value for motor speed window supervision. 1 = 1 rpm

2020 Limits Drive operation limits.

See also section Speed controller tuning on page 68.

20.01 Maximum speed Defines the allowed maximum speed.

0 … 30000 rpm Maximum speed. 1 = 1 rpm

20.02 Minimum speed Defines the allowed minimum speed.Note: If the motor may only be run in the forward direction within a certain range above 0 rpm, leave this parameter at 0 rpm, and use parameter 21.09 SpeedRef min abs to define the lower boundary of the range.

-30000 … 0 rpm Minimum speed. 1 = 1 rpm


Speed trip margin

Speed trip margin

Speed

Time

20.01

20.02

Parameters 171

20.03 Pos speed ena Selects the source of the positive speed reference enable command.1 = Positive speed reference is enabled.0 = Positive speed reference is interpreted as zero speed reference (In the figure below 03.03 SpeedRef unramp is set to zero after the positive speed enable signal has cleared). The speed reference is set to zero and the motor is stopped along the currently active deceleration ramp.

Example: The motor is rotating in the forward direction. To stop the motor, the positive speed enable signal is deactivated by a hardware limit switch (e.g. via a digital input). If the positive speed enable signal remains deactivated and the negative speed enable signal is active, only reverse rotation of the motor is allowed.


-

Pointer

20.04 Neg speed ena Selects the source of the negative speed reference enable command. See parameter 20.03 Pos speed ena.


-

Pointer

20.05 Maximum current Defines the maximum allowed motor current.

0.00 … 30000.00 A Maximum motor current. 100 = 1 A

20.06 Torq lim sel Defines a source that selects between the two sets of torque limits defined by parameters 20.07…20.10.0 = The torque limits defined by parameters 20.07 Maximum torque1 and 20.08 Minimum torque1 are in force.1 = The torque limits defined by parameters 20.09 Maximum torque2 and 20.10 Minimum torque2 are in force.


-

Pointer

20.07 Maximum torque1 Defines maximum torque limit 1 for the drive (in percent of the motor nominal torque). See parameter 20.06 Torq lim sel.

0.0 … 1600.0% Maximum torque 1. 10 = 1%

20.08 Minimum torque1 Defines minimum torque limit 1 for the drive (in percent of the motor nominal torque). See parameter 20.06 Torq lim sel.

-1600.0 … 0.0% Minimum torque 1. 10 = 1%


20.03 Pos speed ena

20.04 Neg speed ena

03.03 SpeedRef unramp

172 Parameters

20.09 Maximum torque2 Defines the source of maximum torque limit 2 for the drive (in percent of the motor nominal torque). See parameter 20.06 Torq lim sel.

AI1 scaled 02.05 AI1 scaled (see page 113). 1073742341


FBA ref1 02.26 FBA main ref1 (see page 118). 1073742362


Max torque1 20.07 Maximum torque1 (see page 171). 1073746951


-

20.10 Minimum torque2 Defines the source of minimum torque limit 2 for the drive (in percent of the motor nominal torque). See parameter 20.06 Torq lim sel.





Neg max torq -20.09 Maximum torque2 (see page 172). 1073746949

Min torque1 20.08 Minimum torque1 (see page 171). 1073746952


-

20.12 P motoring lim Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the inverter to the motor in percent of the motor nominal power.

0.0 … 1600.0% Maximum motoring power. 10 = 1%

20.13 P generating lim Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the motor to the inverter in percent of the motor nominal power.

0.0 … 1600.0% Maximum generating power. 10 = 1%

2121 Speed ref Speed reference source selection and processing.

21.01 Speed ref1 sel Selects the source for speed reference 1.

Zero Zero speed reference. 0



Freq in 02.20 Freq in (see page 114). 1073742356



Panel 02.34 Panel ref (see page 118). 1073742370

EFB ref1 02.38 EFB main ref1 (see page 122). 1073742374



-

21.02 Speed ref2 sel Selects the source for speed reference 2.Note: The reference signal must be in the range 0…100.

Zero Zero speed reference. 0



Parameters 173


Freq in 02.20 Freq in (see page 114). 1073742356



Panel 02.34 Panel ref (see page 118). 1073742370




-

21.05 Speed share Defines the scaling factor for the speed reference (the speed reference is multiplied by the defined value).

-8.000 …8.000 Speed reference scaling factor. 1000 = 1

21.09 SpeedRef min abs Defines the absolute minimum limit for the speed reference.

0 … 30000 rpm Absolute minimum limit for speed reference. 1 = 1 rpm

2222 Speed ref ramp Speed reference and emergency stop (OFF3) ramp settings.

22.02 Acc time Defines acceleration time as the time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed value defined by parameter 19.01 Speed scaling.If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate.If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference signal.If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive torque limits.

0.000 … 1800.000 s Acceleration time. 1000 = 1 s


20.01Maximum speed

21.09SpeedRef min abs

-(21.09SpeedRef min abs)

20.02Minimum speed

Speed reference

Limited speed reference

174 Parameters

22.03 Dec time Defines deceleration time as the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 19.01 Speed scaling to zero.If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference signal.If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate.If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive torque limits. If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that the DC overvoltage control is on (parameter 47.01 Overvolt ctrl).

0.000 … 1800.000 s Deceleration time. 1000 = 1 s


Parameters 175

22.06 Shape time acc1 Defines the shape of the acceleration ramp at the beginning of the acceleration.0.000 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps.0.001…1000.000 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for lifting applications. The S-curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between.Acceleration:

Deceleration:

0.000 … 1800.000 s Ramp shape at start of acceleration. 1000 = 1 s

22.07 Shape time acc2 Defines the shape of the acceleration ramp at the end of the acceleration. See parameter 22.06 Shape time acc1.

0.000 … 1800.000 s Ramp shape at end of acceleration. 1000 = 1 s

22.08 Shape time dec1 Defines the shape of the deceleration ramp at the beginning of the deceleration. See parameter 22.06 Shape time acc1.

0.000 … 1800.000 s Ramp shape at start of deceleration. 1000 = 1 s


S-curve ramp: Par. 22.07 > 0 s

Linear ramp: Par. 22.06 = 0 s



Speed

Time




S-curve ramp:Par. 22.09 > 0 s

Speed

Time

176 Parameters

22.09 Shape time dec2 Defines the shape of the deceleration ramp at the end of the deceleration. See parameter 22.06 Shape time acc1.

0.000 … 1800.000 s Ramp shape at end of deceleration. 1000 = 1 s

22.12 Em stop time Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if an emergency stop OFF3 is activated (i.e. the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 19.01 Speed scaling to zero). Emergency stop activation source is selected by parameter 10.13 Em stop off3. Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus (02.22 FBA main cw or 02.36 EFB main cw).Note: Emergency stop OFF1 uses the active ramp time.

0.000 … 1800.000 s Emergency stop OFF3 deceleration time. 1000 = 1 s

2323 Speed ctrl Speed controller settings.

23.01 Proport gain Defines the proportional gain (Kp) of the speed controller. Too large a gain may cause speed oscillation. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.

If gain is set to 1, a 10% change in error value (reference - actual value) causes the speed controller output to change by 10%.

0.00 … 200.00 Proportional gain for speed controller. 100 = 1


Gain = Kp = 1TI = Integration time = 0TD= Derivation time = 0

%

Controlleroutput = Kp × e

Time

e = Error value

Controller output

Error value

Parameters 177

23.02 Integration time Defines the integration time of the speed controller. The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant and the proportional gain of the speed controller is 1. The shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error value is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the control unstable.If parameter value is set to zero, the I-part of the controller is disabled.Anti-windup stops the integrator if the controller output is limited. See 06.05 Limit word1.The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.

0.000 … 600.000 s Integration time for speed controller. 1000 = 1 s


Kp × e

Kp × e

%

e = Error value

Time

Gain = Kp = 1TI = Integration time = 0TD= Derivation time = 0

Controller output

TI

178 Parameters

23.03 Derivation time Defines the derivation time of the speed controller. Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller. The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances.The speed error derivative must be filtered with a low pass filter to eliminate disturbances.The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.

0.000 … 10.000 s Derivation time for speed controller. 1000 = 1 s

23.04 Deriv filt time Defines the derivation filter time constant. See parameter 23.03 Derivation time.

0.0 … 1000.0 ms Derivation filter time constant. 10 = 1 ms


Gain = Kp = 1TI = Integration time > 0TD= Derivation time > 0Ts= Sample time period = 250 µsΔe = Error value change between two samples

Kp × TD × ΔeTs

Controller output

e = Error value

Error value

TimeTI

Kp × e

Kp × e

%

Parameters 179

23.05 Acc comp DerTime Defines the derivation time for acceleration/(deceleration) compensation. In order to compensate inertia during acceleration, a derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative action is described for parameter 23.03 Derivation time.Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to a value between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine.The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp.No acceleration compensation:

Acceleration compensation:

0.00 … 600.00 s Acceleration compensation derivation time. 100 = 1 s

23.06 Acc comp Ftime Defines the derivation filter time constant for the acceleration(/deceleration) compensation. See parameters 23.03 Derivation time and 23.05 Acc comp DerTime.

0.0 … 1000.0 ms Derivation filter time constant for acceleration compensation. 10 = 1 ms

23.07 Speed err Ftime Defines the time constant of the speed error low pass filter.If the used speed reference changes rapidly, the possible interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered with the speed error filter. Reducing the ripple with filter may cause speed controller tuning problems. A long filter time constant and fast acceleration time contradict one another. A very long filter time results in unstable control.

0.0 … 1000.0 ms Speed error filtering time constant. 0 = filtering disabled. 10 = 1 ms


Time

%

Speed reference

Actual speed

Time

%

Speed reference

Actual speed

180 Parameters

23.08 Speed additive Defines a speed reference to be added after ramping.Note: For safety reasons, the additive is not applied when stop functions are active.

Zero Zero speed additive. 0






-

23.09 Max torq sp ctrl Defines the maximum speed controller output torque.

-1600.0 … 1600.0% Maximum speed controller output torque. 10 = 1%

23.10 Min torq sp ctrl Defines the minimum speed controller output torque.

-1600.0 … 1600.0% Minimum speed controller output torque. 10 = 1%

23.11 SpeedErr winFunc Enables or disables speed error window control.Speed error window control forms a speed supervision function for a torque-controlled drive. It supervises the speed error value (speed reference – actual speed). In the normal operating range, window control keeps the speed controller input at zero. The speed controller is evoked only if• the speed error exceeds the upper boundary of the

window (parameter 23.12 SpeedErr win hi), or• the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds

the lower boundary of the window (23.13 SpeedErr win lo).

When the speed error moves outside the window, the exceeding part of the error value is connected to the speed controller. The speed controller produces a reference term relative to the input and gain of the speed controller (parameter 23.01 Proport gain) which the torque selector adds to the torque reference. The result is used as the internal torque reference for the drive.Example: In a load loss condition, the internal torque reference of the drive is decreased to prevent an excessive rise of the motor speed. If window control were inactive, the motor speed would rise until a speed limit of the drive were reached.

Disabled Speed error window control inactive. 0

Absolute Speed error window control active. The boundaries defined by parameters 23.12 SpeedErr win hi and 23.13 SpeedErr win lo are absolute.

1

Relative Speed error window control active. The boundaries defined by parameters 23.12 SpeedErr win hi and 23.13 SpeedErr win lo are relative to speed reference.

2

23.12 SpeedErr win hi Defines the upper boundary of the speed error window. Depending on setting of parameter 23.11 SpeedErr winFunc, this is either an absolute value or relative to speed reference.

0 … 3000 rpm Upper boundary of speed error window. 1 = 1 rpm


Parameters 181

23.13 SpeedErr win lo Defines the lower boundary of the speed error window. Depending on setting of parameter 23.11 SpeedErr winFunc, this is either an absolute value or relative to speed reference.

0 … 3000 rpm Lower boundary of speed error window. 1 = 1 rpm

23.14 Drooping rate Defines the droop rate in percent of the motor nominal speed. Drooping slightly decreases the drive speed as the drive load increases. The actual speed decrease at a certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and the drive load (= torque reference / speed controller output). At 100% speed controller output, drooping is at its nominal level, i.e. equal to the value of this parameter. The drooping effect decreases linearly to zero along with the decreasing load.Droop rate can be used e.g. to adjust the load sharing in a Master/Follower application run by several drives. In a Master/Follower application the motor shafts are coupled to each other. The correct droop rate for a process must be found out case by case in practice.

0.00 … 100.00% Droop rate. 100 = 1%


Motor speed in % of nominal

100%

Speed decrease = Speed controller output × Drooping × Max. speedExample: Speed controller output is 50%, droop rate is 1%, maximum speed of the drive is 1500 rpm.Speed decrease = 0.50 × 0.01 × 1500 rpm = 7.5 rpm.

100%23.14 Drooping rate

No drooping

Drooping

Speed controlleroutput / %

Drive load

182 Parameters

23.15 PI adapt max sp Maximum actual speed for speed controller adaptation.Speed controller gain and integration time can be adapted according to actual speed. This is done by multiplying the gain (23.01 Proport gain) and integration time (23.02 Integration time) by coefficients at certain speeds. The coefficients are defined individually for both gain and integration time.When the actual speed is below or equal to 23.16 PI adapt min sp, 23.01 Proport gain and 23.02 Integration time are multiplied by 23.17 Pcoef at min sp and 23.18 Icoef at min sp respectively.When the actual speed is equal to or exceeds 23.15 PI adapt max sp, no adaptation takes place; in other words, 23.01 Proport gain and 23.02 Integration time are used as such.Between 23.16 PI adapt min sp and 23.15 PI adapt max sp, the coefficients are calculated linearly on the basis of the breakpoints.

0 … 30000 rpm Maximum actual speed for speed controller adaptation. 1 = 1 rpm

23.16 PI adapt min sp Minimum actual speed for speed controller adaptation. See parameter 23.15 PI adapt max sp.

0 … 30000 rpm Minimum actual speed for speed controller adaptation. 1 = 1 rpm

23.17 Pcoef at min sp Proportional gain coefficient at minimum actual speed. See parameter 23.15 PI adapt max sp.

0.000 … 10.000 Proportional gain coefficient at minimum actual speed. 1000 = 1

23.18 Icoef at min sp Integration time coefficient at minimum actual speed. See parameter 23.15 PI adapt max sp.

0.000 … 10.000 Integration time coefficient at minimum actual speed. 1000 = 1


Coefficient for Kp or TI

Kp = Proportional gainTI = Integration time

Actual speed (rpm)

23.17 Pcoef at min sp or23.18 Icoef at min sp

23.16 PI adapt min sp

23.15 PI adapt max sp

1.000

0

Parameters 183

23.20 PI tune mode Activates the speed controller autotune function.The autotune will automatically set parameters 23.01 Proport gain and 23.02 Integration time, as well as 01.31 Mech time const. If the User autotune mode is chosen, also 23.07 Speed err Ftime is automatically set.The status of the autotune routine is shown by parameter 06.03 Speed ctrl stat.

WARNING! The motor will reach the torque and current limits during the autotune routine. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE

PERFORMING THE AUTOTUNE ROUTINE!Notes:• Before using the autotune function, the following

parameters should be set:• All parameters adjusted during the start-up as

described in the ACQ810-04 drive modules Start-up Guide

• 19.01 Speed scaling• 19.03 MotorSpeed filt• 19.06 Zero speed limit• Speed reference ramp settings in group 22 Speed ref

ramp• 23.07 Speed err Ftime.

• The drive must be in local control mode and stopped before an autotune is requested.

• After requesting an autotune with this parameter, start the drive within 20 seconds.

• Wait until the autotune routine is completed (this parameter has reverted to the value Done). The routine can be aborted by stopping the drive.

• Check the values of the parameters set by the autotune function.

See also section Speed controller tuning on page 68.

Done No tuning has been requested (normal operation) 0

Smooth Request speed controller autotune with preset settings for smooth operation.

1

Middle Request speed controller autotune with preset settings for medium-tight operation.

2

Tight Request speed controller autotune with preset settings for tight operation.

3

User Request speed controller autotune with the settings defined by parameters 23.21 Tune bandwidth and 23.22 Tune damping.

4

23.21 Tune bandwidth Speed controller bandwidth after autotune procedure in user mode. A larger bandwidth results in more restricted speed controller settings.

0.00 … 2000.00 Hz Tune bandwidth for user PI tune mode. 100 = 1 Hz

23.22 Tune damping Speed controller damping after autotune procedure in user mode. Higher damping results in safer and smoother operation.

0.0 … 200.0 Speed controller damping for user PI tune mode. 10 = 1


184 Parameters

2525 Critical speed Configuration of critical speeds (or ranges of speed) that are

avoided due to, for example, mechanical resonance problems.

25.01 Crit speed sel Enables/disables the critical speeds function.Example: A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to 1560 rpm. To make the drive to jump over the vibration speed ranges:• activate the critical speeds function, • set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below.

Disable Critical speeds are disabled. 0

Enable Critical speeds are enabled. 1

25.02 Crit speed1 lo Defines the low limit for critical speed range 1.Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of 25.03 Crit speed1 hi.

-30000 … 30000 rpm

Low limit for critical speed 1. 1 = 1 rpm

25.03 Crit speed1 hi Defines the high limit for critical speed range 1.Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 25.02 Crit speed1 lo.

-30000 … 30000 rpm

High limit for critical speed 1. 1 = 1 rpm


-30000 … 30000 rpm



540

690

1380

1560

1 Par. 25.02 = 540 rpm

2 Par. 25.03 = 690 rpm

3 Par. 25.04 = 1380 rpm

4 Par. 25.05 = 1590 rpm

1 2 3 4

Motor speed(rpm)

Drive speed (rpm)Drive speed (rpm)

Parameters 185


-30000 … 30000 rpm



-30000 … 30000 rpm



-30000 … 30000 rpm


2626 Constant speeds Constant speed selection and values.

An active constant speed overrides the drive speed reference. See also section Constant speeds on page 68.

26.01 Const speed func Determines how constant speeds are selected, and whether the rotation direction signal is considered or not when applying a constant speed.



0 Const speed mode

1 = Packed: 7 constant speeds are selectable using the three sources defined by parameters 26.02, 26.03 and 26.04.0 = Separate: Constant speeds 1, 2 and 3 are separately activated by the sources defined by parameters 26.02, 26.03 and 26.04 respectively. In case of conflict, the constant speed with the smaller number takes priority.

1 Dir ena

1 = Start dir: To determine running direction for a constant speed, the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters 26.06…26.12) is multiplied by the direction signal (forward: +1, reverse: -1). For example, if the direction signal is reverse and the active constant speed is negative, the drive will run in the forward direction.0 = Accord Par: The running direction for the constant speed is determined by the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters 26.06…26.12).

186 Parameters

26.02 Const speed sel1 When bit 0 of parameter 26.01 Const speed func is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 1.When bit 0 of parameter 26.01 Const speed func is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 26.03 Const speed sel2 and 26.04 Const speed sel3 select three sources whose states activate constant speeds as follows:







-

Pointer

26.03 Const speed sel2 When bit 0 of parameter 26.01 Const speed func is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 2.When bit 0 of parameter 26.01 Const speed func is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 26.02 Const speed sel1 and 26.04 Const speed sel3 select three sources that are used to activate constant speeds. See table at parameter 26.02 Const speed sel1.







-

Pointer

26.04 Const speed sel3 When bit 0 of parameter 26.01 Const speed func is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 3.When bit 0 of parameter 26.01 Const speed func is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 26.02 Const speed sel1 and 26.03 Const speed sel2 select three sources that are used to activate constant speeds. See table at parameter 26.02 Const speed sel1.




Source defined by par. 26.02

Source defined by par. 26.03

Source defined by par. 26.04 Constant speed active

0 0 0 None1 0 0 Constant speed 10 1 0 Constant speed 21 1 0 Constant speed 30 0 1 Constant speed 41 0 1 Constant speed 50 1 1 Constant speed 61 1 1 Constant speed 7

Parameters 187





-

Pointer

26.06 Const speed1 Defines constant speed 1.

-30000 … 30000 rpm

Constant speed 1. 1 = 1 rpm


-30000 … 30000 rpm



-30000 … 30000 rpm



-30000 … 30000 rpm



-30000 … 30000 rpm



-30000 … 30000 rpm



-30000 … 30000 rpm


2727 Process PID Configuration of process PID control.

See also section PID control on page 58.

27.01 PID setpoint sel Selects the source of setpoint (reference) for the PID controller.

Zero Zero reference. 0

Setpoint % 04.25 Setpoint val % (see page 124). 1073742873


-

27.12 PID gain Defines the gain for the process PID controller. See parameter 27.13 PID integ time.

0.00 … 100.00 Gain for PID controller. 100 = 1


188 Parameters

27.13 PID integ time Defines the integration time for the process PID controller.

0.00 … 320.00 s Integration time. 100 = 1 s

27.14 PID deriv time Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller. The derivative component at the controller output is calculated on basis of two consecutive error values (EK-1 and EK) according to the following formula: PID DERIV TIME × (EK - EK-1)/TS, in which TS = 12 ms sample timeE = Error = Process setpoint - process actual value.

0.00 … 10.00 s Derivation time. 100 = 1 s

27.15 PID deriv filter Defines the time constant of the 1-pole filter used to smooth the derivative component of the process PID controller.



Ti

OI

G × I

G × I

I = controller input (error)O = controller outputG = gainTi = integration time

Time

Error/Controller output

63

%

100

Tt

O = I × (1 - e-t/T)


Unfiltered signal

Filtered signal

Parameters 189

27.16 PID error inv PID error inversion. When the source selected by this parameter is on, the error (process setpoint – process actual value) at the PID controller input is inverted.


-

Pointer

27.18 PID maximum Defines the maximum limit for the PID controller output. Using the minimum and maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the operation range.

-32768.0 … 32768.0 Maximum limit for PID controller output. 10 = 1

27.19 PID minimum Defines the minimum limit for the PID controller output. See parameter 27.18 PID maximum.

-32768.0 … 32768.0 Minimum limit for PID controller output. 10 = 1

27.30 Pid ref freeze Freezes, or defines a source that can be used to freeze, the setpoint (reference) input of the process PID controller. This feature is useful when the reference is based on a process feedback connected to an analog input, and the sensor must be serviced without stopping the process.The setpoint input of the PID controller is frozen as long as the selected source is 1.See also parameter 27.31 Pid out freeze.

No Process PID controller input not frozen. 0

Freeze Process PID controller input frozen. 1

DI1 Activation of digital input DI1 (as indicated by 02.01 DI status, bit 0) freezes process PID controller input.

1073742337


1073807873


1073873409


1073938945


1074004481


-

Pointer


04.05

27.12

27.01 PIDsetpoint sel

27.1327.1427.1527.16

27.1827.19

PID

Process actual value(group 28 Procact sel)

190 Parameters

27.31 Pid out freeze Freezes, or defines a source that can be used to freeze, the output of the process PID controller. This feature can be used when, for example, a sensor providing process feedback must be serviced without stopping the process.The output of the PID controller is frozen as long as the selected source is 1.See also parameter 27.30 Pid ref freeze.

No Process PID controller output not frozen. 0

Freeze Process PID controller output frozen. 1

DI1 Activation of digital input DI1 (as indicated by 02.01 DI status, bit 0) freezes process PID controller output.

1073742337


1073807873


1073873409


1073938945


1074004481


-

Pointer

27.32 Pipefill ref acc Defines the time for the PID setpoint increase from 0 to 100%.

0 … 100 s PID setpoint acceleration time. 1 = 1 s

27.33 Pipefill ref dec Defines the time for the PID setpoint decrease from 100 to 0%.

0 … 100 s PID setpoint deceleration time. 1 = 1 s

27.34 PID bal ena Selects a source that enables the PID balancing reference (see parameter 27.35 PID bal ref).1 = PID balancing reference enabled.






04.05

27.12

27.01 PIDsetpoint sel

27.1327.1427.1527.16

27.1827.19

PID

Process actual value(group 28 Procact sel)

Parameters 191



-

Pointer

27.35 PID bal ref Defines the PID balancing reference. The PID controller output is set to this value when the source selected by parameter 27.35 PID bal ref is 1.

-32768.0 … 32768.0%

PID balancing reference. 10 = 1%

27.36 Pump scal speed Defines pump speed that corresponds to 100% PID controller output.

Speed scal 19.01 Speed scaling (see page 167). 1073746689


-

2828 Procact sel Process actual value (feedback) settings.

28.01 Act val 1/2 sel Selects the process actual value (1 or 2). Alternatively, selects a source whose status determines which process actual value is used (0 = Actual value 1; 1 = Actual value 2).Note: This parameter is only effective when parameter 28.04 Act val func is set to Act1.

Act val 1 Process actual value 1 selected. 0

Act val 2 Process actual value 2 selected. 1

DI1 Status of digital input DI1 (as indicated by 02.01 DI status, bit 0) determines which process actual value is selected.

1073742337


1073807873


1073873409


1073938945


1074004481


-

Pointer

28.02 Act val 1 src Selects the source of process actual value 1.

Zero No source selected. 0






FBA procact 02.41 FBA act val (see page 122). 1073742377

Shared sig1 02.43 Shared signal 1 (see page 122). 1073742379

Flow act 05.05 Flow act (see page 125). 1073743109


-


192 Parameters

28.03 Act val 2 src Selects the source of process actual value 2.







FBA procact 02.41 FBA act val (see page 122). 1073742377




-

28.04 Act val func Defines how the final process actual value is calculated from the two sources selected by parameters 28.02 Act val 1 src and 28.03 Act val 2 src.

Act1 The actual value is determined by parameter 28.01 Act val 1/2 sel.

0

Add Sum of actual value 1 and actual value 2. 1

Sub Actual value 2 subtracted from actual value 1. 2

Mul Actual value 1 multiplied by actual value 2. 3

Div Actual value 1 divided by actual value 2. 4

Max Greater of the two actual values used. 5

Min Smaller of the two actual values used. 6

Sqrt sub Square root of (actual value 1 – actual value 2). 7

Sqrt add Square root of actual value 1 + square root of actual value 2. 8

28.05 Act max val Actual value scaling. The setting equals 100% of process setpoint and is typically set to the value that corresponds to the top end of the sensor range.

0.00 … 32768.00% Actual value scaling. 100 = 1%

28.06 Act unit sel Defines the unit for both process actual value and process setpoint. Typically the measured quantity is selected.

% % 4

m3/h m3/h 20

bar bar 22

kPa kPa 23

GPM GPM 24

psi psi 25

inHg inHg 29

mbar mbar 44

Pa Pa 45

inH2O inH2O 58

in wg in wg 59

ft wg ft wg 60


Parameters 193

lbsi lbsi 61

m m 72

inch inch 73

28.07 Act FBA scaling Defines a divisor for process actual value for fieldbus. This parameter can be used to improve calculation accuracy at low and high values.

Not used No scaling applied. 0

Src/10 The actual value is divided by 10 for fieldbus. 1



2929 Setpoint sel Process setpoint (reference) settings.

29.01 Setpoint 1 / 2 sel Selects the process setpoint (1 or 2). Alternatively, selects a source whose status determines which process setpoint is used (0 = Setpoint 1; 1 = Setpoint 2).

Setpoint 1 Setpoint 1 selected. 0

Setpoint 2 Setpoint 2 selected. 1

DI1 Status of digital input DI1 (as indicated by 02.01 DI status, bit 0) determines which process setpoint is selected.

1073742337


1073807873


1073873409


1073938945


1074004481


-

Pointer

29.02 Setpoint 1 src Selects the source of process setpoint 1.







FBA setpoint 02.40 FBA setpoint (see page 122). 1073742376


Int set 1 29.04 Internal set 1 (see below). 1073749252


-

29.03 Setpoint 2 src Selects the source of process setpoint 2.





194 Parameters




FBA setpoint 02.40 FBA setpoint (see page 122). 1073742376


Int set 2 29.05 Internal set 2 (see below). 1073749253


-

29.04 Internal set 1 Defines process setpoint 1 when parameter 29.02 Setpoint 1 src is set to Int set 1.

0.00 … 32768.00% Internal process setpoint 1. 100 = 1%

29.05 Internal set 2 Defines process setpoint 2 when parameter 29.03 Setpoint 2 src is set to Int set 2.

0.00 … 32768.00% Internal process setpoint 2. 100 = 1%

29.06 Reference step 1 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when one auxiliary (direct-on-line) motor is running.Example: The drive operates three parallel pumps that pump water into a pipe. The pressure in the pipe is controlled. The constant pressure reference is set by parameter 29.04 Internal set 1. During low water consumption, only the speed-regulated pump is run. When water consumption increases, constant-speed (direct-on-line) pumps are started: first one pump, and if the demand grows further, also the other pump. As water flow increases, the pressure loss between the beginning (point of measurement) and the end of the pipe increases. By setting suitable reference steps, the process setpoint is increased along with the increasing pumping capacity. The reference steps compensate the growing pressure loss and prevent the pressure fall at the end of the pipe.

0.00 … 100.00% Reference step 1. 100 = 1%

29.07 Reference step 2 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when two auxiliary (direct-on-line) motors are running. See parameter 29.06 Reference step 1.

0.00 … 100.00% Reference step 2. 100 = 1%

29.08 Reference step 3 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when three auxiliary (direct-on-line) motors are running. See parameter 29.06 Reference step 1.

0.00 … 100.00% Reference step 3. 100 = 1%

29.09 Reference step 4 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when four auxiliary (direct-on-line) motors are running. See parameter 29.06 Reference step 1.

0.00 … 100.00% Reference step 4. 100 = 1%

29.10 Reference step 5 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when five auxiliary (direct-on-line) motors are running. See parameter 29.06 Reference step 1.

0.00 … 100.00% Reference step 5. 100 = 1%


Parameters 195

29.11 Reference step 6 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when six auxiliary (direct-on-line) motors are running. See parameter 29.06 Reference step 1.

0.00 … 100.00% Reference step 6. 100 = 1%

29.12 Reference step 7 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when seven auxiliary (direct-on-line) motors are running. See parameter 29.06 Reference step 1.

0.00 … 100.00% Reference step 7. 100 = 1%

3030 Fault functions Configuration of behavior of the drive upon various fault

situations.

30.01 External fault Selects a source for an external fault signal.0 = External fault trip1 = No external fault







-

Pointer

30.02 Speed ref safe Defines the safe speed reference that is used with the Spd ref Safe setting of supervision parameters 13.32 AI superv func, 30.03 Local ctrl loss or 50.02 Comm loss func upon an alarm. This speed is used when the parameter is set to Spd ref Safe.

-30000 … 30000 rpm

Safe speed reference. 1 = 1 rpm

30.03 Local ctrl loss Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break.


Fault Drive trips on fault LOCAL CTRL LOSS (0x5300). 1

Spd ref Safe The drive generates alarm LOCAL CTRL LOSS (0x5300) and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 30.02 Speed ref safe.


2

Last speed The drive generates alarm LOCAL CTRL LOSS (0x5300) and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds.


3

30.04 Mot phase loss Selects how the drive reacts when a motor phase loss is detected.


Fault The drive trips on fault MOTOR PHASE (0x3182). 1


196 Parameters

30.05 Earth fault Selects how the drive reacts when an earth fault or current unbalance is detected in the motor or the motor cable.


Warning The drive generates alarm EARTH FAULT (0x2330). 1

Fault The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT (0x2330). 2

30.06 Suppl phs loss Selects how the drive reacts when a supply phase loss is detected.


Fault The drive trips on fault SUPPLY PHASE (0x3130). 1

30.07 Sto diagnostic Selects how the drive reacts when it detects the absence of one or both Safe torque off (STO) signals.Note: This parameter is for supervision only. The Safe torque off function can activate even when this parameter is set to No.For general information on the Safe torque off function, see the Hardware manual of the drive, and Application guide - Safe torque off function for ACSM1, ACS850 and ACQ810 drives (3AFE68929814 [English]).

Fault The drive trips on SAFE TORQUE OFF (0xFF7A) if one or both of the STO signals are lost.

1

Alarm Drive running:The drive trips on SAFE TORQUE OFF (0xFF7A) if one or both of the STO signals are lost.Drive stopped:The drive generates a SAFE TORQUE OFF (0xFF7A) alarm if both STO signals are absent. If only one of the signals is lost, the drive trips on STO1 LOST (0x8182) or STO2 LOST (0x8183).

2

No Drive running:The drive trips on SAFE TORQUE OFF (0xFF7A) if one or both of the STO signals are lost.Drive stopped:No action if both STO signals are absent. If only one of the signals is lost, the drive trips on STO1 LOST (0x8182) or STO2 LOST (0x8183).

3

Only Alarm The drive generates a SAFE TORQUE OFF (0xFF7A) alarm if both STO signals are absent. If only one of the signals is lost, the drive trips on STO1 LOST (0x8182) or STO2 LOST (0x8183).

4

30.08 Cross connection Selects how the drive reacts to incorrect input power and motor cable connection (i.e. input power cable is connected to drive motor connection).


Fault The drive trips on fault CABLE CROSS CON (0x3181). 1


Parameters 197

30.09 Stall function Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition.A stall condition is defined as follows:• The drive is at stall current limit (30.10 Stall curr lim), and• the output frequency is below the level set by parameter

30.11 Stall freq hi, and• the conditions above have been valid longer than the time

set by parameter 30.12 Stall time.See section Stall protection (parameters 30.09…30.12) on page 80.

30.10 Stall curr lim Stall current limit in percent of the nominal current of the motor. See parameter 30.09 Stall function.

0.0 … 1600.0% Stall current limit. 10 = 1%

30.11 Stall freq hi Stall frequency limit. See parameter 30.09 Stall function.Note: Setting the limit below 10 Hz is not recommended.

0.5 … 1000.0 Hz Stall frequency limit. 10 = 1 Hz

30.12 Stall time Stall time. See parameter 30.09 Stall function.

0 … 3600 s Stall time. 1 = 1 s

3131 Motor therm prot Motor temperature measurement and thermal protection

settings.

31.01 Mot temp1 prot Selects how the drive reacts when motor overtemperature is detected by motor thermal protection 1.

No Motor thermal protection 1 inactive. 0

Alarm The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMPERATURE (0x4310) if the temperature exceeds the alarm level defined by parameter 31.03 Mot temp1 almLim.

1

Fault The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMPERATURE (0x4310) or trips on fault MOTOR OVERTEMP (0x4310) if the temperature exceeds the alarm/fault level defined by parameter 31.02 Mot temp1 almLim / 31.03 Mot temp1 almLim (whichever is lower).

2


Bit Function

0Ena sup (Enable supervision)0 = Disabled: Supervision disabled.1 = Enabled: Supervision enabled.

1Ena warn (Enable warning)0 = Disabled1 = Enabled: Drive generates alarm STALL (0x7121) upon a stall condition.

2Ena fault (Enable fault)0 = Disabled1 = Enabled: Drive trips on fault STALL (0x7121) upon a stall condition.

198 Parameters

31.02 Mot temp1 src Selects the means of temperature measurement for motor thermal protection 1. When overtemperature is detected the drive reacts as defined by parameter 31.01 Mot temp1 prot.

Estimated The temperature is supervised based on the motor thermal protection model, which uses the motor thermal time constant (parameter 31.14 Mot therm time) and the motor load curve (parameters 31.10…31.12). User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor.The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor load curve. The motor temperature decreases if it operates in the region below the motor load curve (if the motor is overheated).

WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt.

0

PTC JCU The temperature is supervised using 1…3 PTC sensors connected to digital input DI5.

4

Pt100 JCU x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor connected to analog input AI1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive.

7

Pt100 JCU x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors connected to analog input AI1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive.

8

Pt100 JCU x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors connected to analog input AI1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive.

9

Pt100 Ext x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I/O extensions installed on the drive.

10

Pt100 Ext x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I/O extensions installed on the drive.

11

Pt100 Ext x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I/O extensions installed on the drive.

12

31.03 Mot temp1 almLim Defines the alarm limit for motor thermal protection 1 (when parameter 31.01 Mot temp1 prot is set to either Alarm or Fault).

0 … 200 °C Motor overtemperature alarm limit. 1 = 1 °C

31.04 Mot temp1 fltLim Defines the fault limit for the motor thermal protection 1 (when parameter 31.01 Mot temp1 prot is set to Fault).

0 … 200 °C Motor overtemperature fault limit. 1 = 1 °C

31.05 Mot temp2 prot Selects how the drive reacts when motor overtemperature is detected by motor temperature protection 2.

No Motor temperature protection 2 inactive. 0

Alarm The drive generates alarm MOTTEMPAL2 (0x4313) when the temperature exceeds the alarm level defined by parameter 31.07 Mot temp2 almLim.

1

Fault The drive generates alarm MOTTEMPAL2 (0x4313) or trips on fault MOTOR TEMP2 (0x4313) when the temperature exceeds the alarm/fault level defined by parameter 31.07 Mot temp2 almLim / 31.08 Mot temp2 fltLim (whichever is lower).

2


Parameters 199

31.06 Mot temp2 src Selects the means of temperature measurement for motor thermal protection 2. When overtemperature is detected the drive reacts as defined by parameter 31.05 Mot temp2 prot.

Estimated The temperature is supervised based on the motor thermal protection model, which uses the motor thermal time constant (parameter 31.14 Mot therm time) and the motor load curve (parameters 31.10…31.12). User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor.The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor load curve. The motor temperature decreases if it operates in the region below the motor load curve (if the motor is overheated).

WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt.

0

PTC JCU The temperature is supervised using 1…3 PTC sensors connected to digital input DI5.

4

Pt100 JCU x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor connected to analog input AI1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive.

7

Pt100 JCU x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors connected to analog input AI1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive.

8

Pt100 JCU x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors connected to analog input AI1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive.

9

Pt100 Ext x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I/O extensions installed on the drive.

10

Pt100 Ext x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I/O extensions installed on the drive.

11

Pt100 Ext x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I/O extensions installed on the drive.

12

31.07 Mot temp2 almLim Defines the alarm limit for the motor thermal protection 2 (when parameter 31.05 Mot temp2 prot is set to either Alarm or Fault).

0 … 200 °C Motor overtemperature alarm limit. 1 = 1 °C

31.08 Mot temp2 fltLim Defines the fault limit for the motor thermal protection 2 (when parameter 31.05 Mot temp2 prot is set to Fault).

0 … 200 °C Motor overtemperature fault limit. 1 = 1 °C

31.09 Mot ambient temp Defines the ambient temperature for the thermal protection mode.

-60 … 100 °C Ambient temperature. 1 = 1 °C


200 Parameters

31.10 Mot load curve Defines the load curve together with parameters 31.11 Zero speed load and 31.12 Break point When the parameter is set to 100%, the maximum load is equal to the value of parameter 99.06 Mot nom current (higher loads heat up the motor). The load curve level should be adjusted if the ambient temperature differs from the nominal value.The load curve is used by the motor thermal protection model when parameter 31.02 Mot temp1 src is set to Estimated.

50 … 150% Maximum load for the motor load curve. 1 = 1%

31.11 Zero speed load Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 31.10 Mot load curve and 31.12 Break point. Defines the maximum motor load at zero speed of the load curve. A higher value can be used if the motor has an external motor fan to boost the cooling. See the motor manufacturer's recommendations.See parameter 31.10 Mot load curve.

50 … 150% Zero speed load for the motor load curve. 1 = 1%

31.12 Break point Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 31.10 Mot load curve and 31.11 Zero speed load. Defines the break point frequency of the load curve i.e. the point at which the motor load curve begins to decrease from the value of parameter 31.10 Mot load curve towards the value of parameter 31.11 Zero speed load. See parameter 31.10 Mot load curve.

0.01 … 500.00 Hz Break point for the motor load curve. 100 = 1 Hz


50

100

150

31.10

31.12

31.11

I/IN(%) I = Motor current

IN = Nominal motor current

Drive outputfrequency

Parameters 201

31.13 Mot nom tempRise Defines the temperature rise of the motor when the motor is loaded with nominal current. See the motor manufacturer's recommendations.The temperature rise value is used by the motor thermal protection model when parameter 31.02 Mot temp1 src is set to Estimated.

0 … 300 °C Temperature rise. 1 = 1 °C

31.14 Mot therm time Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal protection model (i.e. time inside which the temperature has reached 63% of the nominal temperature). See the motor manufacturer's recommendations.The motor thermal protection model is used when parameter 31.02 Mot temp1 src is set to Estimated.

100 … 10000 s Motor thermal time constant. 1 = 1 s


Motor nominaltemperature rise

Temperature

Time

Ambient temperature

100%

63%

100%

Time

Time

Motor thermal time

Motor load

Temperature rise

202 Parameters

3232 Automatic reset Configuration of conditions for automatic fault resets.

32.01 Autoreset sel Selects faults that are automatically reset. The parameter is a 16-bit word with each bit corresponding to a fault type. Whenever a bit is set to 1, the corresponding fault is automatically reset.The bits of the binary number correspond to the following faults:

32.02 Number of trials Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by parameter 32.03 Trial time.

0 … 5 Number of automatic resets. 1 = 1

32.03 Trial time Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See parameter 32.02 Number of trials.

1.0 … 600.0 s Time for automatic resets. 10 = 1 s

32.04 Delay time Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 32.01 Autoreset sel.

0.0 … 120.0 s Resetting delay. 10 = 1 s

3333 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision.

See also section Signal supervision on page 81.

33.01 Superv1 func Selects the mode of supervision 1.

Disabled Supervision 1 not in use. 0

Low When the signal selected by parameter 33.02 Superv1 act falls below the value of parameter 33.04 Superv1 lo, bit 0 of 06.13 Superv status is activated.

1

High When the signal selected by parameter 33.02 Superv1 act exceeds the value of parameter 33.03 Superv1 hi, bit 0 of 06.13 Superv status is activated.

2

Abs Low When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 33.02 Superv1 act falls below the value of parameter 33.04 Superv1 lo, bit 0 of 06.13 Superv status is activated.

3

Abs High When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 33.02 Superv1 act exceeds the value of parameter 33.03 Superv1 hi, bit 0 of 06.13 Superv status is activated.

4

33.02 Superv1 act Selects the signal to be monitored by supervision 1. See parameter 33.01 Superv1 func.





Bit Fault0 AR overcurrent1 AR overvoltage2 AR undervoltage3 AR AI min4 Reserved5 AR external

Parameters 203











Process act 04.01 Act val (see page 123). 1073742849



-

33.03 Superv1 hi Selects the upper limit for supervision 1. See parameter 33.01 Superv1 func.

-32768.00 … 32768.00

Upper limit for supervision 1. 100 = 1

33.04 Superv1 lo Selects the lower limit for supervision 1. See parameter 33.01 Superv1 func.

-32768.00 … 32768.00

Lower limit for supervision 1. 100 = 1




1


2


3


4











204 Parameters









-


-32768.00 … 32768.00



-32768.00 … 32768.00





1


2


3


4
















Parameters 205




-


-32768.00 … 32768.00



-32768.00 … 32768.00


3434 User load curve Configuration of user load curve.

See also section User-definable load curve on page 71.

34.01 Overload func Configures the supervision of the upper boundary of the user load curve.


Bit Function


1Input value sel (Input value selection)0 = Current: Current is supervised.1 = Torque: Torque is supervised.

2Ena warn (Enable warning)0 = Disabled1 = Enabled: Drive generates alarm LCURVE (0x2312) when the curve is exceeded.

3Ena fault (Enable fault)0 = Disabled1 = Enabled: Drive trips on fault LOAD CURVE (0x2312) when the curve is exceeded.

4

Ena lim integ (Enable limit integration)0 = Disabled1 = Enabled: Integration time defined by parameter 34.18 Load integ time is used. After the supervision is evoked, the current or torque is limited by the upper boundary of the load curve.

5

Ena lim always (Enable limit always)0 = Disabled1 = Enabled: The current or torque is always limited by the upper boundary of the load curve.

206 Parameters

34.02 Underload func Configures the supervision of the lower boundary of the user load curve.

34.03 Load freq1 Drive output frequency at point 1 of user load curve.

1 … 500 Hz Frequency at point 1. 1 = 1 Hz









34.08 Load low lim1 Minimum load (current or torque) at point 1 of user load curve.

0 … 1600% Minimum load at point 1. 1 = 1%









34.13 Load high lim1 Maximum load (current or torque) at point 1 of user load curve.

0 … 1600% Maximum load at point 1. 1 = 1%


Bit Function


1Input value sel (Input value selection)0 = Current: Current is supervised.1 = Torque: Torque is supervised.

2

Ena warn (Enable warning)0 = Disabled1 = Enabled: Drive generates alarm LCURVE (0x2312) when the load remains below the curve for longer than the time defined by parameter 34.20 Underload time.

3

Ena fault (Enable fault)0 = Disabled1 = Enabled: Drive trips on fault LOAD CURVE (0x2312) when the load remains below the curve for longer than the time defined by parameter 34.20 Underload time.

Parameters 207









34.18 Load integ time Integration time used in limit supervision whenever enabled by parameter 34.01/34.02.

0 … 10000 s Integration time. 1 = 1 s

34.19 Load cool time Defines the cooling time. The output of the overload integrator is set to zero if the load stays continuously below the upper boundary of the user load curve.

0 … 10000 s Load cooling time. 1 = 1 s

34.20 Underload time Time for the underload function. See parameter 34.02 Underload func.

0 … 10000 s Underload time. 1 = 1 s

3535 Process variable Selection and modification of process variables for display

as parameters 04.06 … 04.08.

35.01 Signal1 param Selects a signal to be provided as parameter 04.06 Process var1.

















-


208 Parameters

35.02 Signal1 max Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the maximum display value defined by parameter 35.06 Proc var1 max.

-32768…32768 Real signal value corresponding to maximum process variable 1 value.

1 = 1

35.03 Signal1 min Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the minimum display value defined by parameter 35.07 Proc var1 min. See diagram at parameter 35.02 Signal1 max.

-32768…32768 Real signal value corresponding to minimum process variable 1 value.

1 = 1

35.04 Proc var1 dispf Scaling for process variable 1. This setting also scales the value for fieldbus.

0 1 = 1 0

1 10 = 1 1

2 100 = 1 2

3 1000 = 1 3

4 10000 = 1 4

5 100000 = 1 5

35.05 Proc var1 unit Specifies the unit for parameter 04.06 Process var1 (process variable 1).

0 None 0

1 A 1

2 V 2

3 Hz 3

4 % 4

5 s 5

6 h 6

7 rpm 7

8 kh 8

9 C 9

10 lbft 10

11 mA 11


35.03

35.06

35.07

35.02

04.06 Process var1

Signal selected by 35.01 Signal1 param

Parameters 209

12 mV 12

13 kW 13

14 W 14

15 kWh 15

16 F 16

17 hp 17

18 MWh 18

19 m/s 19

20 m3/h 20

21 dm3/h 21

22 bar 22

23 kPa 23

24 GPM 24

25 PSI 25

26 CFM 26

27 ft 27

28 MGD 28

29 inHg 29

30 FPM 30

31 kbits 31

32 kHz 32

33 Ohm 33

34 ppm 34

35 pps 35

36 l/s 36

37 l/min 37

38 l/h 38

39 m3/s 39

40 m3/m 40

41 kg/s 41

42 kg/m 42

43 kg/h 43

44 mbar 44

45 Pa 45

46 GPS 46

47 gal/s 47

48 gal/m 48

49 gal/h 49

50 ft3/s 50

51 ft3/m 51

52 ft3/h 52


210 Parameters

53 lb/s 53

54 lb/m 54

55 lb/h 55

56 FPS 56

57 ft/s 57

58 inH2O 58

59 inwg 59

60 ftwg 60

61 lbsi 61

62 ms 62

63 Mrev 63

64 days 64

65 inWC 65

66 mpmin 66

67 week 67

68 tonne 68

69 m/s^2 69

70 rev 70

71 deg 71

72 m 72

73 inch 73

74 inc 74

75 m/s^3 75

76 kg/m^2 76

77 kg/m^3 77

78 m^3 78

79 [blank] 79

80 u/s 80

81 u/min 81

82 u/h 82

83…84 [blank] 83…84

85 u/s^2 85

86 min-2 86

87 u/h^2 87

88…89 [blank] 88…89

90 Vrms 90

91 bits 91

92 Nm 92

93 p.u. 93

94 1/s 94

95 mH 95


Parameters 211

96 mOhm 96

97 us 97

98 C/W 98

35.06 Proc var1 max Maximum value for process variable 1. See diagram at parameter 35.02 Signal1 max.

-32768…32768 Maximum value for process variable 1. 1 = 1

35.07 Proc var1 min Minimum value for process variable 1. See diagram at parameter 35.02 Signal1 max.

-32768…32768 Minimum value for process variable 1. 1 = 1


















-


212 Parameters



1 = 1



1 = 1


0 1 = 1 0

1 10 = 1 1

2 100 = 1 2

3 1000 = 1 3

4 10000 = 1 4

5 100000 = 1 5


0…98 See parameter 35.05 Proc var1 unit. 1 = 1











35.10

35.13

35.14

35.09

04.07 Process var2


Parameters 213













-



1 = 1



1 = 1


0 1 = 1 0

1 10 = 1 1

2 100 = 1 2

3 1000 = 1 3

4 10000 = 1 4

5 100000 = 1 5


35.17

35.20

35.21

35.16

04.08 Process var3


214 Parameters


0…98 See parameter 35.05 Proc var1 unit. 1 = 1





3636 Timed functions Configuration of timers.

See also section Timers on page 74.

36.01 Timers enable Enable/disable control for timers. Whenever the source selected by this parameter is off, timers are disabled; when the source is on, timers are enabled.







-

Pointer

36.02 Timers mode Specifies whether the time periods defined by parameters 36.03 Start time1 … 36.18 Stop day4 are valid daily or weekly.

36.03 Start time1 Defines the start time for time period 1.

00:00:00 … 24:00:00

Start time for time period 1. 1 = 1 s (24:00:00 = 86400)

36.04 Stop time1 Defines the stop time for time period 1.

00:00:00 … 24:00:00

Stop time for time period 1. 1 = 1 s (24:00:00 = 86400)

36.05 Start day1 Defines the week day on which time period 1 begins.


Bit Function

0Timer1 mode0 = Daily1 = Weekly




Parameters 215

Monday Time period 1 starts on Monday. 1

Tuesday Time period 1 starts on Tuesday. 2

Wednesday Time period 1 starts on Wednesday. 3

Thursday Time period 1 starts on Thursday. 4

Friday Time period 1 starts on Friday. 5

Saturday Time period 1 starts on Saturday. 6

Sunday Time period 1 starts on Sunday. 7

36.06 Stop day1 Defines the week day on which time period 1 ends.

Monday Time period 1 ends on Monday. 1

Tuesday Time period 1 ends on Tuesday. 2

Wednesday Time period 1 ends on Wednesday. 3

Thursday Time period 1 ends on Thursday. 4

Friday Time period 1 ends on Friday. 5

Saturday Time period 1 ends on Saturday. 6

Sunday Time period 1 ends on Sunday. 7


00:00:00 … 24:00:00



00:00:00 … 24:00:00



















00:00:00 … 24:00:00



216 Parameters


00:00:00 … 24:00:00



















00:00:00 … 24:00:00



00:00:00 … 24:00:00


















Parameters 217


36.19 Boost signal Boosting can be used to extend the timer enable signal for the time defined by parameter 36.20 Boost time. The boost time starts when the boost signal changes state from 1 to 0.







-

Pointer

36.20 Boost time Boost time. See parameter 36.19 Boost signal.

00:00:00 … 24:00:00

Boost time. 1 = 1 s (24:00:00 = 86400)

36.21 Timed func1 Selects which time periods (1…4) are used with timed function 1. Also determines whether boost is used with timed function 1.The parameter is a 16-bit word with each bit corresponding to a function. Whenever a bit is set to 1, the corresponding function is in use.The bits of the binary number correspond to the following functions:



Bit Function0 Timer1 ena (Time period 1 enable)1 Timer2 ena (Time period 2 enable)2 Timer3 ena (Time period 3 enable)3 Timer4 ena (Time period 4 enable)4 Boost ena (Boost enable)


218 Parameters



3838 Flux ref Flux reference and U/f curve settings.

See also section User-definable U/f curve on page 72.

38.01 Flux ref Sets the flux reference (in percent of parameter 99.08 Mot nom freq) at field weakening point.

0 … 200% Flux reference at field weakening point. 1 = 1%

38.03 U/f curve func Selects the form of the U/f (voltage/frequency) curve below the field weakening point.Note: This functionality can be used in scalar control only, i.e. when 99.05 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar.

Linear Linear U/f curve. Recommended for constant-torque applications.

0

Quadratic Quadratic U/f curve. Recommended for centrifugal pump and fan applications.

1

User Custom U/f curve. The curve is formed by the points defined by parameters 38.04…38.13.

2

38.04 U/f curve freq1 Defines the frequency at the 1st point on the custom U/f curve in percent of parameter 99.08 Mot nom freq.

1 … 500% 1st point, frequency. 1 = 1%

38.05 U/f curve freq2 Defines the frequency at the 2nd point on the custom U/f curve in percent of parameter 99.08 Mot nom freq.




Parameters 219

1 … 500% 2nd point, frequency. 1 = 1%

38.06 U/f curve freq3 Defines the frequency at the 3rd point on the custom U/f curve in percent of parameter 99.08 Mot nom freq.

1 … 500% 3rd point, frequency. 1 = 1%

38.07 U/f curve freq4 Defines the frequency at the 4th point on the custom U/f curve in percent of parameter 99.08 Mot nom freq.

1 … 500% 4th point, frequency. 1 = 1%

38.08 U/f curve freq5 Defines the frequency at the 5th point on the custom U/f curve in percent of parameter 99.08 Mot nom freq.

1 … 500% 5th point, frequency. 1 = 1%

38.09 U/f curve volt1 Defines the voltage at the 1st point on the custom U/f curve in percent of parameter 99.07 Mot nom voltage.

0 … 200% 1st point, voltage. 1 = 1%

38.10 U/f curve volt2 Defines the voltage at the 2nd point on the custom U/f curve in percent of parameter 99.07 Mot nom voltage.

0 … 200% 2nd point, voltage. 1 = 1%

38.11 U/f curve volt3 Defines the voltage at the 3rd point on the custom U/f curve in percent of parameter 99.07 Mot nom voltage.

0 … 200% 3rd point, voltage. 1 = 1%

38.12 U/f curve volt4 Defines the voltage at the 4th point on the custom U/f curve in percent of parameter 99.07 Mot nom voltage.

0 … 200% 4th point, voltage. 1 = 1%

38.13 U/f curve volt5 Defines the voltage at the 5th point on the custom U/f curve in percent of parameter 99.07 Mot nom voltage.

0 … 200% 5th point, voltage. 1 = 1%

38.16 Flux ref pointer Selects the source of the flux reference.


-

4040 Motor control Motor control settings such as performance/noise

optimization, slip gain, voltage reserve and IR compensation.

40.01 Motor noise An optimization setting for balancing between control performance and motor noise level.

Cyclic Control performance optimized for cyclic load applications.Note: With this setting, the maximum motor cable length is smaller than with Default.

0

Low noise Minimizes motor noise; control performance optimized for high (> 300 Hz) output frequencies.Note: Drive loadability is reduced with this setting and some derating must be applied if a certain constant output current is needed. This setting is not recommended for cyclic load applications. The maximum motor cable length is 50 m (164 ft) with drives up to 45 kW.

1

Default Control performance optimized for long motor cables. 2


220 Parameters

40.03 Slip gain Defines the slip gain which is used to improve the estimated motor slip. 100% means full slip gain; 0% means no slip gain. The default value is 100%. Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of the full slip gain.Example (with nominal load and nominal slip of 40 rpm): A 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive. Despite of the full slip gain (= 100%), a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rpm. The static speed error is 1000 rpm - 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To compensate the error, the slip gain should be increased. At the 105% gain value, no static speed error exists (2 rpm / 40 rpm = 5%).

0 … 200% Slip gain. 1 = 1%

40.04 Voltage reserve Defines the minimum allowed voltage reserve. When the voltage reserve has decreased to the set value, the drive enters the field weakening area.If the intermediate circuit DC voltage Udc = 550 V and the voltage reserve is 5%, the RMS value of the maximum output voltage in steady-state operation is 0.95 × 550 V / sqrt(2) = 369 VThe dynamic performance of the motor control in the field weakening area can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve value, but the drive enters the field weakening area earlier.

-4 … 50% Voltage reserve. 1 = 1%

40.07 IR-compensation Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR compensation). The function is useful in applications with a high break-away torque where direct torque control (DTC mode) cannot be applied.

See also section IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive on page 70.

0.00 … 50.00% Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of nominal motor voltage.

100 = 1%

40.10 Flux braking Defines the level of braking power.

Disabled Flux braking is disabled. 0


U / UN(%)

f (Hz)Field weakening point

Relative output voltage. No IR compensation.

Relative output voltage. IR compensation set to 15%.

15%

100%

60% of nominal frequency

Parameters 221

Moderate Flux level is limited during the braking. Deceleration time is longer compared to full braking.

1

Full Maximum braking power. Almost all available current is used to convert the mechanical braking energy to thermal energy in the motor.

2

4444 Maintenance Maintenance counter configuration.

See also section Maintenance counters on page 82.

44.01 Ontime1 func Configures on-time counter 1. This counter runs whenever the signal selected by parameter 44.02 Ontime1 src is on. After the limit set by parameter 44.03 Ontime1 limit is reached, an alarm specified by parameter 44.04 Ontime1 alm sel is given, and the counter reset.The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 04.09 Counter ontime1. Bit 0 of 06.15 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit.

44.02 Ontime1 src Selects the signal to be monitored by on-time counter 1. See parameter 44.01 Ontime1 func.

RO1 Relay output RO1 (as indicated by 02.02 RO status, bit 0). 1073742338


Charged Bit 9 of 06.02 Status word2 (see page 127). 1074333186


-

Pointer

44.03 Ontime1 limit Sets the alarm limit for on-time counter 1. See parameter 44.01 Ontime1 func.

0…2147483647 s Alarm limit for on-time counter 1.

44.04 Ontime1 alm sel Selects the alarm for on-time counter 1. See parameter 44.01 Ontime1 func.

On-time1 Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 1. 0

Device clean Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 1. 1

Add cool fan Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 1. 2

Cabinet fan Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 1. 3

Dc-capacitor Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 1. 4

Mot bearing Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 1. 5


Bit Function

0Counter mode0 = Loop: If alarm is enabled by bit 1, the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds.1 = Saturate: If alarm is enabled by bit 1, the alarm stays active until reset.

1Alarm ena (Alarm enable)0 = Disable: No alarm is given when limit is reached.1 = Enable: Alarm is given when limit is reached.

222 Parameters

44.05 Ontime2 func Configures on-time counter 2. This counter runs whenever the signal selected by parameter 44.06 Ontime2 src is on. After the limit set by parameter 44.07 Ontime2 limit is reached, an alarm specified by parameter 44.08 Ontime2 alm sel is given, and the counter reset.The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 04.10 Counter ontime2. Bit 1 of 06.15 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit.

44.06 Ontime2 src Selects the signal to be monitored by on-time counter 2. See parameter 44.05 Ontime2 func.





-

Pointer

44.07 Ontime2 limit Sets the alarm limit for on-time counter 2. See parameter 44.05 Ontime2 func.

0 … 2147483647 s Alarm limit for on-time counter 2. 1 = 1 s

44.08 Ontime2 alm sel Selects the alarm for on-time counter 2. See parameter 44.05 Ontime2 func.

On-time2 Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 2. 0

Device clean Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 2. 1

Add cool fan Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 2. 2

Cabinet fan Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 2. 3

Dc-capacitor Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 2. 4

Mot bearing Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 2. 5


Bit Function



Parameters 223

44.09 Edge count1 func Configures rising edge counter 1. This counter is incremented every time the signal selected by parameter 44.10 Edge count1 src switches on (unless a divisor value is applied – see parameter 44.12 Edge count1 div). After the limit set by parameter 44.11 Edge count1 lim is reached, an alarm specified by parameter 44.13 Edg cnt1 alm sel is given, and the counter reset.The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 04.11 Counter edge1. Bit 2 of 06.15 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit.

44.10 Edge count1 src Selects the signal to be monitored by rising edge counter 1. See parameter 44.09 Edge count1 func.





-

Pointer

44.11 Edge count1 lim Sets the alarm limit for rising edge counter 1. See parameter 44.09 Edge count1 func.

0 … 2147483647 Alarm limit for rising edge counter 1. 1 = 1

44.12 Edge count1 div Divisor for rising edge counter 1. Determines how many rising edges increment the counter by 1.

1 … 2147483647 Divisor for rising edge counter 1. 1 = 1

44.13 Edg cnt1 alm sel Selects the alarm for rising edge counter 1. See parameter 44.09 Edge count1 func.

Edge count1 Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 1. 0

Main cntactr Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 1. 1

Output relay Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 1. 2

Motor starts Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 1. 3

Power ups Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 1. 4

Dc-charge Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 1. 5


Bit Function



224 Parameters

44.14 Edge count2 func Configures rising edge counter 2. The counter is incremented every time the signal selected by parameter 44.15 Edge count2 src switches on (unless a divisor value is applied – see parameter 44.17 Edge count2 div). After the limit set by parameter 44.16 Edge count2 lim is reached, an alarm specified by parameter 44.22 Edg cnt2 alm sel is given and the counter is reset.The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 04.12 Counter edge2. Bit 3 of 06.15 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit.

44.15 Edge count2 src Selects the signal to be monitored by rising edge counter 2. See parameter 44.14 Edge count2 func.





-

Pointer

44.16 Edge count2 lim Sets the alarm limit for rising edge counter 1. See parameter 44.14 Edge count2 func.

0 … 2147483647 Alarm limit for rising edge counter 2. 1 = 1

44.17 Edge count2 div Divisor for rising edge counter 2. Determines how many rising edges increment the counter by 1.

1 … 2147483647 Divisor for rising edge counter 2. 1 = 1

44.18 Edg cnt2 alm sel Selects the alarm for rising edge counter 2. See parameter 44.14 Edge count2 func.

Edge count2 Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2. 0

Main cntactr Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2. 1

Output relay Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2. 2

Motor starts Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2. 3

Power ups Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2. 4

Dc-charge Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2. 5


Bit Function



Parameters 225

44.19 Val count1 func Configures value counter 1. This counter measures, by integration, the area below the signal selected by parameter 44.20 Val count1 src. When the total area exceeds the limit set by parameter 44.21 Val count1 lim, an alarm is given (if enabled by bit 1 of this parameter).The signal is sampled at 1-second intervals. Note that the scaled (see the “FbEq” column at the signal in question) value of the signal is used.The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 04.13 Counter value1. Bit 4 of 06.15 Counter status indicates that the counter has exceeded the limit.

44.20 Val count1 src Selects the signal to be monitored by value counter 1. See parameter 44.19 Val count1 func.



-

44.21 Val count1 lim Sets the alarm limit for value counter 1. See parameter 44.19 Val count1 func.

0 … 2147483647 Alarm limit for value counter 1. 1 = 1

44.22 Val count1 div Divisor for value counter 1. The value of the monitored signal is divided by this value before integration.

1 … 2147483647 Divisor for value counter 1. 1 = 1

44.23 Val cnt1 alm sel Selects the alarm for value counter 1. See parameter 44.19 Val count1 func.

Value1 Pre-selectable alarm for value counter 1. 0

Mot bearing Pre-selectable alarm for value counter 1. 1


Bit Function



226 Parameters

44.24 Val count2 func Configures value counter 2. This counter measures, by integration, the area below the signal selected by parameter 44.25 Val count2 src. When the total area exceeds the limit set by parameter 44.26 Val count2 lim, an alarm is given (if enabled by bit 1 of this parameter).The signal is sampled at 1-second intervals. Note that the scaled (see the “FbEq” column at the signal in question) value of the signal is used.The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 04.14 Counter value2. Bit 5 of 06.15 Counter status indicates that the counter has exceeded the limit.

44.25 Val count2 src Selects the signal to be monitored by value counter 2. See parameter 44.24 Val count2 func.



-

44.26 Val count2 lim Sets the alarm limit for value counter 2. See parameter 44.24 Val count2 func.

0…2147483647 Alarm limit for value counter 2. 1 = 1

44.27 Val count2 div Divisor for value counter 2. The value of the monitored signal is divided by this value before integration.

1…2147483647 Divisor for value counter 2. 1 = 1

44.28 Val cnt2 alm sel Selects the alarm for value counter 2. See parameter 44.24 Val count2 func.

Value2 Pre-selectable alarm for value counter 2. 0

Mot bearing Pre-selectable alarm for value counter 2. 1

44.29 Fan ontime lim Sets the limit for the cooling fan on-time counter. The counter monitors signal 01.28 Fan on-time (see page 112). When the signal reaches the limit, alarm 2056 COOLING FAN is given.

0.00 … 35791394.11 h

Alarm limit for cooling fan on-time. 1 = 1 min

44.30 Runtime lim Sets the limit for the drive run-time counter. The counter monitors signal 01.27 Run-time counter (see page 112). When the signal reaches the limit, the alarm specified by parameter 44.31 Runtime alm sel is given.

0.00 … 35791394.11 h

Alarm limit for the drive run-time counter. 1 = 1 min

44.31 Runtime alm sel Selects the alarm for the drive run time counter.

Device clean Pre-selectable alarm for the drive run time counter. 1

Add cool fan Pre-selectable alarm for the drive run time counter. 2

Cabinet fan Pre-selectable alarm for the drive run time counter. 3


Bit Function



Parameters 227

Dc-capacitor Pre-selectable alarm for the drive run time counter. 4

Mot bearing Pre-selectable alarm for the drive run time counter. 5

44.32 kWh inv lim Sets the limit for the energy counter. The counter monitors signal 01.24 kWh inverter (see page 112). When the signal reaches the limit, the alarm specified by parameter 44.33 kWh inv alm sel is given.

0…2147483647 kWh

Alarm limit for the energy counter. 1 = 1 kWh

44.33 kWh inv alm sel Selects the alarm for the energy counter.

Device clean Pre-selectable alarm for the energy counter. 1

Add cool fan Pre-selectable alarm for the energy counter. 2

Cabinet fan Pre-selectable alarm for the energy counter. 3

Dc-capacitor Pre-selectable alarm for the energy counter. 4

Mot bearing Pre-selectable alarm for the energy counter. 5

4545 Energy optimising Energy optimization settings.

See also section Energy savings calculator on page 81.

45.01 Energy optim Enables/disables the energy optimization function. The function optimizes the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and drive) can be improved by 1…10% depending on load torque and speed.

Disable Energy optimization disabled. 0

Enable Energy optimization enabled. 1

45.02 Energy tariff1 Price of energy per kWh. Used for reference when savings are calculated. See parameters 01.35 Saved energy, 01.36 Saved amount and 01.37 Saved CO2.

0.00 … 21474836.47

Price of energy per kWh. 1 = 1

45.06 E tariff unit Specifies the currency used for the savings calculation.

Local The currency is determined by the setting of parameter 99.01 Language.

0

Eur Euro. 1

Usd US dollar. 2

45.07 CO2 Conv factor Conversion factor for converting energy into CO2 emissions (kg/kWh or tn/MWh). Used for multiplying the saved energy in MWh to calculate the value of signal 01.37 Saved CO2 (reduction in carbon dioxide emissions in metric tons).01.37 Saved CO2 = 01.35 Saved energy (MWh) × 45.07 CO2 Conv factor (tn/MWh).

0.0 … 10.0 Conversion factor for converting energy into CO2 emissions (kg/kWh or tn/MWh).

1 = 1

45.08 Pump ref power Pump power when connected directly to supply. Used for reference when energy savings are calculated. See parameters 01.35 Saved energy, 01.36 Saved amount and 01.37 Saved CO2.

0.0 … 1000.0% Pump power in percent of nominal motor power. 1 = 1


228 Parameters

45.09 Energy reset Resets the energy counters 01.35 Saved energy, 01.36 Saved amount and 01.37 Saved CO2.

Done Reset not requested (normal operation). 0

Reset Reset energy counters. The value reverts automatically to Done.

1

4747 Voltage ctrl Overvoltage and undervoltage control settings.

See also DC voltage control on page 76.

47.01 Overvolt ctrl Enables the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link. Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque.

Disable Overvoltage control disabled. 0

Enable Overvoltage control enabled. 1

47.02 Undervolt ctrl Enables the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link. If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor torque in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit. By decreasing the motor torque, the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back to the drive, keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop. This will act as a power-loss ride-through functionality in systems with high inertia.

Disable Undervoltage control disabled. 0

Enable Undervoltage control enabled. 1

47.03 SupplyVoltAutoId Enables the auto-identification of the supply voltage.

Disable Auto-identification of supply voltage disabled. 0

Enable Auto-identification of supply voltage enabled. 1

47.04 Supply voltage Defines the nominal supply voltage. Used if auto-identification of the supply voltage is not enabled by parameter 47.03 SupplyVoltAutoId.

0 … 1000 V Nominal supply voltage. 10 = 1 V

4949 Data storage Data storage parameters reserved for the user.

These parameters can be written to and read from using other parameters’ pointer settings. Four 16-bit and four 32-bit storage parameters are available.

49.01 Data storage1 Data storage parameter 1.

-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1 = 1


-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1 = 1


-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1 = 1


-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1 = 1


-2147483647 … 2147483647

32-bit data. 1 = 1


Parameters 229


-2147483647 … 2147483647

32-bit data. 1 = 1


-2147483647 … 2147483647

32-bit data. 1 = 1


-2147483647 … 2147483647

32-bit data. 1 = 1

5050 Fieldbus Settings for configuration of communication via a fieldbus

adapter.See also chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter on page 357.

50.01 FBA enable Enables communication between the drive and fieldbus adapter.

Disable Communication between the drive and fieldbus adapter disabled.

0

Enable Communication between the drive and fieldbus adapter enabled.

1

50.02 Comm loss func Selects how the drive reacts upon a fieldbus communication break. The time delay is defined by parameter 50.03 Comm loss t out.

No Communication break detection disabled. 0

Fault Communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, the drive trips on fault FIELDBUS COMM (0x7510) and coasts to stop.

1

Spd ref Safe Communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, the drive generates alarm FIELDBUS COMM (0x7510) and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 30.02 Speed ref safe.


2

Last speed Communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, the drive generates alarm FIELDBUS COMM (0x7510) and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds.


3

50.03 Comm loss t out Defines the time delay before the action defined by parameter 50.02 Comm loss func is taken. Time count starts when the link fails to update the message.

0.3 … 6553.5 s Time delay. 10 = 1 s

50.04 FBA ref1 modesel Selects the fieldbus reference FBA REF1 scaling and the actual value, which is sent to the fieldbus (FBA ACT1).

Raw data No scaling (i.e. data is transmitted without scaling). Source for the actual value, which is sent to the fieldbus, is selected by parameter 50.06 FBA act1 tr src.

0

1 Reserved. 1


230 Parameters

Speed Fieldbus adapter module uses speed reference scaling. Speed reference scaling is defined by the used fieldbus profile (e.g. with ABB Drives Profile integer value 20000 corresponds to parameter 19.01 Speed scaling value). Signal 01.01 Motor speed rpm is sent to the fieldbus as an actual value. See the User’s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module.

2

50.05 FBA ref2 modesel Selects the fieldbus reference FBA REF2 scaling. See parameter 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel.

Raw data See parameter 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel. 0

1 Reserved. 1

Speed See parameter 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel. 2

50.06 FBA act1 tr src Selects the source for fieldbus actual value 1 when parameter 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel / 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel is set to Raw data.


-

50.07 FBA act2 tr src Selects the source for fieldbus actual value 2 when parameter 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel / 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel is set to Raw data.


-

50.08 FBA sw bit12 src Selects the source for freely programmable fieldbus status word bit 28 (02.24 FBA main sw bit 28). Note that this functionality may not be supported by the fieldbus communication profile.


-

Pointer



-

Pointer



-

Pointer



-

Pointer

50.15 Fb cw used Selects the fieldbus Control Word which controls the drive.


-


Parameters 231

50.20 Fb main sw func Selects the rule on the basis of which the drive defines the value for 02.24 FBA main sw bit 1 (Enabled).

5151 FBA settings Fieldbus adapter-specific settings.

51.01 FBA type Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module.0 = Fieldbus module is not found, or it is not properly connected, or parameter 50.01 FBA enable is set to Disable, 1 = PROFIBUS DP, 32 = CANopen, 37 = DeviceNet, 128 = Ethernet, 132 = PROFINET IO, 135 = EtherCAT, 136 = Ethernet POWERLINK, 485 = RS-485, 62944 = SERCOS interface.

51.02 FBA par2 Parameters 51.02…51.26 are adapter module-specific. For more information, see the User’s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module. Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily used.

-

… … … …

51.26 FBA par26 See parameter 51.02 FBA par2. -

51.27 FBA par refresh Validates any changed adapter module configuration parameter settings. After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to Done.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.

Done Refreshing done. 0

Refresh Refreshing. 1

51.28 Par table ver Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive.In format xyz, where x = major revision number; y = minor revision number; z = correction number.

0x0000 … 0xFFFF Parameter table revision. 1 = 1

51.29 Drive type code Displays the drive type code of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive.

0 … 65535 Drive type code of fieldbus adapter module mapping file. 1 = 1

51.30 Mapping file ver Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file revision stored in the memory of the drive in decimal format. Example: 0x107 = revision 1.07.

0 … 65535 Mapping file revision. 1 = 1

51.31 D2FBA comm sta Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module communication.

Idle Adapter is not configured. 0

Exec.init Adapter is initializing. 1



0 Run enable func

1 = Parameter only:Drive writes value 1 to the bit when the external run enable signal (par. 10.11 Run enable) has value 1.0 = Param AND Fb cw:Drive writes value 1 to the bit when the external run enable signal (par. 10.11 Run enable) is 1 AND 02.22 FBA main cw bit 7 (Run enable) is 1.

232 Parameters

Time out A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive.

2

Conf.err Adapter configuration error: The major or minor revision code of the common program revision in the fieldbus adapter module is not the revision required by the module (see parameter 51.32 FBA comm sw ver) or mapping file upload has failed more than three times.

3

Off-line Adapter is off-line. 4

On-line Adapter is on-line. 5

Reset Adapter is performing a hardware reset. 6

51.32 FBA comm sw ver Displays the common program revision of the adapter module in format axyz, where a = major revision number, xy = minor revision numbers. z = correction letter.Example: 190A = revision 1.90A.

Common program version of adapter module. 1 = 1

51.33 FBA appl sw ver Displays the application program revision of the adapter module in format axyz, where: a = major revision number, xy = minor revision numbers, z = correction letter.Example: 190A = revision 1.90A.

Application program revision of adapter module. 1 = 1

5252 FBA data in Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus

controller via fieldbus adapter.

52.01 FBA data in1 Parameters 52.01…52.12 select data to be transferred from the drive to the fieldbus controller.

4 Status Word (16 bits) 4

5 Actual value 1 (16 bits) 5


14 Status Word (32 bits) 14



101…9999 Parameter index 1 = 1

… … … …

52.12 FBA data in12 See parameter 52.01 FBA data in1.


Parameters 233

5353 FBA data out Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to

drive via fieldbus adapter.

53.01 FBA data out1 Parameters 53.01…53.12 select data to be transferred from the fieldbus controller to the drive.

1 Control Word (16 bits) 1

2 Reference REF1 (16 bits) 2


11 Control Word (32 bits) 11



101…9999 Parameter index 1 = 1

… … … …

53.12 FBA data out12 See parameter 53.01 FBA data out1.

5656 Panel display Selection of signals to be displayed on control panel.

56.01 Signal1 param Selects the first signal to be displayed on the optional control panel. The default signal is 01.03 Output frequency.

00.00 … 255.255 1st signal to be displayed. -

56.02 Signal2 param Selects the second signal to be displayed on the optional control panel. The default signal is 01.04 Motor current.

00.00 … 255.255 2nd signal to be displayed. -

56.03 Signal3 param Selects the third signal to be displayed on the optional control panel. The default signal is 01.06 Motor torque.

00.00 … 255.255 3rd signal to be displayed. -

56.04 Signal1 mode Defines the way the signal selected by parameter 56.01 Signal1 param is displayed on the optional control panel.

Disabled Signal not displayed. Any other signals that are not disabled are shown together with their respective signal name.

-1

Normal Shows the signal as a numerical value followed by unit. 0

Bar Shows the signal as a horizontal bar. 1

Drive name Shows the drive name. (The drive name can be set using the DriveStudio PC tool.)

2

Drive type Shows the drive type. 3



-1




2



234 Parameters



-1




2


56.07 Local ref unit Defines how speed reference is entered and displayed by the control panel and DriveStudio PC tool. Also determines the unit of signal 02.34 Panel ref.Note: This parameter also applies to external control when speed reference is given from the control panel.

rpm Speed reference is displayed and entered in rpm. 0

Percent Speed reference is displayed and entered in percent. The scaling is as follows:

1

5858 Embedded Modbus Configuration parameters for the embedded fieldbus (EFB)

interface.See also chapter Control through the embedded fieldbus interface on page 329.

58.01 Protocol ena sel Enables/disables the embedded fieldbus communication protocol.Note: When the embedded fieldbus interface is enabled, the drive-to-drive link operation (parameter group 76) is automatically disabled.

Disabled Disabled. 0

Modbus RTU Modbus RTU protocol enabled. 1

58.03 Node address Defines the node address.

0…247 Node address. 1 = 1

58.04 Baud rate Selects the baud rate of the RS-485 link.

4800 4.8 kbit/s. 0

9600 9.6 kbit/s. 1

19200 19.2 kbit/s. 2

38400 38.4 kbit/s. 3

57600 57.6 kbit/s. 4

76800 76.8 kbit/s. 5


20.01 Maximum speed

0%

Control panelreference

Speed (rpm)

100%

-100% 20.02 Minimum speed

0

Parameters 235

115200 115.2 kbit/s. 6

58.05 Parity Selects the number of the data bits, the use and type of the parity bit, and the number of the stop bits.

8 none 1 Eight data bits, no parity bit, one stop bit. 0

8 none 2 Eight data bits, no parity bit, two stop bits. 1

8 even 1 Eight data bits, even parity bit, one stop bit. 2

8 odd 1 Eight data bits, odd parity bit, one stop bit. 3

58.06 Control profile Selects the communication profile used by the Modbus protocol.

ABB Classic ABB Drives profile, classic version. 0

ABB Enhanced ABB Drives profile, enhanced version. 1

DCU 16-bit DCU 16-bit profile. 2

DCU 32-bit DCU 32-bit profile. 3

58.07 Comm loss t out Defines the timeout limit for EFB communication loss monitoring. If a communication break exceeds the timeout limit, the function proceeds with the action defined with parameter 58.09 Comm loss action. See also parameter 58.08 Comm loss mode.

0…60000 ms Timeout calculation factor. The actual timeout value is calculated as follows: Comm loss timeout × 100 msExample: If you set this value to 22, the actual timeout value will be: 22 × 100 ms = 2 200 ms.

100 = 1 ms

58.08 Comm loss mode Enables/disables EFB communication loss monitoring and defines which of the Modbus register accesses resets the timeout counter. See parameter 58.07 Comm loss t out.

None EFB communication loss monitoring is disabled. 0

Any message EFB communication loss monitoring is enabled. Any Modbus request resets the timeout counter.

1

Ctrl write EFB communication loss monitoring is enabled. Writing to control or reference word resets the timeout counter.

2

58.09 Comm loss action Defines the drive operation after the EFB communication loss monitoring awakes. See parameters 58.07 Comm loss t out and 58.08 Comm loss mode.

None No action. 0

Fault Drive trips on fault EFB COMM LOSS (0x7540). 1

Safe speed Drive generates alarm EFB COMM LOSS (0x7540) and takes the safe speed into use (see parameter 30.02 Speed ref safe).

2

Last speed Drive generates alarm EFB COMM LOSS (0x7540) and takes the last speed into use (average over the previous 10 seconds).

3

58.10 Refresh settings Refreshes the settings of parameters 58.01…58.09.

Done Initial value. The value is restored after the refresh is done. 0

Refresh Refresh. 1


236 Parameters

58.11 Reference scale Defines the factor which the DCU 16-bit communication profile uses when scaling fieldbus references to drive references and drive actual values to fieldbus actual signals. The references are multiplied by this scaling factor. See section DCU 16-bit profile on page 348.

1…65535 Scaling factor. 1 = 1

58.15 Comm diagnostics 16-bit packed boolean data word for the communication diagnostics flag bits. Read only.

0x0000…0xFFFF Data word (hex). 1 = 1

58.16 Received packets Shows the number of message packets received by the drive, including only such packets that are addressed to the drive. Note: The user can reset the counter (by setting the value to 0).

0…65535 No. of message packets. 1 = 1

58.17 Transm packets Shows the number of message packets sent by the drive. Note: The user can reset the counter (by setting the value to 0).


58.18 All packets Shows the total number of message packets received by the drive, including all packets addressed to any valid node on the fieldbus link. Note: The user can reset the counter (by setting the value to 0).


58.19 UART errors Shows the number of messages with communication errors other than CRC errors which the drive has received (e.g. UART buffer overflow errors). Read only.

0..65535 No. of messages with errors (excluding messages with CRC errors).

1 = 1

58.20 CRC errors Shows the number of messages with Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) errors which the drive has received. Read only.Note: High electromagnetic noise levels may generate errors.


Bit Information0 Reserved.1 Last received packet was not for this node.2 Reserved.3 At least one packet has been successfully received after the power up.4 Reserved.5 Communication time-out has occured.6…7 Reserved.8 Last write was not successful because of a parameter value limit violation.9 Last read was not successful because only one register was used to read a 32-bit value.10 Last write was not successful because the parameter was read only.11 Last parameter access was not successful because the parameter or group did not exist.12…14 Reserved.15 Last write was not successful because only one register was used to read a 32-bit value.16…31 Reserved.

Parameters 237

0…65535 No. of messages with CRC errors. 1 = 1

58.21 Raw CW LSW Shows the LSW part of the Control Word which the drive receives from the Modbus master. Read only.

0x0000…0xFFFF Bits 0…15 of the Control word as a hex value. 1 = 1

58.22 Raw CW MSW Shows the MSW part of the Control Word which the drive receives from the Modbus master. Read only.

0x0000…0xFFFF Bits 16…32 of the Control word as a hex value. 1 = 1

58.23 Raw SW LSW Shows the LSW part of the Status Word which the drive sends to the Modbus master. Read only.

0x0000…0xFFFF Bits 0…15 of the Status word as a hex value. 1 = 1

58.24 Raw SW MSW Shows the MSW part of the Status Word which the drive sends to the Modbus master. Read only.

0x0000…0xFFFF Bits 16…32 of the Status word as a hex value. 1 = 1

58.25 Raw Ref 1 LSW Shows the LSW part of reference 1 which the drive receives from the Modbus master. Read only.

0x0000…0xFFFF Bits 0…15 of reference 1 as a hex value. 1 = 1

58.26 Raw Ref 1 MSW Shows the MSW part of reference 1 which the drive receives from the Modbus master. Read only.


58.27 Raw Ref 2 LSW Shows the LSW part of reference 2 which the drive receives from the Modbus master. Read only.


58.28 Raw Ref 2 MSW Shows the MSW part of reference 2 which the drive receives from the Modbus master. Read only.


58.30 Transmit delay Defines the delay time which the slave waits until it sends a response.

0…65335 ms Transmit delay time. 1 = 1 ms

58.31 Ret app errors Selects whether the drive returns Modbus exception codes or not.

No No 0

Yes Yes 1

58.32 Word order Defines the order of the data words in the Modbus frame.

MSW LSW Most significant word first, then Least significant word. 0

LSW MSW Least significant word first, then Most significant word. 1

58.35 Data I/O 1 Defines the address of the drive parameter which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to the register address corresponding to Modbus In/Out parameter no. 1. The Modbus master defines the type of the data (input or output).The value is conveyed in a Modbus frame using two 16-bit words. If the drive parameter is a 16-bit value, the LSW (Least significant word) conveys the value. If the drive parameter is a 32-bit value, the next Modbus In/Out parameter is also reserved.

0…9999 Parameter address. Format: xxyy, where: xx = parameter group yy = parameter index

1 = 1


238 Parameters

58.36 Data I/O 2 See parameter 58.35.

0…9999 See parameter 58.35. 1 = 1

… … … …

58.58 Data I/O 24 See parameter 58.35.

0…9999 See parameter 58.35. 1 = 1

6464 Load analyzer Peak value and amplitude logger settings.

See also section Load analyzer on page 82.

64.01 PVL signal Selects the signal to be monitored by the peak value logger.The signal is filtered using the filtering time specified by parameter 64.02 PVL filt time.The peak value is stored, along with other pre-selected signals at the time, into parameters 64.06…64.11.Parameter 64.03 Reset loggers resets both the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2. The latest time the loggers were reset is stored into parameter 64.13.













-

64.02 PVL filt time Peak value logger filtering time. See parameter 64.01 PVL signal.

0.00 … 120.00 s Peak value logger filtering time. 100 = 1 s

64.03 Reset loggers Selects the signal to reset the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2. (Amplitude logger 1 cannot be reset.)


-

Pointer


Parameters 239

64.04 AL signal Selects the signal to be monitored by amplitude logger 2. The signal is sampled at 200 ms intervals when the drive is running.The results are displayed by parameters 64.24…64.33. Each parameter represents an amplitude range, and shows what portion of the samples fall within that range.The signal value corresponding to 100% is defined by parameter 64.05 AL signal base.Parameter 64.03 Reset loggers resets both the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2. The latest time the loggers were reset is stored into parameter 64.13.Note: Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current (01.04 Motor current). The results are displayed by parameters 64.14…64.23. 100% of the signal value corresponds to the maximum output current of the drive (see the appropriate Hardware Manual).













-

64.05 AL signal base Defines the signal value that corresponds to 100% amplitude.

0.00 … 32768.00 Signal value corresponding to 100%. 100 = 1

64.06 PVL peak value1 Peak value recorded by the peak value logger.

-32768.00 … 32768.00

Peak value. 100 = 1

64.07 Date of peak The date on which the peak value was recorded.

01.01.80 … Peak occurrence date (dd.mm.yy). 1 = 1 d

64.08 Time of peak The time at which the peak value was recorded.

00:00:00 … 23:59:59

Peak occurrence time. 1 = 1 s

64.09 Current at peak Motor current at the moment the peak value was recorded.

-32768.00 … 32768.00 A

Motor current at peak. 100 = 1 A

64.10 Dc volt at peak Voltage in the intermediate DC circuit of the drive at the moment the peak value was recorded.

0.00 … 2000.00 V DC voltage at peak. 100 = 1 V


240 Parameters

64.11 Speed at peak Motor speed at the moment the peak value was recorded.

-32768.00 … 32768.00 rpm

Motor speed at peak. 100 = 1 rpm

64.12 Date of reset The date the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 were last reset.

01.01.80 … Last reset date of loggers (dd.mm.yy). 1 = 1 d

64.13 Time of reset The time the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 were last reset.

00:00:00 … 23:59:59

Last reset time of loggers. 1 = 1 s

64.14 AL1 0 to 10% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 0 and 10%.

0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 0 and 10%. 100 = 1%

















64.23 AL1 over 90% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that exceed 90%.

0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples over 90%. 100 = 1%






Parameters 241















64.33 AL2 over 90% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that exceed 90%.

0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples over 90%. 100 = 1%

7575 Pump logic Configuration settings for the pump station.

75.01 Operation mode Selects the pump control mode.

Off Use this setting for a single pump. 0

Trad ctrl Traditional pump control mode.One pump at a time is controlled by the drive. The remaining pumps are direct-on-line pumps that are started and stopped by the drive logic.

1


242 Parameters

Reg bypass PID controller bypass mode.The signal selected by parameters 28.01…28.04 is used as the reference. The automatic starting and stopping of direct-on-line pumps is related to this actual value instead of the output of the PID controller.This setting can be used in applications with a low number of sensors and low accuracy requirements.Example: The capacity of the pumping station (outlet flow) follows the measured inlet flow.

2

In the diagram below, the slopes of the lines describe the relation between the control signal (selected by parameters 28.01…28.04) and the speed of the controlled pump in a three-motor system. At full control signal level, all pumps are operating at maximum speed.


M3~

M3~

M3~

3

3

3

33

3

Measured inlet flow = Reference for the pumping station

P3P2P1

P1

P2

P3

Inlet pipe

Outletpipe 1

Outletpipe 2

Sewage tank

Contac-tors

3-phasesupply

DriveOutletpipe 3

Control signal (%)

No aux. mo-tors ON

Stop speed 2

Max. speed.Start speed 2Start speed 1

Min. speed.

Speed (rpm)

33% 66% 100%

Stop speed 1

1 aux. motor ON

2 aux. mo-tors ON

Parameters 243

Multipump Multiple drives, each controlling a separate pump, are connected together using the drive-to-drive link.

3

75.02 Nbr of pumps Total number of pumps used in the application, including the pump connected directly to the drive.

0…8 Number of pumps. 1 = 1

75.03 Follower mode Selects the source of reference when the drive is a follower.

Const speed Follower drives are started and stopped by the control logic in the master drive. The master receives its reference from the PI controller.When flow demand increases, new pumps are started.If parameter 76.10 Master location is set to In start, the latest drive to start becomes the master; at the same time, the previously-started drive becomes a follower and starts to follow the reference defined by parameter 75.04 Follower ref.If parameter 76.10 Master location is set to Stable, the drive that was started first remains the master.

0

See also the diagrams at parameter 75.04 Follower ref.


Frequency

Flow demand

75.04 Follower ref

Drive status

Master FollowerDrive 1

Stopped Master FollowerDrive 2

Stopped MasterDrive 3

Drive 1

Drive 2

Drive 3

244 Parameters

Copy of mstr The drive follows the same start/stop commands and reference (received from the PI controller) as the master.With this setting, the drive does not become master when started.In the example shown, drive 1 is master; drives 2 and 3 have parameter 75.03 Follower mode set to Copy of mstr.

1


Drive 1/2/3

Frequency

Flow demand

Drive status

MasterDrive 1

FollowerDrive 2

FollowerDrive 3

Parameters 245

Master speed The drive follows the same reference (received from the PI controller) as the master, but is started and stopped by the logic. This is usually the most economical follower mode.

2

In case the master status switches from one drive to another and the reference changes drastically, the drive compares the most recent reference value with the previous reference. If the difference between the references is more than 10%, the follower will accelerate/decelerate towards the new reference along a ramp. The acceleration and deceleration ramps are defined by parameters 75.26 Master speed acc and 75.27 Master speed dec respectively. The ramping will end when the new reference is reached.


Frequency

Flow demand

Drive status

Master FollowerDrive 1

Stopped Master FollowerDrive 2

Stopped MasterDrive 3

Drive 1

Driv

e 2

Driv

e 3

246 Parameters

75.04 Follower ref Only visible when Multipump is selected at parameter 75.01 Operation mode.Defines the reference used when parameter 75.03 Follower mode is set to Const speed, and the drive is running as a follower.The following diagram illustrates the starting of the drives in a typical multipump configuration as the reference (flow demand) first increases, then decreases. Follower start and stop delays (parameters 75.19 Start delay and 75.20 Stop delay) are ignored in this presentation.

0…32767 rpm Reference setting. This should generally be set at the optimal operating point of the pump.

1 = 1 rpm


Time

Time

75.04 Follower ref

75.05 Start speed 1

Drive 1

Speed

Status (M = Master; F = Follower; S = Stopped)M F

75.04 Follower ref

75.06 Start speed 2

Drive 2

Speed

Status (M = Master; F = Follower; S = Stopped)F (S) M F

Drive 3

Speed

Status (M = Master; F = Follower; S = Stopped)F (S) M

Time

Time

75.13 Stop speed 2

75.12 Stop speed 1

F (S)

M F (S)

Reference

M

Parameters 247

75.05 Start speed 1 Defines the start speed for auxiliary pump 1.When the speed of the pump connected directly to the drive exceeds this value and no auxiliary pumps are running, the start delay counter (see parameter 75.19 Start delay) is started. If the speed is still at the same level or higher when the delay elapses, the first auxiliary pump starts.The running speed of the drive is decreased by Start speed 1 - Stop speed 1 after the auxiliary pump starts.


75.05

Increasing flow

Speed

Time

Stop

Start

Decreasing flowA

ux. p

ump

1 St

op/S

tart

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Min. speed

Max. speed

75.12

75.19

75.21

75.20

75.22

248 Parameters

The following diagram shows the order of some common speeds in a pump application.

0…32767 rpm Start speed for auxiliary pump 1. 1 = 1 rpm

75.06 Start speed 2 Defines the start speed for auxiliary pump 2. See parameter 75.05 Start speed 1.













0 rpm

27.19 PID minimum

77.03 Sleep level

75.12 Stop speed 1 (Stop speed of auxiliary pump 1)

Speed

75.05 Start speed 1 (Start speed of auxiliary pump 1)20.01 Maximum speed

20.02 Minimum speed

(Negative speeds only used by the pump cleaning function (82.03)

Parameters 249

75.12 Stop speed 1 Defines the stop speed for auxiliary pump 1.When the speed of the pump connected directly to the drive falls below this value and one auxiliary pump is running, the stop delay counter (see parameter 75.20 Stop delay) is started. If the speed is still at the same level or lower when the delay elapses, the first auxiliary pump stops.The running speed of the drive is increased by Start speed 1 - Stop speed 1 after the auxiliary pump stops.See also parameter 75.05 Start speed 1.

0…32767 rpm Stop speed for auxiliary pump 1. 1 = 1 rpm

75.13 Stop speed 2 Defines the stop speed for auxiliary pump 2. See parameter 75.12 Stop speed 1.












75.19 Start delay Defines a start delay for auxiliary pumps. See parameter 75.05 Start speed 1.

0…12600 s Start delay. 1 = 1 s

75.20 Stop delay Defines a stop delay for auxiliary pumps. See parameter 75.05 Start speed 1.

0…12600 s Stop delay. 1 = 1 s

75.21 Speed hold on See diagram at parameter 75.05 Start speed 1.

0…100 s Speed hold time for auxiliary pump switch-on. 1 = 1 s

75.22 Speed hold off See diagram at parameter 75.05 Start speed 1.

0…100 s Speed hold time for auxiliary pump switch-off. 1 = 1 s

75.23 Min pumps allow Defines the minimum number of pumps that will run simultaneously.Note: The pumps that are kept running will ignore the stop speeds defined for them by other parameters in this group.

0…8 Minimum number of pumps. 1 = 1

75.24 Max pumps allow Defines the maximum number of pumps that can be run simultaneously.

0…8 Maximum number of pumps. 1 = 1


250 Parameters

75.25 Drive start dly Start delay for the pump that is directly controlled by the drive. This does not affect the starting of the auxiliary pumps.

WARNING! There must always be a delay set if the pumps are equipped with star-delta starters. The delay must be set longer than the time setting of the

starter. After the pump is switched on by the relay output of the drive, there must be enough time for the star-delta starter to first switch to star and then back to delta before the pump is connected to the drive.

0…600 s Start delay for drive-controlled pump. 1 = 1 s

75.26 Master speed acc Defines the acceleration time in case the latest reference received by the drive is higher than the previous reference. This is likely to happen when the master status is passed on from one drive to another. The parameter sets the ramp-up time as seconds from zero to maximum frequency (not from previous reference to new reference).The parameter is effective only in the Copy of mstr and Master speed follower modes. See parameter 75.03 Follower mode.

0…1800 s Acceleration time. 1 = 1 s

75.27 Master speed dec Defines the acceleration time in case the latest reference received by the drive is lower than the previous reference. This is likely to happen when the master status is passed on from one drive to another. The parameter sets the ramp-down time as seconds from maximum frequency to zero (not from previous reference to new reference).The parameter is effective only in the Copy of mstr and Master speed follower modes. See parameter 75.03 Follower mode.

0…1800 s Deceleration time. 1 = 1 s

7676 MF communication Communication configuration for applications consisting of

multiple pumps with dedicated drives.

76.01 Enable MF comm Enables/disables drive-to-drive communication through the D2D link.Note: Drive-to-drive communication can only be enabled if the embedded fieldbus interface is disabled (parameter 58.01 Protocol ena sel is set to Disabled).

No Drive-to-drive communication disabled. 0

Yes Drive-to-drive communication enabled. 1

76.02 Pump node Node number of the drive on the drive-to-drive link.Notes:• Each drive on the link must have a unique node number.• If the drive is not given a priority class, the node number is

also used in determining the starting order of pumps.

0…8 Node number. 1 = 1

76.03 Master enable Determines (or defines a source that determines) if the drive is allowed to be master on the drive-to-drive link.

No The drive can only be a follower on the drive-to-drive link. 0

Yes The drive is allowed to be master on the drive-to-drive link. 1


-

Pointer


Parameters 251

76.04 Pump prior sel Defines a source that chooses a start priority for the drive. Two preset priorities are available: either can be selected permanently, or a digital signal source used to switch between the two presets.Please note that the Autochange feature will attempt to equalize the duty between drives with the same priority rather than between drives with different priorities.With a digital source,0 = priority defined by 76.05 Prior choice 11 = priority defined by 76.06 Prior choice 2.

Choice 1 Start priority defined by parameter 76.05 Prior choice 1. 0

Choice 2 Start priority defined by parameter 76.06 Prior choice 2. 1







-

Pointer

76.05 Prior choice 1 Priority preset 1. See parameter 76.04 Pump prior sel.

1…4 Priority preset 1. 1 = 1

76.06 Prior choice 2 Priority preset 2. See parameter 76.04 Pump prior sel.

1…4 Priority preset 2. 1 = 1

76.07 Mstr loss action If the drive is a follower, cannot find a master on the drive-to-drive link, and is not itself allowed to be master, it will wait for the delay specified by parameter 76.08 Mstr loss delay, then proceed as defined by this parameter. The drive will also generate an alarm.

Const speed The drive continues running and adopts the speed defined by parameter 26.08 Const speed3.

0

Last speed The drive continues running at the last valid reference received from the master.

1

76.08 Mstr loss delay Delay for a master loss situation. See parameter 76.07 Mstr loss action.

0…3600 s Delay for master loss. 1 = 1 s


252 Parameters

76.09 Start order corr Whenever the application requires more pumping volume, additional drives are started. The starting order is dependent on the priority setting of the drive (parameters 76.04…76.06). Whenever several drives have the same priority, the one with the lowest node number (parameter 76.02) is started first by default.The Autochange function can be used to automatically rotate the starting order within each priority group. Drives running before the Autochange may continue to run so that the new starting order cannot be applied immediately; this parameter defines the method with which the drive order of priority is corrected.Example:One pump is running. If necessary, additional pumps are started in the following order:

While there is constant flow demand (and a pump must be running), the Autochange function is activated, rotating the starting order within each priority. After Autochange, the order is as follows:

The desired order, however, is this:

The selections of this parameter define how the desired order is achieved.

Optimal Drive order of priority is corrected only when the number of drives needs to be increased or decreased by the master as required by the process.

0

Instant chng Drive order of priority is corrected as soon as a new starting order is generated, for example when the Autochange conditions are met. The order is corrected by stopping low-priority drives. Higher-priority drives are then started as required by the process.

1

76.10 Master location Defines whether the master status is passed on with each started drive or not.

Stable The first drive started will remain the master as long as possible, until, for example, the drive is no longer allowed to be master (by parameter 76.03 Master enable), or the drive trips on a fault.

0


ID: 1Priority: 1

ID: 2Priority: 1

ID: 3Priority: 2

ID: 4Priority: 2+ + +

Running

Flow demand

ID: 2Priority: 1

ID: 1Priority: 1

ID: 4Priority: 2


Running

Flow demand

ID: 2Priority: 1

ID: 1Priority: 1

ID: 4Priority: 2


Flow demand

Running

Parameters 253

In start The drive that was started last, and is allowed to be master by parameter 76.03 Master enable, is the master.

1

76.11 Shared IO enable Determines whether shared signals broadcast on the drive-to-drive link (if any) are received by the drive.

No Shared signals not received. 0

Yes Shared signals received. The signals received are shown by parameters 02.43 Shared signal 1 and 02.44 Shared signal 2.

1

76.12 Set as source Determines whether the drive broadcasts shared signals on the drive-to-drive link or not.

No The drive does not broadcast shared signals. 0

Yes The drive broadcasts the signals selected by parameters 76.13 Shared signal 1 and 76.14 Shared signal 2 as shared signals on the drive-to-drive link.

1


-

Pointer

76.13 Shared signal 1 Selects a signal to be broadcast as shared signal 1 on the drive-to-drive link.



Proc act 04.01 Act val (see page 123). 1073742849


-

76.14 Shared signal 2 Selects a signal to be broadcast as shared signal 2 on the drive-to-drive link.



Setpoint 04.02 Setpoint (see page 123). 1073742850


-

76.15 Share lost actn Defines the action taken by the drive if no shared signals are received for the time defined by parameter 76.16 Share lost delay. (This parameter is only effective if parameter 76.11 Shared IO enable is set to Yes.)

Alarm The drive generates an alarm, MF NO SHARED DATA. 0

Fault The drive trips on a fault, MF NO SHARED DATA. 1

Const speed The drive continues running and adopts the speed defined by parameter 26.08 Const speed3.

2

Last speed The drive continues running at the last valid reference received from the master.

3

76.16 Share lost delay Delay for a shared signal loss situation. See parameter 76.15 Share lost actn.

0…3600 s Delay for shared signal loss. 1 = 1 s


254 Parameters

7777 Pump sleep Sleep function settings.

See also section Sleep function on page 59.

77.01 Sleep mode sel Enables/disables the sleep function.

Not used Sleep function disabled. 0

Internal The signal selected by parameter 77.02 Sleep int sel is compared to the value of 77.03 Sleep level. If the signal remains below this value longer than the sleep delay (77.04 Sleep delay), the drive shifts to sleep mode.The sleep and wake-up delays (77.04 Sleep delay and 77.11 Wake up delay) are in force.

1

External The sleep function is activated by the source selected by parameter 77.05 Sleep ext sel.The sleep delay (77.04 Sleep delay) is not in force but the wake-up delay (77.11 Wake up delay) is.

2

Int+ext When the source selected by parameter 77.05 Sleep ext sel is “1”, the sleep function works as with the setting Internal. When the source selected by parameter 77.05 Sleep ext sel is “0”, the sleep function is disabled.

3

Soft ext When the source selected by parameter 77.05 Sleep ext sel is “0”, the sleep function is disabled.When the source selected by parameter 77.05 Sleep ext sel is “1”, the input of the PID controller is set to 0. After the drive enters sleep mode, it will not wake up until the signal returns to “0”.

4

77.02 Sleep int sel Selects the internal signal to be monitored by the sleep function when parameter 77.01 Sleep mode sel is set to Internal, Int+ext or Soft ext.

Speed 01.01 Motor speed rpm (see page 112). 1073742081


AI1 02.04 AI1 (see page 113). 1073742340


AI2 02.06 AI2 (see page 113). 1073742342





-

77.03 Sleep level Defines the start limit for the sleep function when parameter 77.01 Sleep mode sel is set to Internal, Int+ext or Soft ext.

-32768.00 … 32768.00

Sleep start level. 100 = 1

77.04 Sleep delay Defines the delay for the sleep start function. See parameter 77.03 Sleep level. When the monitored signal falls below the sleep level, the counter starts. When the signal exceeds the sleep level, the counter resets.

0 … 12600 s Sleep start delay. 1 = 1 s


Parameters 255

77.05 Sleep ext sel Defines a source that is used by parameter 77.01 Sleep mode sel, selections External, Int+ext and Soft ext. See the descriptions of those selections for the usage of this signal source.

Not used No source selected. 0







-

Pointer

77.06 Sleep boost step When the drive is entering sleep mode, the setpoint is increased by this percentage for the time defined by parameter 77.07 Sleep boost time.No auxiliary pumps are started. If active, sleep boost is aborted when the drive wakes up. See the diagram in section Sleep function (starting page 59).

0.00 … 32767.00 % Sleep boost step. 100 = 1%

77.07 Sleep boost time Sets the boost time for the sleep boost step defined by parameter 77.06 Sleep boost step.

0…100 s Sleep boost time. 1 = 1 s

77.08 Wake up mode sel Selects the signal that is compared to the wake up level 77.10 Wake up level, and the condition that must be true for the drive to wake up.If the selected condition does not remain true until the wake-up delay (77.11 Wake up delay) expires, the delay counter is reset.

Wake > ref If the process actual value (see group 28 Procact sel) remains below the process setpoint (see group 29 Setpoint sel) multiplied by the wake-up level for longer than the wake-up delay (77.11 Wake up delay), the drive wakes up. See the diagram below.

0


Process setpoint × Wake-up level (77.10) / 100

Process actual valueWake-up delay (77.11)

Time

SLEEPING

256 Parameters

Wake < ref If the process actual value (see group 28 Procact sel) remains above the process setpoint (see group 29 Setpoint sel) multiplied by the wake-up level for longer than the wake-up delay (77.11 Wake up delay), the drive wakes up. See the diagram below.

1

Wake > ext If the signal selected by parameter 77.09 Wake up ext src remains below the wake-up level (77.10 Wake up level) longer than the wake-up delay (77.11 Wake up delay), the drive wakes up.

2

Wake < ext If the signal selected by parameter 77.09 Wake up ext src remains above the wake-up level (77.10 Wake up level) longer than the wake-up delay (77.11 Wake up delay), the drive wakes up.

3

77.09 Wake up ext src Selects the signal source for parameter 77.09 Wake up ext src, selections Wake > ext and Wake < ext.

AI1 02.04 AI1 (see page 113). 1073742340


AI2 02.06 AI2 (see page 113). 1073742342




Process setpoint × Wake-up level (77.10) / 100

Process actual value


Time

SLEEPING


Signal selected by 77.09Wake-up delay (77.11)

Time

SLEEPING


Signal selected by 77.09


Time

SLEEPING

Parameters 257



-

77.10 Wake up level Defines the wake-up limit for the sleep function. See the selections of parameter 77.08 Wake up mode sel.

-32768.00 … 32767.00

Wake-up level. 100 = 1

77.11 Wake up delay Defines the wake-up delay for the sleep function. See the selections of parameter 77.08 Wake up mode sel.

0 … 100 s Wake-up delay. 1 = 1 s

7878 Pump autochange Pump Autochange and interlock settings.

See also section Autochange page 61.

78.01 Autochg style Selects whether the Autochange function is used.

No Autochange disabled. The drive with the lowest node number is started first.

0

Fixed Autochange will occur at intervals defined by parameter 78.05 Autochg interval provided that the drive speed is below the value defined by parameter 78.04 Autochg level.Note: The timing is based on drive power-on time (rather than drive running time).

1

Hourcount The pumping duty is distributed among the pumps according to parameters 04.28 Pump runtime, 78.14 Runtime change and 78.15 Runtime diff.

2

All stop Autochange will occur when all the pumps are stopped. 3

78.02 Autochg trad Selects whether only auxiliary pumps or all pumps are affected by the Autochange function.This parameter is only valid in traditional pump control.

All All pumps are affected by the Autochange function. 0

Aux Only auxiliary (direct-on-line) pumps are affected by the Autochange function.

1


258 Parameters

78.03 Interlock mode Defines whether interlocks are used or not. This parameter is only valid in traditional pump control.

WARNING! Use of the Autochange function also requires the use of interlocks.Interlocks are used in applications where one pump

at a time is connected to the output of the drive. The remaining pumps are powered from the supply and started/stopped by the relay outputs of the drive.A contact of the manual on/off switch (or protective device, such as a thermal relay) of each pump is wired to the selected interlock input. The logic will detect if the pump is unavailable and start the next available pump instead.The interlock inputs are defined by parameters 78.06…78.13.If the interlock circuit of the speed-regulated pump (the pump connected to the drive output) is switched off, the pump is stopped and all relay outputs are de-energized. Then the drive will restart. The next available pump in the Autochange sequence will be started as the regulated pump.If the interlock circuit of a direct-on-line pump is switched off, the drive will not try to start that pump until the interlock circuit is switched on again. The other pumps will operate normally.

Not used Interlocks not used. 0

On Interlocks in use. 1


Parameters 259

78.04 Autochg level Speed limit for the Autochange function when parameter 78.01 Autochg style is set to Fixed.This parameter is only valid in traditional pump control. The pump starting sequence is changed when the Autochange interval has elapsed and the drive speed is below this limit. Autochanging is indicated by a warning on the control panel display.Notes:• The value of this parameter must be within the allowed

range (between minimum and maximum limits). Otherwise no Autochanging is possible.

• When the drive is powered off, the values of the starting sequence counter and the Autochange interval counter are stored. The counters will continue from these values after the drive is powered on.

Example: There are three pumps in a system (parameter 75.02 Nbr of pumps is set to 3). Autochange level is set to 1500 rpm.An Autochange occurs when the drive speed is below 1500 rpm, and the Autochange interval has elapsed since the previous Autochange. Upon the Autochange,1. All pumps are stopped2. The starting sequence is incremented (from 1-2-3 to

2-3-1, etc.)3. The contactor that controls the speed-regulated pump is

closed4. The delay set by parameter 75.25 Drive start dly passes5. The speed-regulated pump is energized and normal

operation starts.If the Autochange level is 0 rpm and the interval has elapsed, Autochange will occur during a stop (for example, when the Sleep function is active).

0…32767 rpm Autochange level. 1 = 1 rpm

78.05 Autochg interval Specifies the Autochange interval. See parameter 78.04 Autochg level.

0.00 … 1092.25 h Autochange interval. 100 = 1 h

78.06 Interlock pump 1 Selects the input (or signal) for status of pump 1.When the input is 1, the drive assumes the pump is in use and can be started.

Not used The interlock is off, meaning that the pump is not in use. 0

On The interlock is on, meaning that the pump is ready for use. 1







-

Pointer




260 Parameters








-

Pointer










-

Pointer










-

Pointer










Parameters 261


-

Pointer










-

Pointer










-

Pointer










-

Pointer

78.14 Runtime change Enables the reset, or arbitrary setting, of 04.28 Pump runtime.

No The parameter automatically reverts to this value. 0

Set Enables the setting of 04.28 Pump runtime to an arbitrary value.

1


262 Parameters

Reset Resets parameter 04.28 Pump runtime. 2

78.15 Runtime diff Maximum pump runtime difference between drives. The control program will compare the value of the runtime counter (parameter 04.28 Pump runtime) in each drive and attempt to keep the difference below this value.

0 … 2147483647 h Maximum runtime difference between drives. 100 = 1 h

7979 Level control Settings for level control applications.

See also section Level control macro (page 102).

79.01 Level mode Defines whether the pump station is used for emptying or filling a container.

Off Level control disabled. 0


Parameters 263

Emptying The pump station is used for emptying a container.The diagram below shows the start, stop and supervision levels for emptying. For simplicity, only three pumps are shown. Parameter 79.02 Stopping mode is assumed to be set to Common stop; 79.16 Start stop delay is assumed to be set to 0.00 seconds.

1


Time

79.05 Stop level

79.06 Start 1 level

79.07 Start 2 level

79.03 Low level

79.08 Start 3 level

79.14 High level

Time

79.18 Normal speed

79.19 High speed

FrequencyPump 3

Time

FrequencyPump 1

Time

FrequencyPump 2

79.18 Normal speed

79.19 High speed

79.18 Normal speed

79.19 High speed

Level (process actual value)

264 Parameters

Filling The pump station is used for filling a container.The diagram below shows the start, stop and supervision levels for filling. For simplicity, only three pumps are shown. Parameter 79.02 Stopping mode is assumed to be set to Common stop; 79.16 Start stop delay is assumed to be set to 0.00 seconds.

2


Time

79.08 Start 3 level

79.07 Start 2 level

79.06 Start 1 level

Level (process actual value)

79.05 Stop level

Time

79.18 Normal speed

79.19 High speed

FrequencyPump 3

Time

FrequencyPump 1

Time

FrequencyPump 2

79.18 Normal speed

79.19 High speed

79.18 Normal speed

79.19 High speed

79.03 Low level

Parameters 265

79.02 Stopping mode Selects whether the pumps are stopped simultaneously or individually.

Stable level When the start level of a pump (parameters 79.06 Start 1 level…79.13 Start 8 level) is reached, the master drive waits for the level delay (parameter 79.16 Start stop delay) to elapse, then stops the pump.

0

Common stop All the pumps running will continue to run until the stop level (parameter 79.05 Stop level) is reached. All pumps will then be stopped one by one at intervals defined by parameter 79.16 Start stop delay.

1

79.03 Low level Defines the low level for level control.In emptying mode, when the measured level falls below the low level, all pumps stop (if not stopped already).In filling mode, when the measured level falls below the low level, all pumps start running at the speed defined by parameter 79.19 High speed.See the diagrams at parameter 79.01 Level mode.

0.00 … 32768.00% Low level. TBA

79.04 Low switch Selects a digital source that is used to determine that the liquid level in the container has fallen very low. When the source becomes active (1), an alarm, LC TANK EMPTY is given. The alarm is cleared when the source switches off.

Not used No low switch used. 0







-

Pointer

79.05 Stop level Defines the stop level for the pump station.If parameter 79.02 Stopping mode is set to Stable level, pumps 3 and 2, for example, are stopped when 79.08 Start 3 level and 79.07 Start 2 level are reached respectively; pump 1 is stopped at the stop level.If parameter 79.02 Stopping mode is set to Common stop, all pumps will continue to run until the stop level is reached.See the diagrams at parameter 79.01 Level mode.

0.00 … 32768.00% Stop level. TBA

79.06 Start 1 level Defines the start level for pump 1. See the diagrams at parameter 79.01 Level mode.

0.00 … 32768.00% Start level for pump 1. TBA

79.07 Start 2 level Defines the start level for pump 2. This is also the stop level for the pump unless Common stop is selected at parameter 79.02 Stopping mode. See the diagrams at parameter 79.01 Level mode.



266 Parameters













79.14 High level In emptying mode, when the measured level exceeds this value, all pumps start running at the speed defined by parameter 79.19 High speed.In filling mode, when the measured level exceeds this value, all pumps stop (if not stopped already).

0.00 … 32768.00% High level. TBA

79.15 High switch Selects a digital source that is used to determine that the liquid level in the container has risen very high. When the source switches on, an alarm, LC TANK FULL is given. The alarm is cleared when the source switches off.

Not used No high switch used. 0







-

Pointer


Parameters 267

79.16 Start stop delay Sets a delay for stopping and starting a pump (or pumps). Whenever a start or stop level is reached, this delay must elapse before any action is taken.

0 … 3600 s Start/stop delay. 1 = 1 s

79.17 Random coef Randomizes the start levels (parameters 79.06…79.13) to avoid caking on the walls of the container. For example, with this parameter set to 10.0%, the actual start level is randomized in the range of(start level - 10%) … (start level + 10%).

0.0 … 10.0% Random coefficient. TBA

79.18 Normal speed In emptying mode, defines the pump speed when the measured level is below the high level setting (parameter 79.14), and the high switch (parameter 79.15) is not active.In filling mode, defines the pump speed when the measured level is above the low level setting (parameter 79.03), and low switch (parameter 79.04) is not active.Ideally, this parameter should be set at the optimal operating point of the pump.

0.0…32767.0 rpm Normal running speed. TBA

79.19 High speed In emptying mode, defines the pump speed when the measured level exceeds the level defined by parameter 79.14 High level, or when the high limit switch (parameter 79.15) is active.In filling mode, sets the pump speed when the measured level falls below the level defined by parameter 79.03 Low level, or when the low limit switch (parameter 79.04) is active.See the diagrams at parameter 79.01 Level mode.

0.0…32767.0 rpm High running speed. TBA

8080 Flow calculation Settings for the flow calculation function.

See also section Flow calculation on page 62.

80.01 Flow calc mode Enables the flow calculation function, and determines whether a PQ (power/flow) curve or HQ (head/flow) curve is used for the calculation. The curves are defined by parameters 80.04…80.23.

Not used Flow calculation not used. 0

PQ curve The PQ curve is used for flow calculation. 1

HQ curve The HQ curve is used for flow calculation. 2

Both Both the HQ and PQ curves are used for flow calculation. The transition point between the curves is set by parameter 80.24 HQ PQ brk point.

3

80.02 Pump inlet sel Selects the analog input (or other signal source) used for pump inlet pressure measurement.

Zero No input selected (no pressure sensor available). 0







268 Parameters


-

80.03 Pump outlet sel Selects the analog input (or other signal source) used for pump outlet pressure measurement.

Zero No input selected (no pressure sensor available). 0







-

80.04 HQ curve Q1 Flow rate (in cubic meters per hour) at point 1 of the HQ performance curve.Parameters 80.04…80.13 define the HQ performance curve of the pump for the flow calculation function. The H (head, or level) and Q (flow rate) coordinates of five points on the curve are entered. The values are provided by the pump manufacturer. All points defined should lie within the practical operating range of the pump.Below is an example of an HQ performance curve. The defining parameters of the first and last points are shown.

0.00 … 32767.00 m3/h

Flow rate at point 1 of the HQ curve. 100 = 1 m3/h

80.05 HQ curve H1 Head (in meters) at point 1 of the HQ performance curve.

0.00 … 32767.00 m Head at point 1 of the HQ curve. 100 = 1 m

80.06 HQ curve Q2 Flow rate (in cubic meters per hour) at point 2 of the HQ performance curve.

0.00 … 32767.00 m3/h



H [m]

Q [m3/h]

80.05

80.13

2

4

5 3

1

80.0480.12

Parameters 269




0.00 … 32767.00 m3/h





0.00 … 32767.00 m3/h





0.00 … 32767.00 m3/h




80.14 PQ curve P1 Power input (in kilowatts) of pump at point 1 on the PQ performance curve.Parameters 80.14…80.23 define the PQ performance curve of the pump for the flow calculation function. The P (power input) and Q (flow rate) coordinates of five points on the curve are entered. The values are provided by the pump manufacturer. All points defined should lie within the practical operating range of the pump.Below is an example of an PQ performance curve. The defining parameters of the first and last points are shown.

0.00 … 32767.00 kW

Power input of pump at point 1. 100 = 1 kW


P [kW]

Q [m3/h]

80.14

80.22

2

45

3

1

80.2380.15

270 Parameters

80.15 PQ curve Q1 Flow rate (in cubic meters per hour) at point 1 on the PQ performance curve.

0.00 … 32767.00 m3/h

Flow rate at point 1 of the PQ curve. 100 = 1 m3/h

80.16 PQ curve P2 Power input (in kilowatts) of pump at point 2 on the PQ performance curve.

0.00 … 32767.00 kW



0.00 … 32767.00 m3/h



0.00 … 32767.00 kW



0.00 … 32767.00 m3/h



0.00 … 32767.00 kW



0.00 … 32767.00 m3/h



0.00 … 32767.00 kW



0.00 … 32767.00 m3/h


80.24 HQ PQ brk point Sets the transition point between the HQ and PQ performance curves. The PQ curve is used above this breakpoint.

0.00 … 32767.00 m Head breakpoint between HQ and PQ curves. 100 = 1 m

80.25 Pump inlet diam The diameter of the pump inlet in meters.

0.00 … 32767.00 m Pump inlet diameter. 100 = 1 m

80.26 Pump outlet diam The diameter of the pump outlet in meters.

0.00 … 32767.00 m Pump outlet diameter. 100 = 1 m

80.27 Sensors hgt diff Defines the height difference between the inlet and outlet pressure sensors.

0.00 … 32767.00 m Height difference. 100 = 1 m


Parameters 271

80.28 Pump nom speed Defines the nominal speed of the pump in rpm.

0…32767 rpm Nominal speed of pump. 1 = 1 rpm

80.29 Density Defines the density of the fluid to be pumped for the flow calculation function.

0.00 … 32767.00 kg/m3

Fluid density. 100 = 1 kg/m3

80.30 Efficiency Total efficiency of the motor/pump combination.

0.00 … 100.00% Efficiency. 100 = 1%

80.31 Flow calc gain Flow calculation gain for possible calculation correction.

0.00 … 32767.00 Calculation correction gain. 100 = 1

80.32 Calc low sp Defines a speed limit below which flow is not calculated.

0…32767 rpm Low speed limit for flow calculation. 1 = 1 rpm

80.33 Sum flow reset Resets the total calculated flow counter (parameter 05.08).

No No reset. 0

Reset Reset the counter. 1

8181 Pump protection Settings for pump protection functions.

See also section Protective functions on page 64.

81.01 Inlet prot ctrl Enables the primary supervision of pump inlet pressure and selects the action taken when low inlet pressure is detected. The selected action is taken only after the measured pressure has remained below the pressure limit (81.03 AI in low level) for longer than the value of parameter 81.07 Inlet ctrl dly.The pressure can be measured using an analog pressure sensor or a pressure switch.The input for an analog sensor is defined by parameter 81.02 AI measure inlet. With an analog sensor, a separate action for “very low inlet pressure” can be defined using parameter 81.05 AI in very low.The input for a pressure switch is defined by parameter 81.06 DI status inlet.

Not used Primary inlet pressure supervision not used. 0

Alarm Detection of low inlet pressure produces an alarm after the delay defined by parameter 81.07 Inlet ctrl dly expires.

1

Fault Detection of low inlet pressure trips the drive after the delay defined by parameter 81.07 Inlet ctrl dly expires.

2


272 Parameters

Protect Detection of low inlet pressure produces an alarm after the delay defined by parameter 81.07 Inlet ctrl dly expires. The pump speed is reduced to the speed defined by 81.08 Inlet forced ref.

3

81.02 AI measure inlet Selects the analog input (or signal source) for pump inlet pressure measurement.







-

81.03 AI in low level Pressure limit for primary inlet pressure supervision. See parameter 81.01 Inlet prot ctrl.

0.00 … 32767.00 bar

Pressure limit. 100 = 1 bar


Measured inlet pressure

Time

81.05 AI in very low

81.03 AI in low level

81.07 Inlet ctrl dly

Speed reference

81.08 Inlet forced ref

Time

08.21 Pump alarm word, bit 20

1

06.20 Pump status word, bit 16

0

1

Time

Time08.21 Pump alarm word, bit 4

0

1

Time

Parameters 273

81.04 Very low ctrl Enables the secondary supervision of pump inlet pressure, and selects the action taken after very low inlet pressure is detected. The selected action is taken only after the measured pressure has remained below the pressure limit (81.05 AI in very low) for longer than the value of parameter 81.07 Inlet ctrl dly. See the diagram at parameter 81.01 Inlet prot ctrl.Note: With a pressure switch, this parameter has no effect.

Not sel Secondary inlet pressure supervision not used. 0

Fault Detection of very low inlet pressure trips the drive. 1

Stop Detection of very low inlet pressure stops the drive. The drive will restart if the pressure rises above the limit.

2

81.05 AI in very low Pressure limit for secondary inlet pressure supervision. See parameter 81.04 Very low ctrl.

0.00 … 32767.00 bar


81.06 DI status inlet Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch at the pump inlet. The “normal” state is 1. If the selected input switches to 0, the action defined by parameter 81.01 Inlet prot ctrl is taken after the delay set by parameter 81.07 Inlet ctrl dly expires.

Not used No pressure switch connected. 1







-

Pointer

81.07 Inlet ctrl dly Delay for primary and secondary supervision of pump inlet pressure. See parameter 81.01 Inlet prot ctrl.

0…600 s Delay. 1 = 1 s

81.08 Inlet forced ref Pump speed reference for parameter 81.01 Inlet prot ctrl, selection Protect.

0.0 … 32767.0 rpm Speed reference. 10 = 1 rpm

81.09 Outlet prot ctrl Enables the primary supervision of pump outlet pressure and selects the action taken when high outlet pressure is detected. The selected action is taken only after the measured pressure has remained above the pressure limit (81.11 AI out hi level) for longer than the value of parameter 81.15 Outlet ctr dly.The pressure can be measured using an analog pressure sensor or a pressure switch.The input for an analog sensor is defined by parameter 81.10 AI meas outlet. With an analog sensor, a separate action for “very high outlet pressure” can be defined using parameter 81.13 AI out very high.The input for a pressure switch is defined by parameter 81.14 DI status outlet.

Not used Primary outlet pressure supervision not used. 0


274 Parameters

Alarm Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm after the delay defined by parameter 81.15 Outlet ctr dly expires.

1

Fault Detection of high outlet pressure trips the drive after the delay defined by parameter 81.15 Outlet ctr dly expires.

2

Protect Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm after the delay defined by parameter 81.15 Outlet ctr dly expires. The pump speed is reduced to the speed defined by 81.16 Outlet force ref within the time defined by parameter 81.17 Protect dec time.

3

81.10 AI meas outlet Selects the analog input (or signal source) for pump outlet pressure measurement.







-


Measured outlet pressure

Time

81.11 AI out hi level

81.13 AI out very high

81.15 Outlet ctr dly

Speed reference

81.16 Outlet force ref

Time

08.21 Pump alarm word, bit 30

1

06.20 Pump status word, bit 15

0

1

Time

Time08.21 Pump alarm word, bit 5

0

1

Time

81.17 Protect dec time

Parameters 275

81.11 AI out hi level Pressure limit for primary outlet pressure supervision. See parameter 81.09 Outlet prot ctrl.

0.00 … 32767.00 bar


81.12 Very high ctrl Enables the secondary supervision of pump outlet pressure and selects the action taken when very high outlet pressure is detected. The selected action is taken only after the measured pressure has remained above the pressure limit (81.13 AI out very high) for longer than the value of parameter 81.15 Outlet ctr dly. See the diagram at parameter 81.09 Outlet prot ctrl.Note: With a pressure switch, this parameter has no effect.

Not sel Secondary outlet pressure supervision not used. 0

Fault Detection of very high outlet pressure trips the drive. 1

Stop Detection of very high outlet pressure stops the drive. The drive will restart if the pressure falls below the limit.

2

81.13 AI out very high Pressure limit for secondary outlet pressure supervision. See parameter 81.12 Very high ctrl.

0.00 … 32767.00 bar


81.14 DI status outlet Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch at the pump outlet. The “normal” state is 1. If the selected input switches to 0, the action defined by parameter 81.09 Outlet prot ctrl is taken after the delay set by parameter 81.15 Outlet ctr dly expires.

Not used No pressure switch connected. 1074070017







-

Pointer

81.15 Outlet ctr dly Delay for primary and secondary supervision of pump outlet pressure. See parameter 81.09 Outlet prot ctrl.

0…600 s Delay. 1 = 1 s

81.16 Outlet force ref Pump speed reference for parameter 81.09 Outlet prot ctrl, selection Protect.

0.0 … 32767.0 rpm Speed reference. 10 = 1 rpm

81.17 Protect dec time PID controller ramp-down time for parameter 81.09 Outlet prot ctrl, selection Protect.

0…18000 s PID controller ramp-down time for outlet pressure supervision.

1 = 1 s

81.18 Flow source sel Selects an source for flow measurement for minimum/maximum flow protection. See parameters 81.19 Flow max prot and 81.21 Flow min prot.




276 Parameters




Flow act Calculated flow as indicated by 05.05 Flow act (see page 125).

1073743109


-

81.19 Flow max prot Defines the action to be taken if the flow (signal selected by parameter 81.18 Flow source sel) remains above the limit set by parameter 81.20 Flow max level for longer than the time set by parameter 81.23 Flow ctrl delay.

Not sel Maximum flow protection disabled. 0

Alarm The drive generates alarm MAX FLOW. 1

Fault The drive trips on fault MAX FLOW. 2

81.20 Flow max level Defines the maximum flow limit. See parameter 81.19 Flow max prot.

0.00 … 32767.00 m3/s

Maximum flow. 100 = 1 m3/s

81.21 Flow min prot Defines the action to be taken if the flow (signal selected by parameter 81.18 Flow source sel) remains below the limit set by parameter 81.22 Flow min level for longer than the time set by parameter 81.23 Flow ctrl delay.See also parameter 81.24 Flow check delay.

Not sel Minimum flow protection disabled. 0

Alarm The drive generates alarm MIN FLOW. 1

Fault The drive trips on fault MIN FLOW. 2

81.22 Flow min level Defines the minimum flow limit. See parameter 81.21 Flow min prot.

0.00 … 32767.00 m3/s

Minimum flow. 100 = 1 m3/s

81.23 Flow ctrl delay Specifies a delay for minimum/maximum flow protection. See parameters 81.19 Flow max prot and 81.21 Flow min prot.

0…12600 s Delay for minimum/maximum flow protection. 1 = 1 s

81.24 Flow check delay After starting the drive, defines a period during which the minimum flow protection is disabled so that normal flow can be reached.

0…12600 s Start delay for minimum flow protection. 1 = 1 s

81.25 Appl prot ctrl Enables/disables the Application profile protection function, based on long-term monitoring of an internal signal. If the selected signal exceeds (and remains above) the supervision limit longer than the delay set by parameter 81.27 Prof limit dly, the alarm PROFILE HIGH is generated and 08.21 Pump alarm word bit 6 set to 1.

Not used Application profile protection disabled. 0

PID error Signal 04.04 Process PID err compared to value of parameter 81.26 Prof limit.

1

PID out Signal 04.05 Process PID out compared to value of parameter 81.26 Prof limit.

2


Parameters 277

81.26 Prof limit Supervision limit for the Application profile protection.

0.00 … 32767.00 % Supervision limit. 100 = 1%

81.27 Prof limit dly Delay for the Application profile protection.

0.00 … 35791394.11 h

Delay. 100 = 1 h

81.28 Pipefill enable Enables/disables (or selects a signal source that enables/disables) the Pipefill function when the drive is started.1 = Enable Pipefill function. If the signal is removed before Pipefill is completed, Pipefill is aborted and normal PID control enabled.

Not used Pipefill function disabled. 0

Active Pipefill function enabled. 1

DI1 The status of digital input DI1 (as indicated by 02.01 DI status, bit 0) determines whether the Pipefill function is enabled or disabled.

1073742337


1073807873


1073873409


1073938945


1074004481


-

Pointer

81.29 Pipefill step Defines the speed step used for the Pipefill function, as well as the pump speed reference immediately after the Pipefill function is activated.The speed step is added to the reference after the time defined by parameter 81.31 Act change delay has elapsed and the change in process actual value defined by parameter 81.30 Req act change has not been reached.The PID controller reference ramp time is specified by parameter 27.32 Pipefill ref acc.

0…32767 rpm Speed step for the Pipefill function. 1 = 1 rpm

81.30 Req act change Defines the requested change in process actual value within the time set by parameter 81.31 Act change delay.

0.00 … 100.00% Requested change. 100 = 1%

81.31 Act change delay Defines the time that is waited after the process actual value is compared to the previous actual value.If parameter 81.30 Req act change is measured in the actual value, the speed reference stays as it is. If 81.30 Req act change is not seen in the actual value, the value of parameter 81.29 Pipefill step is added to the speed reference.

0…100 s Delay for actual value change. 1 = 1 s


278 Parameters

81.32 Pid enable dev Defines the process actual value level at which the Pipefill function is disabled and normal PID control is enabled. After the level is reached, the time defined by parameter 81.33 Pid enb dev dly is allowed to pass before normal PID control is enabled. PID reference ramps are then observed (if set).The value is given in percent of the maximum process actual value.

0.00 … 100.00% Pipefill / PID control breakpoint. 100 = 1%

81.33 Pid enb dev dly Delay for enabling PID control. See parameter 81.32 Pid enable dev.

0…12600 s PID enable delay. 1 = 1 s

81.34 Pipefill timeout Defines the maximum allowed time for the Pipefill function. If the target process actual value (parameter 81.32 Pid enable dev) is not reached within this time, the action defined by parameter 81.35 Pipefill flt ctr is taken.

0…12600 s Maximum Pipefill time. 1 = 1 s

81.35 Pipefill flt ctr Defines the action for the Pipefill timeout (parameter 81.34 Pipefill timeout).

Alarm The drive generates alarm PIPEFILL TIMEOUT. 0

Fault The drive trips on fault PIPEFILL TOUT. 1

Activate PID Normal PID control is enabled. 2

8282 Pump cleaning Settings for the pump cleaning sequence.

See also section Pump cleaning on page 63.

82.01 Pump clean trig Enables the pump cleaning sequence for the drive, and defines the triggering conditions.

WARNING! Before enabling the pump cleaning sequence, ensure it can be performed safely with the connected equipment.

Notes:• Multiple triggering conditions can exist simultaneously.• The cleaning sequence observes the speed limits defined

by parameters 20.01 Maximum speed and 20.02 Minimum speed.

• The drive must be started and its run enable signal present before the cleaning sequence can be started.


Time

Forward

Reverse

82.02

82.03

82.08…

1 2

82.17

82.05

82.16

82.04

…82.07

Parameters 279

82.02 Fwd step Forward step frequency for the cleaning sequence in percent of the value of parameter 19.01 Speed scaling.

0.0 … 100.0% Forward step frequency. 10 = 1%

82.03 Rev step Reverse step frequency for the cleaning sequence in percent of the value of parameter 19.01 Speed scaling.

0.0 … 100.0% Reverse step frequency. 10 = 1%

82.04 Off time Interval between forward and reverse steps during the cleaning sequence.

0…1000 s Interval between steps. 1 = 1 s

82.05 Fwd step time Duration of each forward step during the cleaning sequence.

0…1000 s Duration of each forward step. 1 = 1 s

82.06 Rev step time Duration of each reverse step during the cleaning sequence.

0…1000 s Duration of each reverse step. 1 = 1 s

82.07 Time trig Time between periodical cleaning sequences. See parameter 82.01 Pump clean trig, bit 3.

0.00 … 35791394.11 h

Time between cleaning sequences. 1 = 1 min

82.08 Nbr of steps Number of forward-reverse step combinations to be performed during the cleaning sequence.

0…2147483647 Number of steps. 1 = 1

82.09 Supervis source Defines a signal that triggers the cleaning sequence when it remains above the limit defined by parameter 82.10 Supervis limit for longer than the time set by parameter 82.11 Supervis delay.See also parameter 82.01 Pump clean trig, bit 4.

Current A 01.04 Motor current (see page 112). 1073742084



-

82.10 Supervis limit Defines a limit for the signal selected by parameter 82.09 Supervis source.

0.0 … 32767.0 Cleaning sequence triggering limit. 10 = 1


Bit Name Function

0 Enabled 0 = No: Cleaning sequence disabled.1 = Yes: Cleaning sequence enabled.

1 Master enb 0 = No: Cleaning sequence not allowed when the drive is master.1 = Yes: Cleaning sequence allowed when the drive is master.

2 Follower enb 0 = No: Cleaning sequence not allowed when the drive is a follower.1 = Yes: Cleaning sequence allowed when the drive is a follower.

3 Time trig 1 = Enable: Cleaning sequence starts periodically at intervals defined by parameter 82.07 Time trig.

4 Supervision1 = Enable: The cleaning sequence is started whenever the signal selected by parameter 82.09 Supervis source exceeds the value of parameter 82.10 Supervis limit.

5 At start 1 = Enable: Cleaning sequence performed on every start command.

6 Trig ptr 1 = Enable: The cleaning sequence is performed when the signal selected by parameter 82.12 Trig pointer changes to 1.

280 Parameters

82.11 Supervis delay Delay for signal triggering of the cleaning sequence. See parameter 82.09 Supervis source.

0…600 s Cleaning sequence triggering delay. 1 = 1 s

82.12 Trig pointer Cleaning sequence trigger input selection. See parameter 82.01 Pump clean trig, bit 6.

Not used No input selected. 0







-

Pointer

82.13 Clean max ctrl Defines the action taken if the maximum number of cleaning sequences (82.14 Clean max number) is exceeded within the time set by parameter 82.15 Clean max period. Forced cleanings are disregarded.

Not sel No action taken. 0

Alarm The drive generates an alarm, MAX CLEANINGS. 1

Fault The drive trips on fault MAX CLEANINGS. 2

82.14 Clean max number Defines the maximum number of cleaning sequences within the time set by parameter 82.15 Clean max period.

0…30 Maximum number of cleaning sequences. 1 = 1

82.15 Clean max period Defines the time (ending now) within which cleaning sequences are counted.

0.00 … 35791394.11 h

Time within which cleaning sequences are counted. 100 = 1 h

82.16 Clean step acc Defines the acceleration time from 0 rpm to the step frequency (parameters 82.02 Fwd step and 82.03 Rev step).

0…32767 s Step acceleration time. 1 = 1 s

82.17 Clean step dec Defines the deceleration time from the step frequency (parameters 82.02 Fwd step and 82.03 Rev step) to 0 rpm.

0…32767 s Step deceleration time. 1 = 1 s

8383 Energy monitoring Energy consumption monitoring settings.

See also section Energy consumption monitoring on page 81.

83.01 Energy mon mode Enables/disables, and selects the mode of, consumed energy monitoring.

Not used Energy monitoring not in use. 0

Limits The current energy monitoring period is compared to the consumption limit set by parameter 83.03 kWh limit.

1

Previous The current energy monitoring period (parameter 05.20 kWh current read) is compared to the previous period (05.21 kWh prev read).

2


Parameters 281

Average The current energy monitoring period (parameter 05.20 kWh current read) is compared to the average of the two previous periods (05.21 kWh prev read and 05.22 kWh posprev read).

3

83.02 Mon period Defines the length of an energy monitoring period. The first period starts when the drive is powered up.

0.00 … 35791394.11 h

Length of monitoring period. 1 = 1 min

83.03 kWh limit Consumed energy limit for parameter 83.01 Energy mon mode, selection Limits.

0…2147483647 kWh

Energy limit. 1 = 1 kWh

83.04 Mon tolerance Tolerance for energy limit. The energy consumption may exceed the reference energy by this tolerance value until the action defined by parameter 83.05 Energy mon ctrl is taken.

0…2147483647 kWh

Tolerance. 1 = 1 kWh

83.05 Energy mon ctrl Defines the action that is taken if the energy consumption exceeds the tolerance limits.

Not sel No action taken. 0

Alarm The drive generates alarm ENERGY LIMIT. 1

83.06 Energy reset Resets the energy monitoring counters.

No No reset. The parameter automatically reverts to this value after a reset.

0

Period Resets the periodic energy counters (parameters 05.20…05.22).

1

Month Resets the monthly energy counters (parameters 05.23…05.35).

2

9494 Ext IO conf I/O extension configuration.

94.01 Ext IO1 sel Activates an I/O extension installed into Slot 1. Depending on the module used, enables• digital input DI7• digital input/outputs DIO3…DIO6• analog inputs AI3…AI5• analog output AO3 or• relay outputs RO3…RO6.

None No extension installed into Slot 1. 0

FIO-01 FIO-01 extension installed into Slot 1. Additional 4 × DIO and 2 × RO are in use.

1

FIO-11 FIO-11 extension installed into Slot 1. Additional 2 × DIO, 3 × AI and 1 × AO are in use.

2

FIO-21 FIO-21 extension installed into Slot 1. Additional 1 × DI, 1 × AI and 2 × RO are in use.

3

FIO-31 FIO-31 extension installed into Slot 1. Additional 4 × RO are in use.

4

9595 Hw configuration Diverse hardware-related settings.

95.01 Ctrl boardSupply Selects how the drive control unit is powered.


282 Parameters

Internal 24V The drive control unit is powered from the drive power unit it is mounted on. This is the default setting.

0

External 24V The drive control unit is powered from an external power supply.

1

95.03 Temp inu ambient Defines the maximum ambient temperature. This temperature is used to calculate the estimated drive temperature. If the measured drive temperature exceeds the estimated value, an alarm (COOLALARM) or fault (COOLING) is generated.

0…55 °C Drive ambient temperature. 1 = 1 °C

9797 User motor par Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor

model.

97.01 Use given params Activates the motor model parameters 97.02…97.12.Notes:Parameter value is automatically set to zero when ID run is selected by parameter 99.13 IDrun mode. The values of parameters 97.02…97.12 are updated according to the motor characteristics identified during the ID run.This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.

NoUserPars Parameters 97.02…97.12 inactive. 0

UserMotPars The values of parameters 97.02…97.12 are used in the motor model.

1

UserPosOffs Reserved. 2

AllUserPars Reserved. 3

97.02 Rs user Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model. 0.00000 … 0.50000 p.u.

Stator resistance in per unit. 100000 = 1 p.u.

97.03 Rr user Defines the rotor resistance RR of the motor model.

0.00000 … 0.50000 p.u.

Rotor resistance in per unit. 100000 = 1 p.u.

97.04 Lm user Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model.

0.00000 … 10.00000 p.u.

Main inductance in per unit. 100000 = 1 p.u.

97.05 SigmaL user Defines the leakage inductance σLS.

0.00000 … 1.00000 p.u.

Leakage inductance in per unit. 100000 = 1 p.u.

97.09 Rs user SI Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model.

0.00000 … 100.00000 ohm

Stator resistance. 100000 = 1 ohm

97.10 Rr user SI Defines the rotor resistance RR of the motor model.

0.00000 … 100.00000 ohm

Rotor resistance. 100000 = 1 ohm

97.11 Lm user SI Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model.

0.00 …100000.00 mH

Main inductance. 100 = 1 mH

97.12 SigL user SI Defines the leakage inductance σLS.


Parameters 283

0.00 …100000.00 mH

Leakage inductance. 100 = 1 mH

9999 Start-up data Language selection, motor configuration and ID run settings.

99.01 Language Selects the language of the control panel displays.Note: Not all languages listed below are necessarily supported.

English English. 0809

Deutsch German. 0407

Italiano Italian. 0410

Espanol Spanish. 040A

Nederlands Dutch. 0413

Francais French. 040C

Dansk Danish. 0406

Russki Russian. 0419

Polski Polish. 0415

Turkce Turkish. 041F

Magyar Hungarian. 040E

99.05 Motor ctrl mode Selects the motor control mode.

DTC Direct torque control. This mode is suitable for most applications.Note: Instead of direct torque control, use scalar control• with multimotor applications 1) if the load is not equally

shared between the motors, 2) if the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after the motor identification (ID run),

• if the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive,

• if the drive is used with no motor connected (for example, for test purposes),

• if the drive runs a medium-voltage motor through a step-up transformer.

0

Scalar Scalar control. This mode is suitable in special cases where DTC cannot be applied. In scalar control, the drive is controlled with a frequency reference. The outstanding motor control accuracy of DTC cannot be achieved in scalar control. Some standard features are disabled in scalar control mode.Note: Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90% of the nominal current of the inverter.See also section Scalar motor control on page 70.

1

99.06 Mot nom current Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. If multiple motors are connected to the drive, enter the total current of the motors.Notes:• Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of

the motor does not exceed 90% of the nominal current of the drive.

• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.


284 Parameters

0.0 … 6400.0 A Nominal current of the motor. The allowable range is 1/6…2 × Imax of the drive (0…2 × Imax with scalar control mode).

10 = 1 A

99.07 Mot nom voltage Defines the nominal motor voltage as fundamental phase-to-phase rms voltage supplied to the motor at the nominal operating point. This setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor.Notes:• The stress on the motor insulation is always dependent

on the drive supply voltage. This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than that of the drive and the supply.


1/6 … 2 × UN Nominal voltage of the motor. 10 = 1 V

99.08 Mot nom freq Defines the nominal motor frequency.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.

5.0 … 500.0 Hz Nominal frequency of the motor. 10 = 1 Hz

99.09 Mot nom speed Defines the nominal motor speed. The setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor.Notes:• For safety reasons, after ID run, the maximum and

minimum speed limits (parameters 16.17 and 16.17) are automatically set to 1.2 times the value of this parameter.


0 … 30000 rpm Nominal speed of the motor. 1 = 1 rpm

99.10 Mot nom power Defines the nominal motor power. The setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor. If multiple motors are connected to the drive, enter the total power of the motors.The unit is selected by parameter 16.17 Power unit.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.

0.00 … 10000.00 kW

Nominal power of the motor. 100 = 1 kW

99.11 Mot nom cosfii Defines the cosphi of the motor for a more accurate motor model. Not obligatory; if set, should match the value on the rating plate of the motor.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.

0.00 … 1.00 Cosphi of the motor. 100 = 1

99.12 Mot nom torque Defines the nominal motor shaft torque for a more accurate motor model. Not obligatory.Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.

0 … 2147483.647 Nm

Nominal motor torque. 1000 = 1 N•m


Parameters 285

99.13 IDrun mode Selects the type of the motor identification performed at the next start of the drive (for Direct Torque Control). During the identification, the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. After the ID run, the drive is stopped. Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.Once the ID run is activated, it can be cancelled by stopping the drive: If ID run has already been performed once, parameter is automatically set to NO. If no ID run has been performed yet, parameter is automatically set to Standstill. In this case, the ID run must be performed.Notes:• ID run can only be performed in local control (i.e. when

drive is controlled via PC tool or control panel).• ID run cannot be performed if parameter 99.05 Motor ctrl

mode is set to Scalar.• ID run must be performed every time any of the motor

parameters (99.06…99.12) have been changed. Parameter is automatically set to Standstill after the motor parameters have been set.

• Ensure that possible Safe torque off and emergency stop circuits are closed during ID run.

• Mechanical brake is not opened by the logic for the ID run.

No No motor ID run is requested. This mode can be selected only if the ID run (Normal/Reduced/Standstill) has already been performed once.

0

Normal Normal ID run. Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The ID run takes about 90 seconds. This mode should be selected whenever it is possible.Notes:• The driven machinery must be de-coupled from the motor

with Normal ID run, if the load torque is higher than 20%, or if the machinery is not able to withstand the nominal torque transient during the ID run.

• Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.

WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50…100% of the nominal speed during the ID run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR

BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!

1


286 Parameters

Reduced Reduced ID Run. This mode should be selected instead of the Normal ID Run if• mechanical losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the motor

cannot be de-coupled from the driven equipment), or if• flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running

(i.e. in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals).

With Reduced ID run, the control in the field weakening area or at high torques is not necessarily as accurate as with the Normal ID run. Reduced ID run is completed faster than the Normal ID Run (< 90 seconds).Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.

WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50…100% of the nominal speed during the ID run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR

BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!

2

Standstill Standstill ID run. The motor is injected with DC current. The motor shaft will not rotate.Note: This mode should be selected only if the Normal or Reduced ID run is not possible due to the restrictions caused by the connected mechanics (e.g. with lift or crane applications).

3

Autophasing Reserved. 4

Cur meas cal Current offset and gain measurement calibration. The calibration will be performed at next start.

5


Additional parameter data 287

7Additional parameter data

What this chapter containsThis chapter lists the parameters with some additional data. For parameter descriptions, see chapter Parameters on page 109.

Terms and abbreviations

Term Definition

Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can usually only be monitored but not adjusted; some counters can however be reset by entering a 0.

Bit pointer Bit pointer. A bit pointer can point to a single bit in the value of another parameter, or be fixed to 0 (C.FALSE) or 1 (C.TRUE).

enum Enumerated list, i.e. selection list.

FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication.

INT32 32-bit integer value (31 bits + sign).

No. Parameter number.

Pb Packed boolean.

REAL

REAL24

16-bit value 16-bit value (31 bits + sign)

= integer value = fractional value

8-bit value 24-bit value (31 bits + sign)

= integer value = fractional value

288 Additional parameter data

Fieldbus addressesRefer to the User’s Manual of the fieldbus adapter.

Pointer parameter format in fieldbus communicationValue and bit pointer parameters are transferred between the fieldbus adapter and drive as 32-bit integer values.

32-bit integer value pointers

When a value pointer parameter is connected to the value of another parameter, the format is as follows:

For example, the value that should be written into parameter 33.02 Superv1 act to change its value to 01.07 Dc-voltage is0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0111 = 1073742087 (32-bit integer).

When a value pointer parameter is connected to an application program, the format is as follows:

Note: Value pointer parameters connected to an application program are read-only via fieldbus.

Type Data type. See enum, INT32, Bit pointer, Val pointer, Pb, REAL, REAL24, UINT32.

UINT32 32-bit unsigned integer value.

Val pointer Value pointer. Points to the value of another parameter.

Bit30…31 16…29 8…15 0…7

Name Source type Not in use Group IndexValue 1 - 1…255 1…255Description Value pointer is

connected to parameter

- Group of source parameter

Index of source parameter

Bit30…31 24…29 0…23

Name Source type Not in use AddressValue 2 - 0 … 224-1Description Value pointer is

connected to application program.

- Relative address of application program

variable


32-bit integer bit pointers

When a bit pointer parameter is connected to value 0 or 1, the format is as follows:

When a bit pointer parameter is connected to a bit value of another parameter, the format is as follows:

When a bit pointer parameter is connected to an application program, the format is as follows:

Note: Bit pointer parameters connected to an application program are read-only via fieldbus.

Bit30…31 1…29 0

Name Source type Not in use ValueValue 0 - 0…1Description Bit pointer is connected

to 0/1.- 0 = False, 1 = True

Bit30…31 24…29 16…23 8…15 0…7

Name Source type Not in use Bit sel Group IndexValue 1 - 0…31 2…255 1…255Description Bit pointer is

connected to signal bit

value.

- Bit selection Group of source

parameter

Index of source

parameter

Bit30…31 24…29 0…23

Name Source type Bit sel AddressValue 2 0…31 0 … 224-1Description Bit pointer is connected

to application program.Bit selection Relative address of

application program variable


Parameter groups 1…9No. Name Type Data

length Range Unit Update time Notes

01 Actual values01.01 Motor speed rpm REAL 32 -30000…30000 rpm 250 µs01.02 Motor speed % REAL 32 -1000…1000 % 2 ms01.03 Output frequency REAL 32 -30000…30000 Hz 2 ms01.04 Motor current REAL 32 0…30000 A 10 ms01.05 Motor current % REAL 16 0…1000 % 2 ms01.06 Motor torque REAL 16 -1600…1600 % 2 ms01.07 Dc-voltage REAL 32 0…2000 V 2 ms01.14 Motor speed est REAL 32 -30000…30000 rpm 2 ms01.15 Temp inverter REAL24 16 -40…160 % 2 ms01.17 Motor temp1 REAL 16 -10…250 °C 10 ms01.18 Motor temp2 REAL 16 -10…250 °C 10 ms01.19 Used supply volt REAL 16 0…1000 V 10 ms01.21 Cpu usage UINT32 16 0…100 % -01.22 Power inu out REAL 32 -32768…32768 kW or

hp10 ms

01.23 Motor power REAL 32 -32768…32768 kW or hp

2 ms

01.24 kWh inverter INT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms01.25 kWh supply INT32 32 -2147483647 …

2147483647kWh 10 ms

01.26 On-time counter INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms01.27 Run-time counter INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms01.28 Fan on-time INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms01.29 Torq nom scale INT32 32 0…2147483.647 Nm -01.30 Polepairs INT32 16 0…1000 - -01.31 Mech time const REAL 32 0…32767 s 10 ms01.32 Temp phase A REAL24 16 -40…160 % 2 ms01.33 Temp phase B REAL24 16 -40…160 % 2 ms01.34 Temp phase C REAL24 16 -40…160 % 2 ms01.35 Saved energy INT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms01.36 Saved amount INT32 32 0…21474836.47 - 10 ms01.37 Saved CO2 INT32 32 0…214748364.7 t 10 ms01.38 Temp int board REAL24 16 -40…160 °C 2 ms02 I/O values02.01 DI status Pb 16 0b000000…0b111111 - 2 ms02.02 RO status Pb 16 0b00000…0b11111 - 2 ms02.03 DIO status Pb 16 0b0000000000 …

0b1111111111- 2 ms

02.04 AI1 REAL 16 -11…11 V or -22…22 mA

V or mA 2 ms

02.05 AI1 scaled REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms02.06 AI2 REAL 16 -11…11 V or

-22…22 mAV or mA 2 ms

02.07 AI2 scaled REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms02.08 AI3 REAL 16 -22…22 mA 2 ms02.09 AI3 scaled REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms02.10 AI4 REAL 16 -22…22 mA 2 ms02.11 AI4 scaled REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms02.12 AI5 REAL 16 -22…22 mA 2 ms02.13 AI5 scaled REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms


02.16 AO1 REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 2 ms02.17 AO2 REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 2 ms02.18 AO3 REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 2 ms02.19 AO4 REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 2 ms02.20 Freq in REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 250 µs02.21 Freq out REAL 32 0…32767 Hz 250 µs02.22 FBA main cw Pb 32 0x00000000 …

0xFFFFFFFF- 500 µs

02.24 FBA main sw Pb 32 0x00000000 … 0xFFFFFFFF

- 500 µs

02.26 FBA main ref1 INT32 32 -2147483647 … 2147483647

- 500 µs

02.27 FBA main ref2 INT32 32 -2147483647 … 2147483647

- 500 µs

02.34 Panel ref REAL 32 -32768…32768 rpm or %

10 ms

02.36 EFB main cw Pb 32 0x00000000 … 0xFFFFFFFF

- 10 ms

02.37 EFB main sw Pb 32 0x00000000 … 0xFFFFFFFF

- 10 ms

02.38 EFB main ref1 INT32 32 -2147483647 … 2147483647

- 10 ms

02.39 EFB main ref2 INT32 32 -2147483647 … 2147483647

- 10 ms

02.40 FBA setpoint REAL 32 0 … 32768 % -02.41 FBA act val REAL 32 0 … 32768 % -02.42 Shared DI Pb 32 0x00000000 …

0xFFFFFFFF- 10 ms

02.43 Shared signal 1 REAL 32 0…32767 - 10 ms02.44 Shared signal 2 REAL 32 0…32767 - 10 ms03 Control values03.03 SpeedRef unramp REAL 32 -30000…30000 rpm 250 µs03.05 SpeedRef ramped REAL 32 -30000…30000 rpm 250 µs03.06 SpeedRef used REAL 32 -30000…30000 rpm 250 µs03.07 Speed error filt REAL 32 -30000…30000 rpm 250 µs03.08 Acc comp torq REAL 16 -1600…1600 % 250 µs03.09 Torq ref sp ctrl REAL 16 -1600…1600 % 250 µs03.13 Torq ref to TC REAL 16 -1600…1600 % 250 µs03.14 Torq ref used REAL 16 -1600…1600 % 250 µs03.17 Flux actual REAL24 16 0…200 % 2 ms03.20 Max speed ref REAL 16 0…30000 rpm 2 ms03.21 Min speed ref REAL 16 -30000…0 rpm 2 ms04 Appl values04.01 Act val REAL 32 0…32768 % 2 ms04.02 Setpoint REAL 32 0…32768 % 2 ms04.04 Process PID err REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms04.05 Process PID out REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms04.06 Process var1 REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 10 ms04.07 Process var2 REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 10 ms04.08 Process var3 REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 10 ms04.09 Counter ontime1 UINT32 32 0…2147483647 s 10 ms04.10 Counter ontime2 UINT32 32 0…2147483647 s 10 ms04.11 Counter edge1 UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 10 ms

No. Name Type Data length Range Unit Update

time Notes


04.12 Counter edge2 UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 10 ms04.13 Counter value1 UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 10 ms04.14 Counter value2 UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 10 ms04.20 Act val 1 out REAL 32 0…32768 % 10 ms04.21 Act val 2 out REAL 32 0…32768 % 10 ms04.22 Act val % REAL 16 0…100 % 10 ms04.23 Setpoint val 1 REAL 32 0…32768 % 10 ms04.24 Setpoint val 2 REAL 32 0…32768 % 10 ms04.25 Setpoint val % REAL 16 0…100 % 10 ms04.26 Wake up level REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 10 ms04.27 Shared source UINT32 16 0…8 - 10 ms04.28 Pump runtime INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms04.29 Trad 1 runtime INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms04.30 Trad 2 runtime INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms04.31 Trad 3 runtime INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms04.32 Trad 4 runtime INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms04.33 Trad 5 runtime INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms04.34 Trad 6 runtime INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms04.35 Trad 7 runtime INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms04.36 Trad 8 runtime INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms05 Pump values05.01 MF status UINT32 16 0…3 - 2 ms05.02 Trad pump cmd Pb 16 0b00000000 …

0b11111111- 10 ms

05.03 Trad master UINT32 16 0…8 - 10 ms05.04 Nbr aux pumps on INT32 32 0…65535 - 10 ms05.05 Flow act REAL 32 0…32767 m3/s 10 ms05.06 Flow by head REAL 32 0…32767 m3/s 10 ms05.07 Flow by power REAL 32 0…32767 m3/s 10 ms05.08 Total flow UINT32 32 0…2147483647 m3 10 ms05.09 Bypass ref REAL 32 -32768…32768 rpm 10 ms05.10 Speed ref REAL 32 -32768…32767 rpm 10 ms05.20 kWh current read UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.21 kWh prev read UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.22 kWh posprev read UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.23 kWh cur mon read UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.24 kWh January UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.25 kWh February UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.26 kWh March UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.27 kWh April UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.28 kWh May UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.29 kWh June UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.30 kWh July UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.31 kWh August UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.32 kWh September UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.33 kWh October UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.34 kWh November UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.35 kWh December UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms05.36 First in order UINT32 16 0…8 - 10 ms05.37 Time autochg UINT32 32 0…2147483647 h 10 ms05.39 Next start node UINT32 16 0…8 - 10 ms


time Notes


06 Drive status06.01 Status word1 Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 2 ms06.02 Status word2 Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 2 ms06.03 Speed ctrl stat Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 250 µs06.05 Limit word1 Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 250 µs06.07 Torq lim status Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 250 µs06.12 Op mode ack enum 16 0…11 - 2 ms06.13 Superv status Pb 16 0b000…0b111 - 2 ms06.14 Timed func stat Pb 16 0b00000…0b11111 - 10 ms06.15 Counter status Pb 16 0b000000…0b111111 - 10 ms06.20 Pump status word Pb 16 0x00000000 …

0xFFFFFFFF- 2 ms

06.21 Level status Pb 16 0x00000000 … 0xFFFFFFFF

- 10 ms

06.22 MF status word Pb 16 0x00000000 … 0xFFFFFFFF

- 2 ms

08 Alarms & faults08.01 Active fault enum 16 0…65535 - -08.02 Last fault enum 16 0…2147483647 - -08.03 Fault time hi INT32 32 -231…231 - 1 (date) -08.04 Fault time lo INT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 (time) -08.05 Alarm word1 UINT32 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 2 ms08.06 Alarm word2 UINT32 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 2 ms08.07 Alarm word3 UINT32 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 2 ms08.08 Alarm word4 UINT32 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 2 ms08.09 Alarm word5 UINT32 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 2 ms08.10 Alarm word6 UINT32 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 2 ms08.20 Pump fault word Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 2 ms08.21 Pump alarm word Pb 16 0x00000000 …

0xFFFFFFFF- 2 ms

09 System info09.01 Drive type INT32 16 - - -09.02 Drive rating ID INT32 16 0…65535 - -09.03 Firmware ID Pb 16 - - -09.04 Firmware ver Pb 16 - - -09.05 Firmware patch Pb 16 - - -09.10 Int logic ver Pb 32 - - -09.20 Option slot1 INT32 16 0…25 - -09.21 Option slot2 INT32 16 0…25 - -


time Notes


Parameter groups 10…99

No. Name Type Data len. Range Unit Default (Factory

def macro)10 Start/stop/dir

10.01 Ext1 start func enum 16 0…6 - In1

10.02 Ext1 start in1 Bit pointer 32 - - DI1

10.03 Ext1 start in2 Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

10.04 Ext2 start func enum 16 0…6 - In1

10.05 Ext2 start in1 Bit pointer 32 - - DI1

10.06 Ext2 start in2 Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

10.10 Fault reset sel Bit pointer 32 - - DI3

10.11 Run enable Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE

10.13 Em stop off3 Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE

10.15 Em stop off1 Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE

10.17 Start enable Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE

10.19 Start inhibit enum 16 0…1 - Disabled

10.20 Start intrl func enum 16 0…1 - Off3 stop

11 Start/stop mode

11.01 Start mode enum 16 0…2 - Automatic

11.02 Dc-magn time UINT32 16 0…10000 ms 500 ms

11.03 Stop mode enum 16 1…2 - Coast

11.04 Dc hold speed REAL 16 0…1000 rpm 5.0 rpm

11.05 Dc hold curr ref UINT32 16 0…100 % 30%

11.06 Dc hold enum 16 0…1 - Disabled

12 Operating mode12.01 Ext1/Ext2 sel Bit pointer 32 - - DI5

12.05 Ext2 ctrl mode enum 16 1…2 - PID

13 Analogue inputs

13.01 AI1 filt time REAL 16 0…30 s 0.100 s

13.02 AI1 max REAL 16 -22…22 mA or -11…11 V mA or V 20.000 mA or 10.000 V

13.03 AI1 min REAL 16 -22…22 mA or -11…11 V mA or V 4.000 mA or 2.000 V

13.04 AI1 max scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 1500.000

13.05 AI1 min scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000




13.09 AI2 max scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 100.000

13.10 AI2 min scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000





13.14 AI3 max scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 1500.000

13.15 AI3 min scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000




13.19 AI4 max scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 1500.000

13.20 AI4 min scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000




13.24 AI5 max scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 1500.000

13.25 AI5 min scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000

13.31 AI tune enum 16 0…4 - No action

13.32 AI superv func enum 16 0…3 - No

13.33 AI superv cw UINT32 32 0b0000…0b1111 - 0b0000

14 Digital I/O

14.01 DI invert mask Pb 16 0b00000 … 0b11111 - 0b00000

14.02 DIO1 conf enum 16 0…2 - Output

14.03 DIO1 out src Bit pointer 32 - - Ready

14.04 DIO1 Ton UINT32 16 0…3000 s 0.0 s

14.05 DIO1 Toff UINT32 16 0…3000 s 0.0 s


14.07 DIO2 out src Bit pointer 32 - - Running

14.08 DIO2 Ton UINT32 16 0…3000 s 0.0 s

14.09 DIO2 Toff UINT32 16 0…3000 s 0.0 s


14.11 DIO3 out src Bit pointer 32 - - Fault(-1)


14.15 DIO4 out src Bit pointer 32 - - Ready relay

14.42 RO1 src Bit pointer 32 - - Ready

14.43 RO1 Ton UINT32 16 0…3000 s 0.0 s

14.44 RO1 Toff UINT32 16 0…3000 s 0.0 s

14.45 RO2 src Bit pointer 32 - - Fault(-1)

14.48 RO3 src Bit pointer 32 - - Ready relay


def macro)


14.51 RO4 src Bit pointer 32 - - Ref running


14.57 Freq in max REAL 16 3…32768 Hz 1000 Hz

14.58 Freq in min REAL 16 3…32768 Hz 3 Hz

14.59 Freq in max scal REAL 16 -32768…32768 - 1500

14.60 Freq in min scal REAL 16 -32768…32768 - 0

14.61 Freq out src Val pointer 32 - - P.01.01

14.62 Freq out max src REAL 16 0…32768 - 1500

14.63 Freq out min src REAL 16 0…32768 - 0

14.64 Freq out max sca REAL 16 3…32768 Hz 1000 Hz

14.65 Freq out min sca REAL 16 3…32768 Hz 3 Hz


14.72 DIO invert mask Pb 16 0b0000000000 … 0b1111111111

- 0b0000000000

15 Analogue outputs

15.01 AO1 src Val pointer 32 - - Current

15.02 AO1 filt time REAL 16 0…30 s 0.100 s

15.03 AO1 out max REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 20.000 mA

15.04 AO1 out min REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 4.000 mA

15.05 AO1 src max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 100.000

15.06 AO1 src min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000

15.07 AO2 src Val pointer 32 - - Speed rpm


15.09 AO2 out max REAL 16 0…22.7 mA 20.000 mA

15.10 AO2 out min REAL 16 0…22.7 mA 4.000 mA

15.11 AO2 src max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 100.000

15.12 AO2 src min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000

15.13 AO3 src Val pointer 32 - - Frequency


15.15 AO3 out max REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 22.000 mA

15.16 AO3 out min REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 4.000 mA

15.17 AO3 src max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 50.000

15.18 AO3 src min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000

15.25 AO ctrl word UINT32 32 0b00…0b11 - 0b00

16 System

16.01 Local lock Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

16.02 Parameter lock enum 16 0…2 - Open

16.03 Pass code INT32 32 0…2147483647 - 0

16.04 Param restore enum 16 0…2 - Done

16.07 Param save enum 16 0…1 - Done

16.09 User set sel enum 32 1…10 - No request


def macro)


16.10 User set log Pb 32 0…4294967295 - N/A

16.11 User IO sel lo Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

16.12 User IO sel hi Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

16.14 Reset ChgParLog enum 16 0…1 - Done

16.16 Menu set active enum 16 0…32 - Single short

16.17 Power unit enum 16 0…1 - kW

16.20 Macro selected enum 16 0…6 - Factory def

16.21 Menu selection enum 16 0…2 - Short

19 Speed calculation19.01 Speed scaling REAL 16 0…30000 rpm 1500 rpm

19.02 Speed fb sel enum 16 - - Estimated

19.03 MotorSpeed filt REAL 32 0…10000 ms 8.000 ms

19.06 Zero speed limit REAL 32 0…30000 rpm 30.00 rpm

19.07 Zero speed delay UINT32 16 0…30000 ms 0 ms

19.08 Above speed lim REAL 16 0…30000 rpm 0 rpm

19.09 Speed TripMargin REAL 32 0…10000 rpm 500.0 rpm

19.10 Speed window REAL 16 0…30000 rpm 100 rpm

20 Limits

20.01 Maximum speed REAL 32 0…30000 rpm 1500 rpm

20.02 Minimum speed REAL 32 -30000…0 rpm 0 rpm

20.03 Pos speed ena Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE

20.04 Neg speed ena Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

20.05 Maximum current REAL 32 0…30000 A 0.00 A

20.06 Torq lim sel Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

20.07 Maximum torque1 REAL 16 0…1600 % 300.0%

20.08 Minimum torque1 REAL 16 -1600…0 % -300.0%

20.09 Maximum torque2 REAL 16 - - Max torque1

20.10 Minimum torque2 REAL 16 - - Min torque1

20.12 P motoring lim REAL 16 0…1600 % 300.0%

20.13 P generating lim REAL 16 0…1600 % 300.0%

21 Speed ref21.01 Speed ref1 sel Val pointer 32 - - AI1 scaled

21.02 Speed ref2 sel Val pointer 32 - - Zero

21.05 Speed share REAL 16 -8…8 - 1.000

21.09 SpeedRef min abs REAL 16 0…30000 rpm 0 rpm

22 Speed ref ramp

22.02 Acc time REAL 32 0…1800 s 5.000 s

22.03 Dec time REAL 32 0…1800 s 5.000 s

22.06 Shape time acc1 REAL 32 0…1000 s 0.100 s

22.07 Shape time acc2 REAL 32 0…1000 s 0.100 s


def macro)


22.08 Shape time dec1 REAL 32 0…1000 s 0.100 s

22.09 Shape time dec2 REAL 32 0…1000 s 0.100 s

22.12 Em stop time REAL 32 0…1800 s 3.000 s

23 Speed ctrl

23.01 Proport gain REAL 16 0…200 - 10.00

23.02 Integration time REAL 32 0…600 s 0.500 s

23.03 Derivation time REAL 16 0…10 s 0.000 s

23.04 Deriv filt time REAL 16 0…1000 ms 8.0 ms

23.05 Acc comp DerTime REAL 32 0…600 s 0.00 s

23.06 Acc comp Ftime REAL 16 0…1000 ms 8.0 ms

23.07 Speed err Ftime REAL 16 0…1000 ms 0.0 ms

23.08 Speed additive Val pointer 32 - - Zero

23.09 Max torq sp ctrl REAL 16 -1600…1600 % 300.0%

23.10 Min torq sp ctrl REAL 16 -1600…1600 % -300.0%

23.11 SpeedErr winFunc enum 16 0…2 - Disabled

23.12 SpeedErr win hi REAL 16 0…3000 rpm 0 rpm

23.13 SpeedErr win lo REAL 16 0…3000 rpm 0 rpm

23.14 Drooping rate REAL 16 0…100 % 0.00%

23.15 PI adapt max sp REAL 16 0…30000 rpm 0 rpm

23.16 PI adapt min sp REAL 16 0…30000 rpm 0 rpm

23.17 Pcoef at min sp REAL 16 0…10 - 1.000

23.18 Icoef at min sp REAL 16 0…10 - 1.000

23.20 PI tune mode enum 16 0…4 - Done

23.21 Tune bandwidth REAL 16 0…2000 Hz 100.00 Hz

23.22 Tune damping REAL 16 0…200 - 0.5

25 Critical speed

25.01 Crit speed sel enum 16 0…1 - Disable

25.02 Crit speed1 lo REAL 16 -30000…30000 rpm 0 rpm

25.03 Crit speed1 hi REAL 16 -30000…30000 rpm 0 rpm





26 Constant speeds

26.01 Const speed func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b00

26.02 Const speed sel1 Bit pointer 32 - - DI2

26.03 Const speed sel2 Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

26.04 Const speed sel3 Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

26.06 Const speed1 REAL 16 -30000…30000 rpm 1200 rpm



def macro)







27 Process PID

27.01 PID setpoint sel Val pointer 32 - - Setpoint %

27.12 PID gain REAL 16 0…100 - 1.00

27.13 PID integ time REAL 16 0…320 s 60.00 s

27.14 PID deriv time REAL 16 0…10 s 0.00 s

27.15 PID deriv filter REAL 16 0…10 s 1.00 s

27.16 PID error inv Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

27.18 PID maximum REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 100.0

27.19 PID minimum REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.0

27.30 Pid ref freeze Bit pointer 32 - - No

27.31 Pid out freeze Bit pointer 32 - - No

27.32 Pipefill ref acc REAL 16 0…100 s 5 s

27.33 Pipefill ref dec REAL 16 0…100 s 5 s

27.34 PID bal ena Val pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

27.35 PID bal ref REAL 32 -32768…32768 % 0.0%

27.36 Pump scal speed Val pointer 32 - - Speed scal

28 Procact sel

28.01 Act val 1/2 sel Bit pointer 32 - - Act val 1

28.02 Act val 1 src Val pointer 32 - - AI2 scaled

28.03 Act val 2 src Val pointer 32 - - Zero

28.04 Act val func enum 16 0…8 - Act1

28.05 Act max val REAL 32 0…32768 % 100.00%

28.06 Act unit sel enum 32 0…32767 - %

28.07 Act FBA scaling enum 16 0…3 - Src/100

29 Setpoint sel

29.01 Setpoint 1 / 2 sel Bit pointer 32 - - Setpoint 1

29.02 Setpoint 1 src Val pointer 32 - - Int set 1

29.03 Setpoint 2 src Val pointer 32 - - Zero

29.04 Internal set 1 REAL 32 0…32768 % 40.00%

29.05 Internal set 2 REAL 32 0…32768 % 60.00%

29.06 Reference step 1 REAL 16 0…100 % 0.00%






def macro)




30 Fault functions30.01 External fault Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE

30.02 Speed ref safe REAL 16 -30000…30000 rpm 0 rpm

30.03 Local ctrl loss enum 16 0…3 - Fault

30.04 Mot phase loss enum 16 0…1 - Fault

30.05 Earth fault enum 16 0…2 - Fault

30.06 Suppl phs loss enum 16 0…1 - Fault

30.07 Sto diagnostic enum 16 1…4 - Fault

30.08 Cross connection enum 16 0…1 - Fault

30.09 Stall function Pb 16 0b000…0b111 - 0b111

30.10 Stall curr lim REAL 16 0…1600 % 200.0%

30.11 Stall freq hi REAL 16 0.5 … 1000 Hz 15.0 Hz

30.12 Stall time UINT32 16 0…3600 s 20 s

31 Motor therm prot

31.01 Mot temp1 prot enum 16 0…2 - No

31.02 Mot temp1 src enum 16 0…12 - Estimated

31.03 Mot temp1 almLim INT32 16 0…200 °C 90 °C

31.04 Mot temp1 fltLim INT32 16 0…200 °C 110 °C

31.05 Mot temp2 prot enum 16 0…2 - No

31.06 Mot temp2 src enum 16 0…12 - Estimated

31.07 Mot temp2 almLim INT32 16 0…200 °C 90 °C

31.08 Mot temp2 fltLim INT32 16 0…200 °C 110 °C

31.09 Mot ambient temp INT32 16 -60…100 °C 20 °C

31.10 Mot load curve INT32 16 50…150 % 100%

31.11 Zero speed load INT32 16 50…150 % 100%

31.12 Break point INT32 16 0.01…500 Hz 45.00 Hz

31.13 Mot nom tempRise INT32 16 0…300 °C 80 °C

31.14 Mot therm time INT32 16 100…10000 s 256 s

32 Automatic reset32.01 Autoreset sel Pb 16 0b000000…0b111111 - 0b000000

32.02 Number of trials UINT32 16 0…5 - 0

32.03 Trial time UINT32 16 1…600 s 30.0 s

32.04 Delay time UINT32 16 0…120 s 0.0 s

33 Supervision

33.01 Superv1 func enum 16 0…4 - Disabled

33.02 Superv1 act Val pointer 32 - - Speed rpm

33.03 Superv1 hi REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.00

33.04 Superv1 lo REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.00


def macro)



33.06 Superv2 act Val pointer 32 - - Current

33.07 Superv2 hi REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.00

33.08 Superv2 lo REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.00


33.10 Superv3 act Val pointer 32 - - Torque

33.11 Superv3 hi REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.00

33.12 Superv3 lo REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.00

34 User load curve34.01 Overload func Pb 16 0b000000…0b111111 - 0b000000

34.02 Underload func Pb 16 0b0000…0b1111 - 0b0000

34.03 Load freq1 REAL 16 1…500 Hz 5 Hz





34.08 Load low lim1 REAL 16 0…1600 % 10%

34.09 Load low lim2 REAL 16 0…1600 % 15%

34.10 Load low lim3 REAL 16 0…1600 % 25%

34.11 Load low lim4 REAL 16 0…1600 % 30%

34.12 Load low lim5 REAL 16 0…1600 % 30%

34.13 Load high lim1 REAL 16 0…1600 % 300%





34.18 Load integ time UINT32 16 0…10000 s 100 s

34.19 Load cool time UINT32 16 0…10000 s 20 s

34.20 Underload time UINT32 16 0…10000 s 10 s

35 Process variable

35.01 Signal1 param Val pointer 32 - - Speed %

35.02 Signal1 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 300.000

35.03 Signal1 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -300.000

35.04 Proc var1 dispf enum 16 0…5 - 3

35.05 Proc var1 unit enum 16 0…98 - 4

35.06 Proc var1 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 300.000

35.07 Proc var1 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -300.000

35.08 Signal2 param Val pointer 32 - - Current %

35.09 Signal2 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 300.000

35.10 Signal2 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -300.000


def macro)




35.13 Proc var2 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 300.000

35.14 Proc var2 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -300.000

35.15 Signal3 param Val pointer 32 - - Torque

35.16 Signal3 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 300.000

35.17 Signal3 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -300.000



35.20 Proc var3 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 300.000

35.21 Proc var3 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -300.000

36 Timed functions

36.01 Timers enable Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

36.02 Timers mode Pb 16 0b0000…0b1111 - 0b0000

36.03 Start time1 UINT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 (time) 00:00:00

36.04 Stop time1 UINT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 (time) 00:00:00

36.05 Start day1 enum 16 1…7 - Monday

36.06 Stop day1 enum 16 1…7 - Monday













36.19 Boost signal Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

36.20 Boost time UINT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 (time) 00:00:00

36.21 Timed func1 Pb 16 0b00000…0b11111 - 0b00000

36.22 Timed func2 Pb 16 0b00000…0b11111 - 0b00000

36.23 Timed func3 Pb 16 0b00000…0b11111 - 0b00000

36.24 Timed func4 Pb 16 0b00000…0b11111 - 0b00000

38 Flux ref38.01 Flux ref REAL 16 0…200 % 100%

38.03 U/f curve func enum 16 0…2 - Linear

38.04 U/f curve freq1 REAL 16 1…500 % 10%


def macro)






38.09 U/f curve volt1 REAL 16 0…200 % 20%





38.16 Flux ref pointer Val pointer 32 - - P.38.01

40 Motor control40.01 Motor noise enum 16 0…2 - Cyclic

40.03 Slip gain REAL24 32 0…200 % 100%

40.04 Voltage reserve REAL24 32 -4…50 % -2%

40.07 IR-compensation REAL24 32 0…50 % 0.00%

40.10 Flux braking enum 16 0…2 - Disabled

44 Maintenance44.01 Ontime1 func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b01

44.02 Ontime1 src Bit pointer 32 - - Running

44.03 Ontime1 limit UINT32 32 0…2147483647 s 36000000 s

44.04 Ontime1 alm sel enum 16 0…5 - Mot bearing

44.05 Ontime2 func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b01

44.06 Ontime2 src Bit pointer 32 - - Charged

44.07 Ontime2 limit UINT32 32 0…2147483647 s 15768000 s

44.08 Ontime2 alm sel enum 16 0…5 - Device clean

44.09 Edge count1 func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b01

44.10 Edge count1 src Bit pointer 32 - - Charged

44.11 Edge count1 lim UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 5000

44.12 Edge count1 div UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 1

44.13 Edg cnt1 alm sel enum 16 0…5 - Dc-charge

44.14 Edge count2 func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b01

44.15 Edge count2 src Bit pointer 32 - - RO1

44.16 Edge count2 lim UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 10000

44.17 Edge count2 div UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 1

44.18 Edg cnt2 alm sel enum 16 0…5 - Output relay

44.19 Val count1 func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b01

44.20 Val count1 src Val pointer 32 - - Speed rpm

44.21 Val count1 lim UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 13140000

44.22 Val count1 div UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 6000

44.23 Val cnt1 alm sel enum 16 0…1 - Mot bearing


def macro)


44.24 Val count2 func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b01

44.25 Val count2 src Val pointer 32 - - Speed rpm

44.26 Val count2 lim UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 6570000

44.27 Val count2 div UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 6000

44.28 Val cnt2 alm sel enum 16 0…1 - Value2

44.29 Fan ontime lim UINT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 0.00 h

44.30 Runtime lim UINT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 0.00 h

44.31 Runtime alm sel enum 16 1…5 - Device clean

44.32 kWh inv lim UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 0 kWh

44.33 kWh inv alm sel enum 16 1…5 - Device clean

45 Energy optimising45.02 Energy tariff1 UINT32 32 0…21474836.47 - 0.65 GBP

45.06 E tariff unit enum 16 0…2 - Local

45.07 CO2 Conv factor REAL 16 0…10 - 0.5

45.08 Pump ref power REAL 16 0…1000 % 100.0%

45.09 Energy reset enum 16 0…1 - Done

47 Voltage ctrl47.01 Overvolt ctrl enum 16 0…1 - Enable

47.02 Undervolt ctrl enum 16 0…1 - Enable

47.03 SupplyVoltAutoId enum 16 0…1 - Enable

47.04 Supply voltage REAL 16 0…1000 V 400.0 V

49 Data storage

49.01 Data storage1 UINT32 16 -32768…32767 - 0




49.05 Data storage5 UINT32 32 -2147483647 … 2147483647 - 0




50 Fieldbus50.01 FBA enable enum 16 0…1 - Disable

50.02 Comm loss func enum 16 0…3 - No

50.03 Comm loss t out UINT32 16 0.3…6553.5 s 0.3 s

50.04 FBA ref1 modesel enum 16 0, 2 - Speed

50.05 FBA ref2 modesel enum 16 0, 2 - Speed

50.06 FBA act1 tr src Val pointer 32 - - P.01.01

50.07 FBA act2 tr src Val pointer 32 - - P.01.06

50.08 FBA sw bit12 src Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE



def macro)




50.15 Fb cw used Val pointer 32 - - P.02.22

50.20 Fb main sw func Pb 16 0b000…0b111 - 0b001

51 FBA settings51.01 FBA type UINT32 16 0…65535 - 0

51.02 FBA par2 UINT32 16 0…65535 - 0

… … … …. … … …

51.26 FBA par26 UINT32 16 0…65535 - 0

51.27 FBA par refresh enum 16 0…1 - Done

51.28 Par table ver UINT32 16 - - -

51.29 Drive type code UINT32 16 - - -

51.30 Mapping file ver UINT32 16 - - -

51.31 D2FBA comm sta enum 16 0…6 - Idle

51.32 FBA comm sw ver UINT32 16 - - -

51.33 FBA appl sw ver UINT32 16 - - -

52 FBA data in52.01 FBA data in1 UINT32 16 0…9999 - 0

… … … … … … …

52.12 FBA data in12 UINT32 16 0…9999 - 0

53 FBA data out53.01 FBA data out1 UINT32 16 0…9999 - 0

… … … … … … …

53.12 FBA data out12 UINT32 16 0…9999 - 0

56 Panel display56.01 Signal1 param UINT32 00.00 … 255.255 - 01.03

56.02 Signal2 param UINT32 00.00 … 255.255 - 01.04

56.03 Signal3 param UINT32 00.00 … 255.255 - 01.06

56.04 Signal1 mode INT32 -1…3 - Normal



56.07 Local ref unit UINT32 0…1 - rpm

58 Embedded Modbus58.01 Protocol ena sel UINT32 32 0…1 - Modbus RTU

58.03 Node address UINT32 32 0…247 - 1

58.04 Baud rate UINT32 32 0…6 - 9600

58.05 Parity UINT32 32 0…3 - 8 none 1

58.06 Control profile UINT32 32 0…3 - ABB Enhanced

58.07 Comm loss t out UINT32 32 0…60000 ms 600

58.08 Comm loss mode UINT32 32 0…2 - None


def macro)


58.09 Comm loss action UINT32 32 0…3 - None

58.10 Refresh settings UINT32 32 0…1 - Done

58.11 Reference scale Pb 16 1…65535 - 100

58.15 Comm diagnostics Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 0x0000

58.16 Received packets UINT32 32 0…65535 - 0

58.17 Transm packets UINT32 32 0…65535 - 0

58.18 All packets UINT16 16 0…65535 - 0

58.19 UART errors UINT16 16 0…65535 - 0

58.20 CRC errors UINT16 16 0…65535 - 0

58.21 Raw CW LSW Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 0x0000

58.22 Raw CW MSW Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 0x0000

58.23 Raw SW LSW Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 0x0000

58.24 Raw SW MSW Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 0x0000

58.25 Raw Ref 1 LSW Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 0x0000

58.26 Raw Ref 1 MSW Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 0x0000

58.27 Raw Ref 2 LSW Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 0x0000

58.28 Raw Ref 2 MSW Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 0x0000

58.30 Transmit delay UINT16 16 0…65535 ms 0

58.31 Ret app errors UINT16 16 0…1 - Yes

58.32 Word order UINT32 32 0…1 - LSW MSW

58.35 Data I/O 1 UINT16 16 0…9999 - 0

… … … … … … …

58.58 Data I/O 24 UINT16 16 0…9999 - 0

64 Load analyzer

64.01 PVL signal Val pointer 32 - - Power inu

64.02 PVL filt time REAL 16 0…120 s 2.00 s

64.03 Reset loggers Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE

64.04 AL signal Val pointer 32 - - Power motor

64.05 AL signal base REAL 32 0…32768 - 100.00

64.06 PVL peak value1 REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -

64.07 Date of peak UINT32 32 01.01.80… d -

64.08 Time of peak UINT32 32 00:00:00…23:59:59 s -

64.09 Current at peak REAL 32 -32768…32768 A -

64.10 Dc volt at peak REAL 32 0…2000 V -

64.11 Speed at peak REAL 32 -32768…32768 rpm -

64.12 Date of reset UINT32 32 01.01.80… d -

64.13 Time of reset UINT32 32 00:00:00…23:59:59 s -

64.14 AL1 0 to 10% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.15 AL1 10 to 20% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.16 AL1 20 to 30% REAL 16 0…100 % -


def macro)


64.17 AL1 30 to 40% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.18 AL1 40 to 50% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.19 AL1 50 to 60% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.20 AL1 60 to 70% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.21 AL1 70 to 80% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.22 AL1 80 to 90% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.23 AL1 over 90% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.24 AL2 0 to 10% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.25 AL2 10 to 20% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.26 AL2 20 to 30% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.27 AL2 30 to 40% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.28 AL2 40 to 50% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.29 AL2 50 to 60% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.30 AL2 60 to 70% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.31 AL2 70 to 80% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.32 AL2 80 to 90% REAL 16 0…100 % -

64.33 AL2 over 90% REAL 16 0…100 % -

75 Pump logic

75.01 Operation mode enum 16 0…3 - Off

75.02 Nbr of pumps UINT32 16 0…8 - 8

75.03 Follower mode enum 16 0…2 - Master speed

75.04 Follower ref REAL 16 0…32767 rpm 1300 rpm

75.05 Start speed 1 UINT32 32 0…32767 rpm 1300 rpm







75.12 Stop speed 1 UINT32 32 0…32767 rpm 800 rpm







75.19 Start delay UINT32 16 0…12600 s 10 s

75.20 Stop delay UINT32 16 0…12600 s 10 s

75.21 Speed hold on UINT32 16 0…100 s 0 s

75.22 Speed hold off UINT32 16 0…100 s 0 s


def macro)


75.23 Min pumps allow UINT32 16 0…8 - 1

75.24 Max pumps allow UINT32 16 0…8 - 8

75.25 Drive start dly UINT32 16 0…600 s 0 s

75.26 Master speed acc UINT32 32 0…1800 s 1 s

75.27 Master speed dec UINT32 32 0…1800 s 1 s

76 MF communication

76.01 Enable MF comm enum 16 0…1 - No

76.02 Pump node UINT32 16 0…8 - 1

76.03 Master enable Bit pointer 32 - - Yes

76.04 Pump prior sel Bit pointer 32 - - Choice 1

76.05 Prior choice 1 UINT32 16 1…4 - 1

76.06 Prior choice 2 UINT32 16 1…4 - 1

76.07 Mstr loss action enum 16 0…1 - Const speed

76.08 Mstr loss delay UINT32 16 0…3600 s 2 s

76.09 Start order corr UINT32 16 0…1 - Optimal

76.10 Master location UINT32 16 0…1 - Stable

76.11 Shared IO enable UINT32 16 0…1 - No

76.12 Set as source Bit pointer 16 - - No

76.13 Shared signal 1 Val pointer 32 - - AI1 scaled

76.14 Shared signal 2 Val pointer 32 - - AI2 scaled

76.15 Share lost actn UINT32 16 0…3 - Alarm

76.16 Share lost delay UINT32 16 0…3600 s 10 s

77 Pump sleep77.01 Sleep mode sel enum 16 0…4 - Internal

77.02 Sleep int sel Val pointer 32 - - Speed %

77.03 Sleep level REAL 32 -32768…32767 - 20.00

77.04 Sleep delay UINT32 16 0…12600 s 60 s

77.05 Sleep ext sel Bit pointer 32 - - Not used

77.06 Sleep boost step REAL 16 0…32767 % 0.00%

77.07 Sleep boost time UINT32 16 0…100 s 0 s

77.08 Wake up mode sel enum 16 0…3 - Wake > ref

77.09 Wake up ext src Val pointer 32 - - Proc act

77.10 Wake up level REAL 32 -32768…32767 - 90.00

77.11 Wake up delay UINT32 16 0…100 s 10 s

78 Pump autochange78.01 Autochg style enum 16 0…3 - No

78.02 Autochg trad enum 16 0…1 - All

78.03 Interlock mode enum 16 0…1 - Not used

78.04 Autochg level UINT32 32 0…32767 rpm 0 rpm

78.05 Autochg interval REAL 32 0…1092.3 h 0.00 h


def macro)


78.06 Interlock pump 1 Bit pointer 32 - - Not used








78.14 Runtime change enum 16 0…2 - No

78.15 Runtime diff UINT32 32 0…2147483647 h 0 h

79 Level control79.01 Level mode enum 16 0…2 - Off

79.02 Stopping mode enum 16 0…1 - Common stop

79.03 Low level REAL 16 0…32767 % 5.00%

79.04 Low switch Bit pointer 32 - - Not used

79.05 Stop level REAL 16 - - 10.00%

79.06 Start 1 level REAL 16 - - 10.00%

79.07 Start 2 level REAL 16 - - 20.00%

79.08 Start 3 level REAL 16 - - 30.00%

79.09 Start 4 level REAL 16 - - 40.00%

79.10 Start 5 level REAL 16 - - 50.00%

79.11 Start 6 level REAL 16 - - 60.00%

79.12 Start 7 level REAL 16 - - 70.00%

79.13 Start 8 level REAL 16 - - 80.00%

79.14 High level REAL 16 - - 90.00%

79.15 High switch Bit pointer 32 - - Not used

79.16 Start stop delay UINT32 16 0…3600 s 5 s

79.17 Random coef REAL 16 0…10 % 2.0%

79.18 Normal speed REAL 16 0…32767 rpm 1300 rpm

79.19 High speed REAL 16 0…32767 rpm 1500 rpm

80 Flow calculation80.01 Flow calc mode enum 16 0…3 - Not used

80.02 Pump inlet sel Val pointer 32 - - Zero

80.03 Pump outlet sel Val pointer 32 - - Zero

80.04 HQ curve Q1 REAL 16 0…32767 m3/h 0.00 m3/h

80.05 HQ curve H1 REAL 16 0…32767 m 0.00 m


80.07 HQ curve H2 REAL 16 0…32767 m 0.00 m


80.09 HQ curve H3 REAL 16 0…32767 m 0.00 m


def macro)



80.11 HQ curve H4 REAL 16 0…32767 m 0.00 m


80.13 HQ curve H5 REAL 16 0…32767 m 0.00 m

80.14 PQ curve P1 REAL 16 0…32767 kW 0.00 kW

80.15 PQ curve Q1 REAL 16 0…32767 m3/h 0.00 m3/h









80.24 HQ PQ brk point REAL 16 0…32767 m 0.00 m

80.25 Pump inlet diam REAL 16 0…32767 m 0.00 m

80.26 Pump outlet diam REAL 16 0…32767 m 0.00 m

80.27 Sensors hgt diff REAL 16 0…32767 m 0.00 m

80.28 Pump nom speed REAL 16 0…32767 rpm 1500 rpm

80.29 Density REAL 16 0…32767 kg/m3 1000.00 kg/m3

80.30 Efficiency REAL 16 0…100 % 100.00%

80.31 Flow calc gain REAL 16 0…32767 - 1.00

80.32 Calc low sp REAL 16 0…32767 rpm 0 rpm

80.33 Sum flow reset enum 16 0…1 - No

81 Pump protection81.01 Inlet prot ctrl enum 16 0…3 - Not used

81.02 AI measure inlet Val pointer 32 - - AI1 scaled

81.03 AI in low level REAL 16 0…32767 bar 0.00 bar

81.04 Very low ctrl enum 16 0…3 - Not sel

81.05 AI in very low REAL 16 0…32767 bar 0.00 bar

81.06 DI status inlet Bit pointer 32 - - Not used

81.07 Inlet ctrl dly UINT32 16 0…600 s 0 s

81.08 Inlet forced ref REAL 16 0…32767 rpm 0.0 rpm

81.09 Outlet prot ctrl enum 16 0…3 - Not used

81.10 AI meas outlet Val pointer 32 - - AI1 scaled

81.11 AI out hi level REAL 16 0…32767 bar 0.00 bar

81.12 Very high ctrl enum 16 0…3 - Not sel

81.13 AI out very high REAL 16 0…32767 bar 0.00 bar

81.14 DI status outlet Bit pointer 32 - - Not used

81.15 Outlet ctr dly UINT32 16 0…600 s 0 s


def macro)


81.16 Outlet force ref REAL 16 0…32767 rpm 0.0 rpm

81.17 Protect dec time UINT32 32 0…18000 s 0 s

81.18 Flow source sel Val pointer 32 - - Flow act

81.19 Flow max prot enum 16 0…2 - Not sel

81.20 Flow max level REAL 16 0…32767 m3/s 0.00 m3/s

81.21 Flow min prot enum 16 0…2 - Not sel

81.22 Flow min level REAL 16 0…32767 m3/s 0.00 m3/s

81.23 Flow ctrl delay UINT32 16 0…12600 s 0 s

81.24 Flow check delay UINT32 16 0…12600 s 0 s

81.25 Appl prot ctrl enum 16 0…2 - Not used

81.26 Prof limit REAL 16 0…32767 % 0.00%

81.27 Prof limit dly INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 0.00 h

81.28 Pipefill enable Bit pointer 32 - - Not used

81.29 Pipefill step UINT32 16 0…32767 rpm 50 rpm

81.30 Req act change REAL 16 0…100 % 0.00%

81.31 Act change delay UINT32 16 0…100 s 3 s

81.32 Pid enable dev REAL 16 0…100 % 10.00%

81.33 Pid enb dev dly UINT32 16 0…12600 s 1 s

81.34 Pipefill timeout UINT32 16 0…12600 s 1200 s

81.35 Pipefill flt ctr enum 16 0…2 - Activate PID

82 Pump cleaning82.01 Pump clean trig Pb 16 0b0000000 … 0b1111111 - 0b0100000

82.02 Fwd step REAL 16 0…100 % 100.0%

82.03 Rev step REAL 16 0…100 % 80.0%

82.04 Off time UINT32 16 0…1000 s 5 s

82.05 Fwd step time UINT32 16 0…1000 s 10 s

82.06 Rev step time UINT32 16 0…1000 s 0 s

82.07 Time trig INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 24.00 h

82.08 Nbr of steps UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 3

82.09 Supervis source Val pointer 32 - - Current %

82.10 Supervis limit REAL 16 0…32767 - 105.0

82.11 Supervis delay UINT32 16 0…600 s 10 s

82.12 Trig pointer Bit pointer 16 - - Not used

82.13 Clean max ctrl enum 16 0…2 - Alarm

82.14 Clean max number UINT32 32 0…30 - 5

82.15 Clean max period INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 1.00 h

82.16 Clean step acc UINT32 32 0…32767 s 1 s

82.17 Clean step dec UINT32 32 0…32767 s 1 s

83 Energy monitoring83.01 Energy mon mode enum 16 0…3 - Not used


def macro)


83.02 Mon period INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 0.00 h

83.03 kWh limit UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 0 kWh

83.04 Mon tolerance UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 0 kWh

83.05 Energy mon ctrl enum 16 0…1 - Not sel

83.06 Energy reset enum 16 0…2 - No

94 Ext IO conf

94.01 Ext IO1 sel Val pointer 32 0…4 - None

95 Hw configuration

95.01 Ctrl boardSupply enum 16 0…1 - Internal 24V

95.03 Temp inu ambient INT32 16 0…55 °C 40 °C

97 User motor par97.01 Use given params enum 16 0…1 - NoUserPars

97.02 Rs user REAL24 32 0…0.5 p.u. 0.00000 p.u.

97.03 Rr user REAL24 32 0…0.5 p.u. 0.00000 p.u.

97.04 Lm user REAL24 32 0…10 p.u. 0.00000 p.u.

97.05 SigmaL user REAL24 32 0…1 p.u. 0.00000 p.u.

97.09 Rs user SI REAL24 32 0…100 ohm 0.00000 Ohm

97.10 Rr user SI REAL24 32 0…100 ohm 0.00000 Ohm

97.11 Lm user SI REAL24 32 0…100000 mH 0.00 mH

97.12 SigL user SI REAL24 32 0…100000 mH 0.00 mH

99 Start-up data99.01 Language enum 16 - - English

99.05 Motor ctrl mode enum 16 0…1 - DTC

99.06 Mot nom current REAL 32 0…6400 A 0.0 A

99.07 Mot nom voltage REAL 32 1/6 … 2 × UN V 0.0 V

99.08 Mot nom freq REAL 32 5…500 Hz 0.0 Hz

99.09 Mot nom speed REAL 32 0…30000 rpm 0 rpm

99.10 Mot nom power REAL 32 0…10000 kW or hp 0.00 kW

99.11 Mot nom cosfii REAL24 32 0…1 - 0.00

99.12 Mot nom torque INT32 32 0…2147483.647 N•m 0.000 N•m

99.13 IDrun mode enum 16 0…5 - No


def macro)

Fault tracing 313

8Fault tracing

What this chapter containsThe chapter lists the alarm (warning) and fault messages including possible causes and corrective actions.

The alarm/fault code is displayed on the control panel of the drive, as well as the DriveStudio PC tool. An alarm or a fault message indicates abnormal drive status. Most alarm and fault causes can be identified and corrected using the information in this chapter. If not, an ABB representative should be contacted.

In this chapter, the alarms and faults are sorted by the four-digit code. The hexadecimal code in brackets that follows the alarm/fault message is for fieldbus communication.

Safety

WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. The Safety Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual must be read before you start working with the drive.

How to resetThe drive can be reset either by pressing the RESET key on the control panel or PC tool, or by switching the supply voltage off for a while. When the fault has been removed, the motor can be restarted.

A fault can also be reset from an external source selected by parameter 10.10 Fault reset sel.

314 Fault tracing

Fault historyWhen a fault is detected, it is stored in the fault logger with a time stamp. The fault history stores information on the 16 latest faults of the drive. Three of the latest faults are stored at the beginning of a power switch-off.

Parameters 08.01 Active fault and 08.02 Last fault store the fault codes of the most recent faults. Selected active faults are shown by 08.20 Pump fault word.

Alarms can be monitored via alarm words 08.05 Alarm word1 … 08.08 Alarm word4 and 08.21 Pump alarm word. Alarm information is lost at power switch-off or fault reset.

Alarm messages generated by the driveCode Alarm (fieldbus code),

other information Cause What to do

2003 SAFE TORQUE OFF(0xFF7A)08.05 Alarm word1 b3Programmable alarm: 30.07 Sto diagnostic

Safe torque off function is active, i.e. safety circuit signal(s) connected to connector XSTO is lost.

Check safety circuit connections. For more information, see appropriate drive hardware manual, description of parameter 30.07 (page 196), and Application guide - Safe torque off function for ACSM1, ACS850 and ACQ810 drives (3AFE68929814 [English]).

2004 STO MODE CHANGE(0xFF7A)08.05 Alarm word1 b4

Error in changing Safe torque off supervision, i.e. parameter 30.07 Sto diagnostic setting could not be changed to value Alarm.

Contact your local ABB representative.

2005 MOTOR TEMPERATURE(0x4310)08.05 Alarm word1 b5Programmable alarm: 31.01 Mot temp1 prot

Estimated motor temperature (based on motor thermal model) has exceeded alarm limit defined by parameter 31.03 Mot temp1 almLim.

Check motor ratings and load.Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc.Check value of alarm limit.Check motor thermal model settings (parameters 31.09…31.14).

Measured motor temperature has exceeded alarm limit defined by parameter 31.03 Mot temp1 almLim.

Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter 31.02 Mot temp1 src.Check motor ratings and load.Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc.Check value of alarm limit.

2006 EMERGENCY OFF(0xF083)08.05 Alarm word1 b6

Drive has received emergency OFF2 command.

To restart drive, activate Run enable signal (source selected by parameter 10.11 Run enable) and start drive.

2007 RUN ENABLE(0xFF54)08.05 Alarm word1 b7

No Run enable signal is received.

Check setting of parameter 10.11 Run enable. Switch signal on (e.g. in the fieldbus Control Word) or check wiring of selected source.

Fault tracing 315

2008 ID-RUN(0xFF84)08.05 Alarm word1 b8

Motor identification run is on.

This alarm belongs to normal start-up procedure. Wait until drive indicates that motor identification is completed.

Motor identification is required.

This alarm belongs to normal start-up procedure. Select how motor identification should be performed, parameter 99.13 IDrun mode.Start identification routines by pressing Start key.

2009 EMERGENCY STOP(0xF081)08.05 Alarm word1 b9

Drive has received emergency stop command (OFF1/OFF3).

Check that it is safe to continue operation.Return emergency stop push button to normal position (or adjust the fieldbus Control Word accordingly).Restart drive.

2013 DEVICE OVERTEMP(0x4210)08.05 Alarm word1 b13

Measured drive temperature has exceeded internal alarm limit.

Check ambient conditions.Check air flow and fan operation.Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.Check motor power against unit power.

2014 INTBOARD OVERTEMP(0x7182)08.05 Alarm word1 b14

Interface board (between power unit and control unit) temperature has exceeded internal alarm limit.

Let drive cool down.Check for excessive ambient temperature.Check for cooling fan failure.Check for obstructions in the air flow.Check the dimensioning and cooling of the cabinet.

2017 FIELDBUS COMM(0x7510)08.06 Alarm word2 b1Programmable alarm: 50.02 Comm loss func

Cyclical communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module or between PLC and fieldbus adapter module is lost.

Check status of fieldbus communication. See appropriate User’s Manual of fieldbus adapter module.Check settings of parameter group 50 Fieldbus.Check cable connections.Check if communication master is able to communicate.

2018 LOCAL CTRL LOSS(0x5300)08.06 Alarm word2 b2Programmable alarm: 30.03 Local ctrl loss

Control panel or PC tool selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating.

Check PC tool or control panel connection.Check control panel connector.Replace control panel in mounting platform.

2019 AI SUPERVISION(0x8110)08.06 Alarm word2 b3Programmable alarm: 13.32 AI superv func

An analog input has reached limit defined by parameter 13.33 AI superv cw.

Check analog input source and connections. Check analog input minimum and maximum limit settings.

2020 FB PAR CONF(0x6320)08.06 Alarm word2 b4

The drive does not have a functionality requested by PLC, or requested functionality has not been activated.

Check PLC programming.Check settings of parameter group 50 Fieldbus.

2021 NO MOTOR DATA(0x6381)08.06 Alarm word2 b5

Parameters in group 99 have not been set.

Check that all the required parameters in group 99 have been set.

Code Alarm (fieldbus code), other information Cause What to do

316 Fault tracing

2035 PS COMM(0x5480)08.07 Alarm word3 b3

Communication errors detected between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit of the drive.

Check the connections between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit.

2036 RESTORE(0x6300)08.07 Alarm word3 b4

Restoration of backed-up parameters failed.


2037 CUR MEAS CALIBRATION(0x2280)08.07 Alarm word3 b5

Current measurement calibration will occur at next start.

Informative alarm.

2039 EARTH FAULT(0x2330)08.07 Alarm word3 b7Programmable alarm: 30.05 Earth fault

Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable.

Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.Check for an earth fault in motor or motor cables by measuring the insulation resistances of motor and motor cable.If no earth fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative.

2040 AUTORESET(0x6080)08.07 Alarm word3 b8

A fault is to be autoreset. Informative alarm. See parameter group 32 Automatic reset.

2041 MOTOR NOM VALUE(0x6383)08.07 Alarm word3 b9

The motor configuration parameters are set incorrectly.

Check the settings of the motor configuration parameters in group 99.

The drive is not dimensioned correctly.

Check that the drive is sized correctly for the motor.

2043 STALL(0x7121)08.07 Alarm word3 b11Programmable alarm: 30.09 Stall function

Motor is operating in stall region because of e.g. excessive load or insufficient motor power.

Check motor load and drive ratings.Check fault function parameters.

2044 LCURVE(0x2312)08.07 Alarm word3 b12Programmable alarm: 34.01 Overload func / 34.02 Underload func

Overload or underload limit has been exceeded.

Check the settings of the parameters in group 34 User load curve.

2045 LCURVE PAR(0x6320)08.07 Alarm word3 b13

The load curve has been incorrectly or inconsistently defined.


2046 FLUX REF PAR(0x6320)08.07 Alarm word3 b14

The U/f (voltage/frequency) curve has been incorrectly or inconsistently defined.

Check the settings of the parameters in group 38 Flux ref.

2048 OPTION COMM LOSS(0x7000)08.08 Alarm word4 b0

Communication between drive and option module (FEN-xx and/or FIO-xx) is lost.

Check that option modules are properly connected to Slot 1 (or) Slot 2.Check that option modules or Slot 1/2 connectors are not damaged. To determine whether module or connector is damaged: Test each module individually in Slot 1 and Slot 2.


Fault tracing 317

2049 MOTTEMPAL2(0x4313)08.08 Alarm word4 b2Programmable alarm: 31.05 Mot temp2 prot

Estimated motor temperature (based on motor thermal model) has exceeded alarm limit defined by parameter 31.07 Mot temp2 almLim.


Measured motor temperature has exceeded alarm limit defined by parameter 31.07 Mot temp2 almLim.


2050 IGBTOLALARM(0x5482)08.08 Alarm word4 b3

Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. This fault protects the IGBT(s) and can be activated by a short circuit in the motor cable.

Check motor cable.

2051 IGBTTEMPALARM(0x4210)08.08 Alarm word4 b4

Drive IGBT temperature is excessive.

Check ambient conditions.Check air flow and fan operation.Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.Check motor power against drive power.

2052 COOLALARM(0x4290)08.08 Alarm word4 b5

Drive module temperature is excessive.

Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds 40 °C (104 °F), ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive. See appropriate Hardware Manual.Check drive module cooling air flow and fan operation.Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of drive module for dust pick-up. Clean whenever necessary.

2053 MENU CHG PASSWORD REQ(0x6F81)

Loading a parameter listing requires a password.

Enter password at parameter 16.03 Pass code.

2054 MENU CHANGED(0x6F82)08.08 Alarm word4 b6

A different parameter listing is being loaded.

Informative alarm.


318 Fault tracing

2055 DEVICE CLEAN(0x5080)

Maintenance counter alarm. See parameter group 44 Maintenance.Note: Any maintenance counter alarm sets bit 8 of 08.08 Alarm word4.2056 COOLING FAN

(0x5081)

2057 ADD COOLING(0x5082)

2058 CABINET FAN(0x5083)

2059 DC CAPACITOR(0x5084)

2060 MOTOR BEARING(0x738C)

2061 MAIN CONTACTOR(0x548D)

2062 RELAY OUTPUT SW(0x548E)

2063 MOTOR START COUNT(0x6180)

2064 POWER UP COUNT(0x6181)

2065 DC CHARGE COUNT(0x6182)

2066 ONTIME1 ALARM(0x5280)

2067 ONTIME2 ALARM(0x5281)

2068 EDGE1 ALARM(0x5282)

2069 EDGE2 ALARM(0x5283)

2070 VALUE1 ALARM(0x5284)

2071 VALUE2 ALARM(0x5285)

2072 DC NOT CHARGED(0x3250)08.08 Alarm word4 b9

The voltage of the intermediate DC circuit has not yet risen to operating level.

Wait for the DC voltage to rise.

2073 AUTOTUNE FAILED(0x8481)08.08 Alarm word4 b10

Speed controller autotune routine did not finish successfully.

See parameter 23.20 PI tune mode.

2074 START INTERLOCK(0xF082)08.08 Alarm word4 b11

No Start interlock signal received.

Check circuit connected to DIIL input.

2076 TEMP MEAS FAILURE(0x4211)08.08 Alarm word4 b7

Problem with internal temperature measurement of the drive.



Fault tracing 319

2077 EFB COMM LOSS(0x7540)08.08 Alarm word4 b12

Embedded fieldbus interface has been taken into use, and there is a communication break between the drive and the master station.

Check:• selection of the parameter which

enables/disables EFB communication (58.01 Protocol ena sel)

• EFB connection at terminal XD2D on the JCON board

• status of the fieldbus master (online/offline)

• settings of the communication supervision function (parameter 58.09 Comm loss action).

2201 PIPEFILL TIMEOUT08.09 Alarm word5 b008.21 Pump alarm word b9

Maximum allowed time for the Pipefill function exceeded.

Check the pump system.Check parameters 81.28….81.35.

2202 MIN FLOW08.09 Alarm word5 b108.21 Pump alarm word b0

Measured flow below minimum limit.

Check the pump system for reasons such as leaks that might cause a loss of measured flow.Check parameters 81.18….81.24.

2203 MAX FLOW08.09 Alarm word5 b208.21 Pump alarm word b1

Measured flow above maximum limit.

Check the pump system for reasons that might cause an increase in measured flow.Check parameters 81.18….81.24.

2204 LOW PRESSURE08.09 Alarm word5 b308.21 Pump alarm word b2

Pressure at pump inlet too low.

Check for a closed valve on the inlet side of the pump.Check piping for leaks.

2205 HIGH PRESSURE08.09 Alarm word5 b408.21 Pump alarm word b3

Pressure at pump outlet too high.

Check piping for blocks.

2206 VERY LOW PRESS08.09 Alarm word5 b508.21 Pump alarm word b4



2207 VERY HIGH PRESS08.09 Alarm word5 b608.21 Pump alarm word b5



2208 PROFILE HIGH08.09 Alarm word5 b708.21 Pump alarm word b6

Application profile protection limit exceeded (see parameters 81.25…81.27).

Check the piping for leaks.Check the general condition of the components of the pumping station.

2209 MAX CLEANINGS08.09 Alarm word5 b808.21 Pump alarm word b7

Maximum number of cleaning sequences exceeded (see parameter group 82 Pump cleaning).

Check for reasons that might have had an increasing effect on the monitored signal (parameter 82.09). For example, increased viscosity of the fluid, or faulty pump bearings may increase the current drawn by the motor, and trigger the cleaning sequence more frequently.

2210 ALL PUMPS INLOCKD08.09 Alarm word5 b908.21 Pump alarm word b10

All interlock signals are off, indicating no pumps are available.

Check the interlock settings in parameter group 78 Pump autochange.Check that the pumps are switched on.Check the interlock wiring from the pumps.

2211 ENERGY LIMIT08.09 Alarm word5 b1008.21 Pump alarm word b11

Energy consumption limit exceeded (see parameter group 83 Energy monitoring).

Check for reasons for increased energy consumption.


320 Fault tracing

2212 DATE WRONG08.09 Alarm word5 b1108.21 Pump alarm word b12

Date has not been set. Set the date and time (page 37).

2215 BOOSTING08.09 Alarm word5 b1408.21 Pump alarm word b15

Sleep boost is active. Informative alarm.

2216 PIPE FILLING08.09 Alarm word5 b1508.21 Pump alarm word b16

The soft pipefill function is being performed.

Informative alarm.

2217 NO MORE PUMPS08.10 Alarm word6 b008.21 Pump alarm word b17

No further pumps are available for starting.

Check that all appropriate pumps are switched on.

2218 CLEANING08.10 Alarm word6 b108.21 Pump alarm word b8

A pump cleaning sequence is in progress.

Informative alarm.

2219 AUTOCHANGE08.10 Alarm word6 b208.21 Pump alarm word b18

The Autochange function is being performed.

Informative alarm.

2220 SLEEPING08.10 Alarm word6 b308.21 Pump alarm word b19

The drive has entered sleep mode.

Informative alarm.

2221 START DELAY08.10 Alarm word6 b408.21 Pump alarm word b20

A pump will start after the start delay has elapsed.

Informative alarm.

2222 LC TANK FULL08.10 Alarm word6 b508.21 Pump alarm word b23

The level of the liquid in the container is very high (the source selected by parameter 79.15 High switch is 1).

Informative alarm.

2223 LC TANK EMPTY08.10 Alarm word6 b608.21 Pump alarm word b24

The level of the liquid in the container is very low (the source selected by parameter 79.04 Low switch is 1).

Informative alarm.

2224 MF MASTER LOST08.10 Alarm word6 b708.21 Pump alarm word b21

The drive cannot detect a master on the drive-to-drive link, and is not itself allowed to become master.

Check that there are drives on the drive-to-drive link that are allowed to become master.Check the wiring of the drive-to-drive link.

2225 MF NO SHARED DATA08.10 Alarm word6 b808.21 Pump alarm word b25

Shared signals not received.

Check that at least one drive has signal sharing enabled (parameter 76.12 Set as source).Check the status, communication settings and wiring of the drive that is sharing its signals.

2400 SOLUTION ALARM(0x6F80)08.08 Alarm word4 b1

Alarm generated by custom application program.

Check custom application program.


Fault tracing 321

Fault messages generated by the driveCode Fault (fieldbus code),

other information Cause What to do

0001 OVERCURRENT(0x2310)

Output current has exceeded internal fault limit.

Check motor load.Check acceleration times in parameter group 22 Speed ref ramp.Check motor and motor cable (including phasing and delta/star connection).Check that the start-up data in parameter group 99 corresponds to the motor rating plate.Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.

0002 DC OVERVOLTAGE(0x3210)

Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage

Check that overvoltage controller is on, parameter 47.01 Overvolt ctrl.Check mains for static or transient overvoltage.Check deceleration time.Use coast-to-stop function (if applicable).

0003 DEVICE OVERTEMP(0x4210)

Measured drive temperature has exceeded internal fault limit.

Check ambient conditions.Check air flow and fan operation.Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.Check motor power against unit power.

0004 SHORT CIRCUIT(0x2340)

Short-circuit in motor cable(s) or motor

Check motor and motor cable.Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.

0005 DC UNDERVOLTAGE(0x3220)

Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient due to missing mains phase, blown fuse or rectifier bridge internal fault.

Check mains supply and fuses.

0006 EARTH FAULT(0x2330)Programmable fault: 30.05 Earth fault

Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable.

Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.Check that there is no earth fault in motor or motor cables:- measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable.If no earth fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative.

0007 FAN FAULT(0xFF83)

Fan is not able to rotate freely or fan is disconnected. Fan operation is monitored by measuring fan current.

Check fan operation and connection.

0013 CURR MEAS GAIN(0x3183)

Difference between output phase U2 and W2 current measurement gain is too great.


0014 CABLE CROSS CON(0x3181)Programmable fault: 30.08 Cross connection

Incorrect input power and motor cable connection (i.e. input power cable is connected to drive motor connection).

Check input power connections.

322 Fault tracing

0015 SUPPLY PHASE(0x3130)Programmable fault: 30.06 Suppl phs loss

Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing input power line phase or blown fuse.

Check input power line fuses.Check for input power supply imbalance.

0016 MOTOR PHASE(0x3182)Programmable fault: 30.04 Mot phase loss

Motor circuit fault due to missing motor connection (all three phases are not connected).

Connect motor cable.

0017 ID-RUN FAULT(0xFF84)

Motor ID run is not completed successfully.

Check the fault logger for a fault code extension. See appropriate actions for each extension below.

Extension: 1 The ID run cannot be completed because the maximum current setting and/or internal current limit of the drive is too low.

Check setting of parameters 99.06 Mot nom current and 20.05 Maximum current. Make sure that 20.05 Maximum current > 99.06 Mot nom current.Check that the drive is dimensioned correctly according to the motor.

Extension: 2 The ID run cannot be completed because the maximum speed setting and/or calculated field weakening point is too low.

Check setting of parameters 99.07 Mot nom voltage, 99.08 Mot nom freq, 99.09 Mot nom speed, 20.01 Maximum speed and 20.02 Minimum speed. Make sure that• 20.01 Maximum speed > (0.55 × 99.09 Mot nom speed) > (0.50 × synchronous speed),• 20.02 Minimum speed < 0, and• supply voltage > (0.66 × 99.07 Mot nom voltage).

Extension: 3 The ID run cannot be completed because the maximum torque setting is too low.

Check setting of parameter 99.12 Mot nom torque and torque limits defined in parameter group 20 Limits. Make sure that the active maximum torque (selected by 20.06 Torq lim sel) > 100%.

Extension: 4 Current measurement calibration did not finish within reasonable time.


Extension: 5…8 Internal error. Contact your local ABB representative.

Extension: 9 Asynchronous motors only: Acceleration did not finish within reasonable time.


Extension: 10 Asynchronous motors only: Deceleration did not finish within reasonable time.


Extension: 11 Asynchronous motors only: Speed dropped to zero during ID run.


Extension: 14…16 Internal error. Contact your local ABB representative.

0018 CURR U2 MEAS(0x3184)

Measured offset error of U2 output phase current measurement is too great. (Offset value is updated during current calibration.)


Code Fault (fieldbus code), other information Cause What to do

Fault tracing 323

0019 CURR V2 MEAS(0x3185)

Measured offset error of V2 output phase current measurement is too great. (Offset value is updated during current calibration.)


0020 CURR W2 MEAS(0x3186)

Measured offset error of W2 output phase current measurement is too great. (Offset value is updated during current calibration.)


0021 STO1 LOST(0x8182)

Safe torque off function is active, i.e. safety circuit signal 1 connected between XSTO:1 and XSTO:3 is lost.

Check safety circuit connections. For more information, see appropriate drive hardware manual, description of parameter 30.07 (page 196), and Application guide - Safe torque off function for ACSM1, ACS850 and ACQ810 drives (3AFE68929814 [English]).

0022 STO2 LOST(0x8183)

Safe torque off function is active, i.e. safety circuit signal 2 connected between XSTO:2 and XSTO:4 is lost.

0023 STO MODE CHANGE(0xFF7A)

Error in changing Safe torque off supervision, i.e. parameter 30.07 Sto diagnostic setting could not be changed to value Fault.


0024 INTBOARD OVERTEMP(0x7182)

Interface board (between power unit and control unit) temperature has exceeded internal fault limit.

Let drive cool down.Check for excessive ambient temperature.Check for cooling fan failure.Check for obstructions in the air flow.Check the dimensioning and cooling of the cabinet.

0027 PU LOST(0x5400)

Connection between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit of the drive is lost.


0028 PS COMM(0x5480)

Communication errors detected between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit of the drive.


0030 EXTERNAL(0x9000)

Fault in external device. (This information is configured through one of programmable digital inputs.)

Check external devices for faults.Check parameter 30.01 External fault setting.

0031 SAFE TORQUE OFF(0xFF7A)Programmable fault: 30.07 Sto diagnostic

Safe torque off function is active, i.e. safety circuit signal(s) connected to connector XSTO is lost during start or run, or while drive is stopped and parameter 30.07 Sto diagnostic is set to Fault.

Check safety circuit connections. For more information, see appropriate drive hardware manual, and Application guide - Safe torque off function for ACSM1, ACS850 and ACQ810 drives (3AFE68929814 [English]).


324 Fault tracing

0032 OVERSPEED(0x7310)

Motor is turning faster than highest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum/maximum speed, insufficient braking torque or changes in load when using torque reference.

Check minimum/maximum speed settings, parameters 20.01 Maximum speed and 20.02 Minimum speed.Check adequacy of motor braking torque.Check applicability of torque control.

0036 LOCAL CTRL LOSS(0x5300)Programmable fault: 30.03 Local ctrl loss

Control panel or PC tool selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating.

Check PC tool or control panel connection.Check control panel connector.Replace control panel in mounting platform.

0037 NVMEM CORRUPTED(0x6320)

Drive internal faultNote: This fault cannot be reset.


0038 OPTIONCOMM LOSS(0x7000)

Communication between drive and option module (FIO-xx) is lost.

Check that option modules are properly connected to Slot 1 and (or) Slot 2.Check that option modules or Slot 1/2 connectors are not damaged. To determine whether module or connector is damaged: Test each module individually in Slot 1 and Slot 2.

0045 FIELDBUS COMM(0x7510)Programmable fault: 50.02 Comm loss func

Cyclical communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module or between PLC and fieldbus adapter module is lost.

Check status of fieldbus communication. See appropriate User’s Manual of fieldbus adapter module.Check settings of parameter group 50 Fieldbus.Check cable connections.Check if communication master is able to communicate.

0046 FB MAPPING FILE(0x6306)

Drive internal fault Contact your local ABB representative.

0047 MOTOR OVERTEMP(0x4310)Programmable fault: 31.01 Mot temp1 prot

Estimated motor temperature (based on motor thermal model) has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 31.04 Mot temp1 fltLim.


Measured motor temperature has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 31.04 Mot temp1 fltLim.


0049 AI SUPERVISION(0x8110)Programmable fault: 13.32 AI superv func

An analog input has reached limit defined by parameter 13.33 AI superv cw.

Check analog input source and connections. Check analog input minimum and maximum limit settings.

0055 TECH LIB(0x6382)

Resettable fault generated by a technology library.

Refer to the documentation of the technology library.


Fault tracing 325

0056 TECH LIB CRITICAL(0x6382)

Permanent fault generated by a technology library.

Refer to the documentation of the technology library.

0057 FORCED TRIP(0xFF90)

Generic Drive Communication Profile trip command.

Check PLC status.

0058 FB PAR ERROR(0x6320)

The drive does not have a functionality requested by PLC, or requested functionality has not been activated.

Check PLC programming.Check settings of parameter group 50 Fieldbus.

0059 STALL(0x7121)Programmable fault: 30.09 Stall function

Motor is operating in stall region because of e.g. excessive load or insufficient motor power.

Check motor load and drive ratings.Check fault function parameters.

0060 LOAD CURVE(0x2312)Programmable fault: 34.01 Overload func / 34.02 Underload func

Overload or underload limit has been exceeded.


0063 MOTOR TEMP2(0x4313)Programmable fault: 31.05 Mot temp2 prot

Estimated motor temperature (based on motor thermal model) has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 31.08 Mot temp2 fltLim.


Measured motor temperature has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 31.08 Mot temp2 fltLim.


0064 IGBT OVERLOAD(0x5482)

Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. This fault protects the IGBT(s) and can be activated by a short circuit in the motor cable.

Check motor cable.

0065 IGBT TEMP(0x4210)

Drive IGBT temperature is excessive.

Check ambient conditions.Check air flow and fan operation.Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.Check motor power against drive power.

0066 COOLING(0x4290)

Drive module temperature is excessive.

Check setting of parameter 95.03 Temp inu ambient.Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds 40 °C (104 °F), ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive. See appropriate Hardware Manual.Check drive module cooling air flow and fan operation.Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of drive module for dust pick-up. Clean whenever necessary.


326 Fault tracing

0070 TEMP MEAS FAILURE(0x4211)

Problem with internal temperature measurement of the drive.


0071 EFB COMM LOSS(0x7540)

Embedded fieldbus interface has been taken into use, and there is a communication break between the drive and the master station.

Check:• selection of the parameter which

enables/disables EFB communication (58.01 Protocol ena sel)

• EFB connection at terminal XD2D on the JCON board

• status of the fieldbus master (online/offline)

• settings of the communication supervision function (parameter 58.09 Comm loss action).

0201 T2 OVERLOAD(0x0201)

Firmware time level 2 overloadNote: This fault cannot be reset.











0205 A1 OVERLOAD(0x6100)

Application time level 1 faultNote: This fault cannot be reset.


0206 A2 OVERLOAD(0x6100)

Application time level 2 faultNote: This fault cannot be reset.


0207 A1 INIT FAULT(0x6100)

Application task creation faultNote: This fault cannot be reset.


0208 A2 INIT FAULT(0x6100)

Application task creation faultNote: This fault cannot be reset.


0209 STACK ERROR(0x6100)



0210 FPGA ERROR(0xFF61)



0301 UFF FILE READ(0x6300)

File read errorNote: This fault cannot be reset.



Fault tracing 327

0302 APPL DIR CREATION(0x6100)



0303 FPGA CONFIG DIR(0x6100)



0304 PU RATING ID(0x5483)



0305 RATING DATABASE(0x6100)



0306 LICENSING(0x6100)



0307 DEFAULT FILE(0x6100)



0308 APPLFILE PAR(0x6300)

Corrupted application fileNote: This fault cannot be reset.

Reload application.If fault is still active, contact your local ABB representative.

0309 APPL LOADING(0x6300)

Corrupted application fileNote: This fault cannot be reset.

Reload application.If fault is still active, contact your local ABB representative.

0310 USERSET LOAD(0xFF69)

Loading of user set is not successfully completed because:- requested user set does not exist- user set is not compatible with drive program- drive has been switched off during loading.

Reload.

0311 USERSET SAVE(0xFF69)

User set is not saved because of memory corruption.

Check the setting of parameter 95.01 Ctrl boardSupply.If the fault still occurs, contact your local ABB representative.

0312 UFF OVERSIZE(0x6300)

UFF file is too big. Contact your local ABB representative.

0313 UFF EOF(0x6300)

UFF file structure failure. Contact your local ABB representative.

0314 TECH LIB INTERFACE(0x6100)

Incompatible firmware interfaceNote: This fault cannot be reset.


0315 RESTORE FILE(0x630D)

Restoration of backed-up parameters failed.


0316 DAPS MISMATCH(0x5484)

Mismatch between JCU Control Unit firmware and power unit logic versions.



328 Fault tracing

0318 MENU HIDING Menu hiding file missing or corrupted.

Reload application.Contact your local ABB representative.

0401 PIPEFILL TOUT08.20 Pump fault word b7

Maximum allowed time for the Pipefill function exceeded.

Check the pump system.Check parameters 81.28….81.35.

0402 MIN FLOW08.20 Pump fault word b0

Measured flow below minimum limit.

Check the pump system for reasons such as leaks that might cause a loss of measured flow.Check parameters 81.18….81.24.

0403 MAX FLOW08.20 Pump fault word b1

Measured flow above maximum limit.

Check the pump system for reasons that might cause an increase in measured flow.Check parameters 81.18….81.24.

0404 LOW PRESSURE08.20 Pump fault word b2



0405 HIGH PRESSURE08.20 Pump fault word b3



0406 VERY LOW PRESS08.20 Pump fault word b4



0407 VERY HIGH PRESS08.20 Pump fault word b5



0408 MAX CLEANINGS08.20 Pump fault word b6

Maximum number of cleaning sequences exceeded (see parameter group 82 Pump cleaning).

Check for reasons that might have had an increasing effect on the monitored signal (parameter 82.09). For example, increased viscosity of the fluid, or faulty pump bearings may increase the current drawn by the motor, and trigger the cleaning sequence more frequently.

0409 MF MASTER LOST08.20 Pump fault word b8

The drive cannot detect a master on the drive-to-drive link, and is not itself allowed to become master.

Check that there are drives on the drive-to-drive link that are allowed to become master.Check the wiring of the drive-to-drive link.

0410 MF NO SHARED DATA08.20 Pump fault word b9

Shared signals not received.

Check that at least one drive has signal sharing enabled (parameter 76.12).Check the status, communication settings and wiring of the drive that is sharing its signals.


Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 329

9Control through the embedded fieldbus interface

What this chapter containsThe chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network (fieldbus) using the embedded fieldbus interface.

330 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface

System overviewThe drive can be connected to an external control system through a serial communication link using either a fieldbus adapter or the embedded fieldbus interface.

The embedded fieldbus interface supports the Modbus RTU protocol. The drive control program can receive and send cyclic data from and to the Modbus master on 10 ms time level. The actual communication speed depends on other factors as well, such as the baud rate (a parameter setting in the drive).

The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources, for example, digital and analogue inputs.

XD2D

...

1

T

Termination ONJCU Drive 1

B

2A

3B

GN

D

XD2D

1

Termination OFFJCU Drive 2

B

2A

3B

GN

DT

XD2D

1

T

Termination ONJCU Drive n

B

2A

3B

GN

D

Process I/O (cyclic)

Service messages (acyclic)

Data flowControl word (CW)

ReferencesStatus word (SW)

Actual values

Parameter R/Wrequests/responses

Fieldbus controller

Fieldbus


Connecting the fieldbus to the driveConnect the fieldbus to terminal XD2D on the JCON board of the drive. See the appropriate Hardware Manual for more information on the connection, chaining and termination of the link.

XD2D is the connection point for a drive-to-drive link, a daisy-chained RS-485 transmission line with one master and multiple slaves.


Setting up the embedded fieldbus interfaceSet the drive up for the embedded fieldbus communication with the parameters shown in the table below. The Setting for fieldbus control column gives either the value to use or the default value. The Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter or instructs in its use.

The new settings will take effect when the drive is powered up the next time, or when parameter 58.10 Refresh settings is activated.

Parameter Setting forfieldbus control

Function/Information

COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION50.15 Fb cw used P.02.36 (default) Selects the address of the Fieldbus control

word in use (02.36 EFB main cw).58.01 Protocol ena

selModbus RTU Initializes embedded fieldbus communication.

EMBEDDED MODBUS CONFIGURATION58.03 Node address 1 (default) Node address. There may not be two nodes

with the same node address online.58.04 Baud rate 9600 (default) Defines the communication speed of the link.

Use the same setting as in the master station. 58.05 Parity 8 none 1 (default) Selects the parity and stop bit setting. Use the

same setting as in the master station.58.06 Control profile ABB Enhanced

(default)Selects the communication profile used by the drive. See section Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface on page 336.

58.07 Comm loss t out

600 (default) Defines the timeout limit for the EFB communication monitoring.

58.08 Comm loss mode

None (default) Enables/disables EFB communication loss monitoring and defines the means for resetting the counter of the communication loss delay.

58.09 Comm loss action

None (default) Defines the drive operation after the EFB communication loss monitoring awakes.

58.10 Refresh settings

Done (default) Refreshes the settings of parameters 58.01…58.09.

58.30 Transmit delay 0 (default) Defines the delay time which the slave waits until it sends a response.

58.31 Ret app errors Yes (default) Selects whether the drive returns Modbus exception codes or not.

58.32 Word order LSW MSW (default) Defines the order of the data words in the Modbus frame.


58.35…58.58

Data I/O 1…Data I/O 24

0 (default) Defines the address of the drive parameter which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to the register address corresponding to Modbus In/Out parameters. Select the parameters that you want to read or write through the Modbus I/O words.




Setting the drive control parametersAfter the embedded fieldbus interface has been set up, check and adjust the drive control parameters listed in the table below. The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value or values to use when the embedded fieldbus signal is the desired source or destination for that particular drive control signal. The Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.



CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION10.01 Ext1 start func FBA Selects fieldbus as the source for the start

and stop commands when EXT1 is selected as the active control location.

10.04 Ext2 start func FBA Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT2 is selected as the active control location.

10.10 Fault reset sel P.02.36.08 Selects the fault reset bit of signal 02.36 EFB main cw as the source for the fault reset command of the drive.

Note: To start and stop the drive through control location EXT1, set parameter 10.01 to FBA and keep parameter 12.01 to its default value (C.FALSE).

SPEED REFERENCE SELECTION21.01 Speed ref1 sel EFB ref1 or

EFB ref2Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as the speed reference ref1 of the drive.

21.02 Speed ref2 sel EFB ref1 orEFB ref2

Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as the speed reference ref2 of the drive.

Note: To control the drive speed with the Embedded fieldbus reference REF1, set parameter 21.01 to EFB ref1 and keep parameter 12.01 to its default value (C.FALSE).

REFERENCE SCALING50.04 FBA ref1 modesel

Raw dataSpeed

Defines the fieldbus reference REF1 scaling. Selects also the fieldbus actual signal act1 when set to Speed.

50.05 FBA ref2 modesel

Raw dataSpeed

Defines the fieldbus reference REF2 scaling. Selects also the fieldbus actual signal act2 when set to Speed.

ACTUAL VALUE ACT1 AND ACT 2 SELECTION (if 50.04 or 50.05 has value Raw data).50.06 FBA act1 tr src Any Selects the source for fieldbus actual value

act1 when parameter 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel is set to Raw data.


50.07 FBA act2 tr src Any Selects the source for fieldbus actual value act2 when parameter 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel is set to Raw data.

SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS16.07 Param save Save (restores to

Done)Saves parameter value changes (including those made through fieldbus control) to permanent memory.




Basics of the embedded fieldbus interfaceThe cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16-bit data words (with the ABB Drives profile or DCU 16-bit profile) or 32-bit data words (with the DCU 32-bit profile).

The diagram below illustrates the operation of the fieldbus interface. The signals transferred in the cyclic communication are explained further below the diagram.

012

58.06

SEL

CWREF1REF2

SWACT1ACT2

I/O 1I/O 2I/O 3

…I/O 24

02.36 EFB main cw02.38 EFB main ref102.39 EFB main ref2

02.37 EFB main swActual 1 3)

Actual 2 3)

Par. 01.01…99.99

1) See also other parameters which can be controlled by the fieldbus.2) Data conversion if parameter 58.06 Control profile is (0) ABB Classic or (1) ABB Enhanced. See section About the EFB communication profiles on page 338.3) See parameter 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel and 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel for the actual value selections.

1)

Fieldbus network

DATA I/O selection

Group 58

EXT1/2 Start func

10.0110.04

Speed REF1 sel

21.01

Speed REF2 sel

21.02

Cyclic communication

Acyclic communication

2)

58.06

SEL2)

Parameter table

0123

58.06

SEL0

123

2)


Control word and Status word

The Fieldbus control word (CW) is a 16-bit or 32-bit packed boolean word. It is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control word. In the embedded fieldbus communication, the CW is written to drive parameter 02.36 EFB main cw from where it can be used in the control of the drive. The Fieldbus CW is either written to the drive Control word as it is, or the data is converted. See section About the EFB communication profiles on page 338.

The Fieldbus status word (SW) is a 16-bit or 32- bit packed boolean word. It contains status information from the drive to the fieldbus controller. In the embedded fieldbus communication, the SW is read from drive parameter 02.37 EFB main sw. The Drive status word is either written to the fieldbus SW as it is or the data is converted. See section About the EFB communication profiles on page 338.

References

Fieldbus references (REF1 and REF2) are 16-bit or 32-bit signed integers. The contents of each reference word can be used as the speed, frequency, or process reference. In the embedded fieldbus communication, the REF1 and REF2 are written to 02.38 EFB main ref1 and 02.39 EFB main ref2 from where you can use them in the control of the drive. The references are either written to the drive references as they are, or the values are scaled. See section About the EFB communication profiles on page 338.

Actual values

Fieldbus actual signals (ACT1 and ACT2) are 16-bit or 32-bit signed integers. They convey selected drive parameter values from the drive to the master. The drive values are either written to the fieldbus actual values as they are, or the values are scaled. See section About the EFB communication profiles on page 338.

Data inputs/outputs

Data input/output (I/O) are 16-bit or 32-bit words containing selected drive parameter values. Parameters 58.35 Data I/O 1 … 58.58 Data I/O 24 define the addresses from which the master either reads data (input) or to which it writes data (output).


About the EFB communication profilesA communication profile defines the rules for data transfer in between the drive and the fieldbus master, for example: • if packed boolean words are converted and how • if the signal values are scaled and how• how the drive register addresses are mapped for the fieldbus master.

You can configure the drive to receive and send messages according to one of the four profiles: the ABB Drives classic profile, ABB Drives enhanced profile, 16-bit DCU profile or 32-bit DCU profile. For either one of the ABB Drives profile, the embedded fieldbus interface of the drive converts the fieldbus data to and from the native data used in the drive. Both DCU profiles are transparent, that is, no data conversion is done. The figure below illustrates the effect of the profile selection.

Profile selection

Communication profile selection with parameter 58.06 Control profile are:• (0) ABB Classic• (1) ABB Enhanced• (2) DCU 16-bit• (2) DCU 32-bit

58.06

SELData

conv. & scaling

0123

Fieldbus Drive


ABB Drives classic profile and ABB Drives enhanced profile

Control word for the ABB Drives profiles

The table below shows the contents of the Fieldbus control word for both ABB Drives profiles. The embedded fieldbus interface converts this word to the form in which it is used in the drive (02.36 EFB main cw). The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profiles on page 343.

Bit Name Value STATE/Description0 OFF1_

CONTROL1 Proceed to READY TO OPERATE.0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp. Proceed to

OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.

1 OFF2_CONTROL

1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).0 Emergency OFF, coast to stop.

Proceed to OFF2 ACTIVE, proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.

2 OFF3_CONTROL

1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).0 Emergency stop, stop within time defined by drive

parameter. Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.Warning: Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.

3 INHIBIT_OPERATION

1 Proceed to OPERATION ENABLED.Note: Run enable signal must be active; see the drive documentation. If the drive is set to receive the Run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the signal.

0 Inhibit operation. Proceed to OPERATION INHIBITED.4 RAMP_OUT_

ZERO1 Normal operation. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION

GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED.0 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Drive

ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function.

Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED.

0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).6 RAMP_IN_

ZERO1 Normal operation. Proceed to OPERATING.

Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.

0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.


7 RESET 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.

0 Continue normal operation.8, 9 Reserved.10 REMOTE_

CMD1 Fieldbus control enabled.0 Control word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control

word and Reference.Control word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control enabled. Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked.

11 EXT_CTRL_LOC

1 Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if control location is parameterized to be selected from fieldbus.

0 Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if control location is parameterized to be selected from fieldbus.

12 …15

Reserved

Bit Name Value STATE/Description


Status word for the ABB Drives profiles

The table below shows the Fieldbus status word for both ABB Drives profiles. The embedded fieldbus interface converts the Drive status word (02.37 EFB main sw) to this form for the transfer in the fieldbus. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profiles on page 343.

Bit Name Value STATE/Description0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON.

0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE.

0 OFF1 ACTIVE.2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED.

0 OPERATION INHIBITED.3 TRIPPED 1 FAULT.

0 No fault.4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive.

0 OFF2 ACTIVE.5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 inactive.

0 OFF3 ACTIVE.6 SWC_ON_

INHIB1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.0 –

7 ALARM 1 Warning/Alarm.0 No warning/alarm.

8 AT_SETPOINT

1 OPERATING. Actual value equals Reference = is within tolerance limits, i.e. in speed control, speed error is 10% max. of nominal motor speed.

0 Actual value differs from Reference = is outside tolerance limits.

9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2).0 Drive control location: LOCAL.

10 ABOVE_LIMIT

1 Actual frequency or speed equals or exceeds supervision limit (set by drive parameter). Valid in both directions of rotation.

0 Actual frequency or speed within supervision limit.11 EXT_CTRL_

LOC1 External Control Location EXT2 selected.0 External Control Location EXT1 selected.

12 EXT_RUN_ 1 External Run Enable signal received.ENABLE 0 No External Run Enable signal received.

13 … 14

Reserved


15 1 Communication error detected by fieldbus adapter module.

0 Fieldbus adapter communication OK.

Bit Name Value STATE/Description


State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profiles

The diagram below shows the state transitions in the drive when the drive has either one of the ABB Drives profiles in use and the drive is configured to follow the commands of the embedded Fieldbus control word. The upper case texts refer to the states which are used in the tables representing the Fieldbus control and status words. See sections Control word for the ABB Drives profiles on page 339 and Status word for the ABB Drives profiles on page 341.

MAINS OFF

Power ON (CW Bit0=0)

(SW Bit6=1)

(SW Bit0=0)

from any state

(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)

(SW Bit1=1)

n(f)=0 / I=0

(SW Bit2=0)

A B C D

(CW Bit3=0)

operationinhibited

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)

(SW Bit1=0)

(SW Bit0=1)

(CW Bit3=1and

SW Bit12=1)

C D

(CW Bit5=0)

(SW Bit2=1)

(SW Bit5=0)

from any state from any stateEmergency StopOFF3 (CW Bit2=0)

n(f)=0 / I=0

Emergency OFFOFF2 (CW Bit1=0)

(SW Bit4=0)

B

B C D

(CW Bit4=0)

(CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)

(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)

D

(CW Bit6=0)

A

C(CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)

(SW Bit8=1)D

from any state

Fault

(SW Bit3=1)

(CW Bit7=1)

(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)

(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111and SW Bit12=1)

CW = Control wordSW = Status word

n = SpeedI = Input Current

RFG = Ramp FunctionGenerator

f = Frequency

ABB Drivescommunication profile

SWITCH-ON INHIBITED

NOT READY TO SWITCH ON

READY TO SWITCH ON

READY TO OPERATE

OPERATION INHIBITED

OFF1 ACTIVE

OPERATION ENABLED

RFG: OUTPUT ENABLED

RFG: ACCELERATOR ENABLED

OPERATION

OFF2 ACTIVE

FAULT

OFF3 ACTIVE

state

condition

rising edgethe bitof


References for the ABB Drives profiles

The ABB Drives profiles support the use of two Fieldbus references, REF1 and REF2. The references are 16-bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A negative reference is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the corresponding positive reference.

The fieldbus references are scaled before they are written into signals 02.38 EFB main ref1 or 02.39 EFB main ref2 for the use in the drive. Parameters 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel and 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel define the scaling and possible use of the fieldbus reference REF1 and REF2 as follows:• If you select value Speed, the fieldbus reference can be used as a speed

reference and it is scaled as follows:

• If you select value Raw data, the fieldbus reference is scaled as shown in the table below.

Fieldbus reference REF1 or REF2 [integer]

Corresponding speed reference in the drive [rpm]

20 000 value of parameter 19.01 Speed scaling0 0

-20 000 -(value of parameter 19.01 Speed scaling)

Fieldbus reference REF1 or REF2 [integer]

Corresponding reference in the drive [rpm]

32 767 k × 0.5(k = value of parameter 58.11)

0 0-32 768 k × -0.5

(k = value of parameter 58.11)


Actual values for the ABB Drives profiles

Both the ABB Drives classic profile and ABB Drives enhanced profile support the use of two fieldbus actual values, ACT1 and ACT2. The actual values are 16-bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A negative value is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the corresponding positive value.

The drive signals are scaled before written into fieldbus actual values, ACT1 and ACT2. Parameters 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel and 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel both select the drive actual signals and define the scaling as follows:• If you select value Speed, the drive actual signal 01.01 Motor speed rpm is scaled

and written to the fieldbus actual value. The scaling is as follows:

• If you select value Raw data, the drive parameters 50.06 FBA act1 tr src and 50.07 FBA act2 tr src select the drive values for fieldbus actual value ACT1 and ACT2. The table below shows the scaling.

Value of 01.01 Motor speed rpm [rpm] Corresponding fieldbus actual value ACT1 or ACT2 [integer]

value of parameter 19.01 Speed scaling 20 0000 0

-(value of parameter 19.01 Speed scaling) -20 000

Drive value Corresponding fieldbus actual value ACT1 or ACT2 [integer]

k × 0.5(k = value of parameter 58.11)

32 767

0 0k × -0.5

(k = value of parameter 58.11)-32 768


Modbus register addresses for the ABB Drives classic profile

The table below shows the Modbus register addresses for the drive data with the ABB Drives classic profile. This profile provides a converted 16-bit access to the drive data.

Note: Only the least significant 16-bits of drive 32-bit control and status words can be accessed.

Register Address Register Data (16-bit)400001 Fieldbus control word (CW). See section Control word for the ABB

Drives profiles on page 339.400002 Fieldbus reference 1 (REF1) 400003 Fieldbus reference 2 (REF2400004 Fieldbus status word (SW). See section Status word for the ABB

Drives profiles on page 341.400005 Fieldbus actual value 1 (ACT1)400006 Fieldbus actual value 2 (ACT2)400007 Fieldbus data in/out 1 (Drive parameter 58.35 Data I/O 1) … …

400030 Fieldbus data in/out 24 (Drive Parameter 58.58 Data I/O 24)400101…409999 Register address (16-bit drive parameter) = 400000 + 100 × group +

indexExample: Modbus register address to drive parameter 03.18 is 400000 + 100 × 3 + 18 = 400318Drive parameter access (32-bit drive parameter) = 420000 + 200 × group + 2 × indexExample: Modbus register address to drive parameter 01.27420000 + 200 × 1 + 2 × 27 = 420254


Modbus register addresses for the ABB Drives enhanced profile

Register address Register data (16-bit words)400001 Fieldbus control word (CW). See section Control word for the ABB Drives

profiles on page 339. 400002 Fieldbus reference 1 (REF1).400003 Fieldbus reference 2 (REF2400004 Fieldbus data in/out 1 (Drive parameter 58.35 Data I/O 1) … …

400015 Fieldbus data in/out 12 (Drive parameter 58.46 Data I/O 12)400051 Fieldbus status word (SW). See section Status word for the ABB Drives

profiles on page 341.400052 Fieldbus actual value 1 (ACT1)400053 Fieldbus actual value 2 (ACT2)40054 Fieldbus data in/out 13 (Drive parameter 58.47 Data I/O 12)… …

40065 Fieldbus data in/out 24 (Drive parameter 58.58 Data I/O 24400101…409999 Register address (16-bit drive parameter) = 400000 + 100 × group +



DCU 16-bit profile

Control and Status words for the DCU 16-bit profile

When the DCU 16-bit profile is in use, the embedded fieldbus interface writes the Fieldbus control word as is to the Drive control word bits 0 to15 (parameter 02.36 EFB main cw). Bits 16 to 32 of the Drive control word are not in use.

Status word for the DCU 16-bit profile

When the DCU 16-bit profile is in use, the embedded fieldbus interface writes the Drive status word bits 0 to 15 (parameter 02.37 EFB main sw) to the Fieldbus status (SW) word as is. Bits 16 to 32 of the Drive status word are not in use.

State transition diagram for the DCU 16-bit profile

See section State diagram on page 365 in chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter.

References for the DCU 16-bit profile

See section References for the ABB Drives profiles on page 344.

Actual signals for the DCU 16-bit profile

See section Actual values for the ABB Drives profiles on page 345.


Modbus register addresses for the DCU 16-bit profile

The table below shows the Modbus register addresses and data with the DCU16-bit communication profile.

Note: Only the least significant 16-bits of the drive 32-bit control and status words can be accessed.

Register address Register data (16-bit)400001 Control word (LSW of 02.36 EFB main cw)400002 Reference 1 (02.38 EFB main ref1)400003 Reference 2 (02.39 EFB main ref2)400004 Data in/out 1 (Drive parameter 58.35 Data I/O 1) … …

400015 Data in/out 12 (Drive parameter 58.46 Data I/O 12)400051 Status word (LSW of 02.37 EFB main sw)400052 Actual value 1 (selected by parameter 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel)400053 Actual value 2 (selected by parameter 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel)400054 Data in/out 13 (drive parameter 58.47 Data I/O 13)… …

400065 Data in/out 24 (drive parameter 58.58 Data I/O 24)400101…409999 Register address (16-bit drive parameter) = 400000 + 100 × group +



DCU 32-bit profile

Control and Status words for the DCU 32-bit profile

When the DCU 32-bit profile is in use, the embedded fieldbus interface writes the Fieldbus control word as is to the Drive control word (parameter 02.36 EFB main cw).

Status word for the DCU 32-bit profile

When the DCU 32-bit profile is in use, the embedded fieldbus interface writes the Drive status word (parameter 02.37 EFB main sw) as is to the Fieldbus status word (SW).

State transition diagram for the DCU 32-bit profile

See section State diagram on page 365 in chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter.


References for the DCU 32-bit profile

The DCU 32-bit profile supports the use of two fieldbus references, REF1 and REF2. The references are 32-bit values consisting of two 16-bit words. The MSW (Most significant word) is the integer part and the LSW (Least significant word) the fractional part of the value. A negative reference is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the corresponding positive value of the integer part (MSW).

The fieldbus references are written as is into the drive reference values (02.38 EFB main ref1 or 02.39 EFB main ref2). Parameters 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel and 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel define the reference types (speed or torque) as follows:• If you select value Raw data, the fieldbus reference type or possible use is not

selected. The value is freely usable as a speed or torque reference in the drive. The table below clarifies the relation between the fieldbus reference and drive reference (no scaling).

1) If the reference value is used as the speed reference, it will be the motor speed in rpm. If the reference value is used as the torque reference, it will be the motor torque in percent of the motor nominal torque.

• If you select value Speed, the fieldbus reference can be used as a speed reference in the drive. The table below clarifies the relation between the fieldbus reference and drive reference (no scaling).

Actual signals for the DCU 32-bit profileThe DCU 32-bit profile supports the use of two fieldbus actual values ACT1 and ACT2. The fieldbus actual values are 32-bit values consisting of two 16-bit words. The MSW (Most significant word) is the integer part and the LSW (Least significant word) the fractional part of the 32-bit value. A negative reference is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the corresponding positive value of the integer part (MSW).

Parameters 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel and 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel select the drive actual signals for the fieldbus actual values ACT1 and ACT2 respectively as follows:• If you select value Raw data, the drive parameters 50.06 FBA act1 tr src and

50.07 FBA act2 tr src select the drive parameters for the fieldbus actual value

Fieldbus reference REF1 or REF2 [integer and fractional part]

Corresponding reference in the drive [rpm or %] 1)

32767.65535 32767.655350 0

-32768.65535 -32768.65535

Fieldbus reference REF1 or REF2 [integer and fractional part]

Corresponding speed reference in the drive [rpm]

32767.65535 32767.655350 0

-32768.65535 -32768.65535


ACT1 and ACT2 respectively. The table below clarifies the relation between the value of drive parameter and fieldbus actual value (no scaling).

• If you select value Speed, the drive parameter 01.01 Motor speed rpm will be written to fieldbus actual value. The table below clarifies the relation between the value of drive parameter value and the fieldbus actual value (no scaling).

Value of the selected drive signal Corresponding fieldbus actual value ACT1 or ACT2 [integer and fractional

part]32767.65535 32767.65535

0 0-32768.65535 -32768.65535

Value of the selected drive signal Corresponding fieldbus actual value ACT1 or ACT2 [integer and fractional

part]32767.65535 32767.65535

0 0-32768.65535 -32768.65535


Modbus register addresses for the DCU 32-bit profile

The table below shows the Modbus register addresses and data with the DCU 32-bit profile. This profile provides native 32-bit access to the drive data.

Register address Register data (16-bit)400001 Control word (02.36 EFB main cw) – Least significant 16-bits400002 Control word (02.36 EFB main cw) – Most significant 16-bits400003 Reference 1 (02.38 EFB main ref1) – Least significant 16-bits400004 Reference 1 (02.38 EFB main ref1) – Most significant 16-bits400005 Reference 2 (02.39 EFB main ref2) – Least significant 16-bits400006 Reference 2 (02.39 EFB main ref2) – Most significant 16-bits400007 Data in/out 1 (Drive parameter 58.35 Data I/O 1) ... ...400018 Data in/out 12 (Drive parameter 58.46 Data I/O 12)400051 Status word (LSW of 02.37 EFB main sw) – Least significant 16-bits400052 Status word (MSW of 02.37 EFB main sw) – Most significant 16-bits400053 Actual value 1 (selected by parameter 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel) – Least

significant 16-bits400054 Actual value 1 (selected by parameter 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel) – Most

significant 16-bits400055 Actual value 2 (selected by parameter 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel) – Least

significant 16-bits400056 Actual value 2 (selected by parameter 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel) – Most

significant 16-bits400057 Data in/out 13 (Drive parameter 58.47 Data I/O 13)… …400068 Data in/out 24 (Drive parameter 58.58 Data I/O 24400101…409999 Register address (16-bit drive parameter) = 400000 + 100 × group +



Modbus function codesTable below shows the Modbus function codes supported by the embedded fieldbus interface.

Code Function name Description0x03 Read Holding Registers Reads the contents of a contiguous block of holding

registers in a server device.0x06 Write Single Register Writes a single holding register in a server device.0x08 Diagnostics Provides a series of tests for checking the

communication between the master and the slave devices, or for checking various internal error conditions within the slave. The following subcodes are supported:00 Return Query Data:The data passed in the request data field is to be returned in the response. The entire response message should be identical to the request.01 Restart Communications Option:The serial line port of the slave device must be initialized and restarted, and all of its communication event counters cleared. If the port is in the Listen Only mode, no response is returned. If the port is not in the Listen Only mode, a normal response is returned before the restart.04 Force Listen Only Mode:Forces the addressed slave device to the Listen Only mode. This isolates it from the other devices on the network, allowing them to continue communicating without interruption from the addressed remote device. No response is returned. The only function that will be processed after this mode is entered is the Restart Communications Option function (subcode 01).

0x10 Write Multiple Registers Writes the contents of a contiguous block of holding registers in a server device.

0x17 Read/Write Multiple Registers

Writes the contents of a contiguous block of holding registers in a server device, then reads the contents of a contiguous block of holding registers (same or different than those written) in a server device.

0x2B/0x0E Encapsulated InterfaceTransport / Read Device Identification

Allows reading of identification and other information of the server. Parameter "Read Device ID code" supports one access type:01: Request to get the basic device identification. Returns ABB,ACQ810.


Modbus exception codesTable below shows the Modbus exception codes supported by the embedded fieldbus interface.

Code Name Description0x01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION The function code received in the query is not an

allowable action for the server.0x02 ILLEGAL DATA

ADDRESSThe data address received in the query is not an allowable address for the server.

0x03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query in not an allowable value for the server.

0x04 SLAVE DEVICE FAILURE

An unrecoverable error occurred while the server was attempting to perform the requested action.

0x06 SLAVE DEVICE BUSY The server is engaged in processing a long-duration program command.


Control through a fieldbus adapter 357

10Control through a fieldbus adapter

What this chapter containsThe chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network (fieldbus).

358 Control through a fieldbus adapter

System overviewThe drive can be connected to a fieldbus controller via a fieldbus adapter module. The adapter module is installed into drive Slot 2.

The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources, for example digital and analog inputs.

Fieldbus adapters are available for various serial communication protocols, for example• DeviceNet (FDNA-xx adapter)• EtherNet/IP (FENA-xx adapter)• LONWORKS® (FLON-xx adapter)• Modbus (FSCA-xx adapter)• PROFIBUS DP (FPBA-xx adapter)

Data Flow

Process I/O (cyclic)

Process I/O (cyclic) or Service messages (acyclic)

Control Word (CW)References

Fieldbus controller

Parameter R/W requests/responses

Status Word (SW)Actual values

Fieldbus

Other devices

ACQ810

Type Fxxx fieldbus adapter in Slot 2


Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter moduleBefore configuring the drive for fieldbus control, the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the User’s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module.

The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module is activated by setting parameter 50.01 FBA enable to Enable. The adapter-specific parameters must also be set. See the table below.



COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION AND SUPERVISION (see also page 229)

50.01 FBA enable (1) Enable Initialises communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module.

50.02 Comm loss func

(0) No(1) Fault(2) Spd ref Safe(3) Last speed

Selects how the drive reacts upon a fieldbus communication break.

50.03 Comm loss t out

0.3…6553.5 s Defines the time between communication break detection and the action selected with parameter 50.02 Comm loss func.

50.04 FBA ref1 modesel and 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel

(0) Raw data(2) Speed

Defines the fieldbus reference scaling.When Raw data is selected, see also parameters 50.06…50.11.

ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION (see also page 231)

51.01 FBA type – Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter module.

51.02 FBA par2 These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more information, see the User’s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module. Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily used.

• • •51.26 FBA par26

51.27 FBA par refresh

(0) Done(1) Refresh

Validates any changed adapter module configuration parameter settings.

51.28 Par table ver – Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive.

51.29 Drive type code

– Displays the drive type code of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive.


After the module configuration parameters have been set, the drive control parameters (see section Drive control parameters below) must be checked and adjusted when necessary.

The new settings will take effect when the drive is powered up the next time (before powering off the drive, wait at least 1 minute), or when parameter 51.27 FBA par refresh is activated.

51.30 Mapping file ver

– Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file revision stored in the memory of the drive.

51.31 D2FBA comm sta

– Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module communication.

51.32 FBA comm sw ver

– Displays the common program revision of the adapter module.

51.33 FBA appl sw ver

– Displays the application program revision of the adapter module.

Note: In the User’s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module, the parameter group number is 1 or A for parameters 51.01…51.26.

TRANSMITTED DATA SELECTION (see also page 232)

52.01 FBA data in1 … 52.12 FBA data in12

4…614…16101…9999

Defines the data transmitted from drive to fieldbus controller.Note: If the selected data is 32 bits long, two parameters are reserved for the transmission.

53.01 FBA data out1 … 53.12 FBA data out12

1…311…131001…9999

Defines the data transmitted from fieldbus controller to drive.Note: If the selected data is 32 bits long, two parameters are reserved for the transmission.

Note: In the User’s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module, the parameter group number is 2 or B for parameters 52.01…52.12 and 3 or C for parameters 53.01…53.12.




Drive control parametersThe Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The Function/ Information column gives a description of the parameter.



CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION

10.01 Ext1 start func (3) FBA Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT1 is selected as the active control location.

10.04 Ext2 start func (3) FBA Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT2 is selected as the active control location.

21.01 Speed ref1 sel

(3) FBA ref1(4) FBA ref2

Fieldbus reference REF1 or REF2 is used as speed reference.

SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS

16.07 Param save (0) Done(1) Save

Saves parameter value changes (including those made through fieldbus control) to permanent memory.


The fieldbus control interfaceThe cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16/32-bit input and output data words. The drive supports at the maximum the use of 12 data words (16 bits) in each direction.

Data transmitted from the drive to the fieldbus controller is defined by parameters 52.01 FBA data in1 … 52.12 FBA data in12. The data transmitted from the fieldbus controller to the drive is defined by parameters 53.01 FBA data out1 … 53.12 FBA data out12.

DATAOUT 2)

4)123…12

DATAIN 2)

5)123…12

FBA MAIN SWFBA ACT1FBA ACT2

Par. 01.01…99.99

FBA MAIN CWFBA REF1FBA REF2

Par. 10.01…99.99

1) See also other parameters which can be controlled by the fieldbus.2) The maximum number of used data words is protocol-dependent.3) Profile/instance selection parameters. Fieldbus module specific parameters. For more information, see the User’s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module.4) With DeviceNet, the control part is transmitted directly.5) With DeviceNet, the actual value part is transmitted directly.

3)

3)

Parameter table

4)

5)

1)

Fieldbus network

Fieldbus adapter

Fiel

dbus

-spe

cific

inte

rface

Profile selection

Profile selection

DATA OUT selection

Group 53

DATA IN selection

Group 52

FBA ProfileEXT1/2

Start func

10.0110.04

Speed ref. selection

21.01

Cyclic communication

Acyclic communicationSee the manual of the fieldbus adapter module.


The Control Word and the Status Word

The Control Word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control Word.

The Status Word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller.

Actual values

Actual values (ACT) are 16/32-bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive.

FBA communication profileThe FBA communication profile is a state machine model which describes the general states and state transitions of the drive. The State diagram on page 365 presents the most important states (including the FBA profile state names). The FBA Control Word (parameter 02.24 – see page 117) commands the transitions between these states and the FBA Status Word (parameter 02.26 – see page 118) indicates the status of the drive.

Fieldbus adapter module profile (selected by adapter module parameter) defines how the control word and status word are transmitted in a system which consists of fieldbus controller, fieldbus adapter module and drive. With transparent modes, control word and status word are transmitted without any conversion between the fieldbus controller and the drive. With other profiles (e.g. PROFIdrive for FPBA-01, AC/DC drive for FDNA-01, and ABB Drives profile for all fieldbus adapter modules) fieldbus adapter module converts the fieldbus-specific control word to the FBA communication profile and status word from FBA communication profile to the fieldbus-specific status word.

For descriptions of other profiles, see the User’s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module.


Fieldbus references

References (FBA REF) are 16/32-bit signed integers. A negative reference (indicating reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the corresponding positive reference value. The contents of each reference word can be used as torque or speed reference.

When torque or speed reference scaling is selected (by parameter 50.04 FBA ref1 modesel / 50.05 FBA ref2 modesel), the fieldbus references are 32-bit integers. The value consists of a 16-bit integer value and a 16-bit fractional value. The speed/torque reference scaling is as follows:

Reference Scaling NotesSpeed reference FBA REF / 65536

(value in rpm)Final reference is limited by parameters 20.01 Maximum speed, 20.02 Minimum speed and 21.09 SpeedRef min abs.

Torque reference FBA REF / 65536(value in %)

Final reference is limited by torque limit parameters 20.06…20.10.


State diagram

The following presents the state diagram for the FBA communication profile. For other profiles, see the User’s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module.

MAINS OFF

Power ON

from any state

FBACommunication

Profile

(FBA SW Bit 0 = 1)

n(f)=0 / I=0

(FBA SW Bit 6 = 1)

(FBA CW Bit 16 = 1)

(FBA CW Bit 0 = 1)

OFF1 (FBA CW Bit 4 = 1

OFF1ACTIVE

C D

(FBA CW Bit 13 = 0)

RUNNING (FBA SW Bit 3 = 1)

(FBA SW Bit 5 = 1)

from any state

from any state

Emergency StopOFF3 (FBA CW Bit 3 = 1

n(f)=0 / I=0

OFF3ACTIVE

Emergency OFFOFF2 (FBA CW Bit 2 = 1

(FBA SW Bit 4 = 1)OFF2ACTIVE

RFG: OUTPUTENABLED

RFG: ACCELERATORENABLED

B

B C D

(FBA CW Bit 12 = 0)

D

(FBA CW Bit 14 = 0)

A

C

FBA CW = Fieldbus Control WordFBA SW = Fieldbus Status Wordn = SpeedI = Input Current

(FBA SW Bit 8 = 1)

RFG = Ramp Function Generatorf = Frequency

D

from any state

Fault

(FBA SW Bit 16 = 1)

(FBA CW Bit 8 = 1)

STARTINHIBITED

(FBA CW Bits 7 = 1)

READY TOSTART

from any state

and FBA CW Bit 0 = 1)



RUNDISABLEFAULT

OPERATING

(FBA SW Bit 1 = 0)

(FBA CW Bit 7 = 0)

(FBA CW = xxxx xxxx xxxx xxx0 xxxx 1xxx 1xxx xx10)

(FBA CW = xxxx xxxx xxxx xxx0 xxx0 1xxx 1xxx xx10)

(FBA CW = xxxx xxxx xxxx xxx0 xx00 1xxx 1xxx xx10)

(FBA CW = xxxx xxxx xxxx xxx0 x000 1xxx 1xxx xx10)

E

E

Par. 10.19 = 1

Par. 10.19 = 0


Control block diagrams 367

11Control block diagrams

What this chapter containsThe chapter contains a graphical representation of the control program.

368 Control block diagrams

19.0

3 M

otor

spe

ed fi

lt

06.0

3 bi

t 1 Z

ero

spee

d

19.0

6 Ze

ro s

peed

lim

it

006

.03

bit 0

Spe

ed a

ct n

eg

19.0

8 A

bove

spe

ed li

mit

06.0

3 bi

t 2 A

bove

lim

it

06.0

3 bi

t 3 A

t set

poin

t

19.1

0 Sp

eed

win

dow

t

19.0

7 Ze

ro s

peed

del

ay

01.0

1 M

otor

spe

ed rp

m01

.14

Mot

or s

peed

est

03.0

4 S

peed

Ref

unr

amp

a b

a>b

a<b

a b

a>b

a<b

a b

a>b

a<b

a b

a>b

a<b

ABS

ABS

ABS

+

Spee

d fe

edba

ck


8.21

bit

21 M

F m

aste

r los

t

6.1

bit 8

Ext

2 ac

t

21.0

5 Sp

eed

shar

e

Con

stan

t spe

ed c

omm

and

06.0

1 bi

t 11

Loca

l pan

el

30.0

2 Sp

eed

ref s

afe

Safe

spe

ed c

omm

and

06.0

1 bi

t 9 lo

cal f

b

Con

stan

t spe

ed re

fere

nce 02

.26

FBA

mai

n re

f1

Crit

ical

spe

eds

1-3

Crit

ical

spe

ed e

nabl

ex

02.3

4 P

anel

ref

27.3

6 Pu

mp

scal

spe

ed

PID

Scal

ing

4.5

Pro

cess

PID

out

6.20

bit

6 P

ipe

fillin

g

Ext1

Ext2

6.20

bit

8 C

lean

ing

Scal

ing

27.3

6 P

ump

scal

spe

ed

81.1

6 O

utle

t for

ce re

f

6.20

bit

15 H

igh

prot

spd

81.8

Inle

t for

ced

ref

6.20

bit

16 L

ow p

rot s

pd

20.0

3 Po

s sp

eed

enab

le0

20.0

2 M

inim

um s

peed

20.0

4 N

eg s

peed

ena

ble

0

06.0

2 bi

t 12

Ram

p in

zer

o

0

20.0

1 M

axim

um s

peed

21.0

9 S

peed

Ref

min

abs

19.0

1 S

peed

sca

ling

22.0

6 Sh

ape

time

acc1

22.0

7 Sh

ape

time

acc2

22.0

8 Ss

hape

tim

e de

c122

.09

Shap

e tim

e de

c222

.12

EM

sto

p tim

e

06.0

1 bi

t 5 E

M s

top

RA

MP

& S

HA

PE

22.0

2 A

cc ti

me1

22.0

3 D

ec ti

me1

82.1

6C

lean

Acc

tim

e82

.17

Cle

an D

ec ti

me

or81

.17

Hig

h pr

ot D

ec ti

me

0

06.0

2 bi

t 14

Ram

p ou

t zer

o

06.0

2 bi

t 13

Ram

p ho

ld

03.0

3 Sp

eed

ref u

nram

ped

03.0

4 S

peed

ref r

amp

in

03.0

5 S

peed

Ref

ram

ped

6.20

bit

18 E

xt2

Spe

ed m

ode

12.5

Ext

2 ct

rl m

ode

21.0

2 Sp

eed

ref2

sel

Zero

AI1

scal

edAI

2 sc

aled

FBA

ref1

FBA

ref2

D2D

ref1

D2D

ref2

Pane

lFr

eq in

26.8

Con

st S

peed

3 or

last

spe

ed

**

8.21

bit

25 M

F no

sha

re d

ata

26.8

Con

st S

peed

3 or

last

spe

ed

*

5.9

Bypa

ss re

f

6.20

bit

7 B

ypas

s75

.1 O

pera

tion

mod

e

6.20

bit

3 Le

vel c

ontro

l79

.1 L

evel

mod

e

6.22

bit

1 Fo

llow

er75

.4 F

ollo

wer

ref

75.3

Fol

low

er m

ode

= C

onst

spe

ed

D2D

Mas

ter’s

ref

79.1

9 H

igh

spee

d

6.21

bit

13 H

igh

spee

d

79.1

8 N

orm

al

spee

d

Cle

anin

gfu

nctio

n82

.1 R

ev s

tep

82.1

5 T

ime

trig

Pip

efill

func

tion

81.2

8 R

ev s

tep

81.3

5 C

lean

ste

p de

c

*Cho

ice

betw

een

26.8

Con

st S

peed

3or

Las

t re

leva

nt s

peed

can

be

mad

e us

ing

par 7

6.7

Mst

r Lo

ss a

ctio

n fo

r Mas

ter l

oss

or M

aste

r sto

p ca

se.

**C

hoic

e be

twee

n 26

.8 C

onst

Spe

ed3

or L

ast

rele

vant

spe

ed c

an b

e m

ade

usin

g pa

r 76.

15 S

hare

lo

st a

ctn

5.10

Spe

ed re

f

Sca

ling

27.3

6 Pu

mp

scal

spe

ed

( 0 ÷

100

%)

( rpm

)

Zero

AI1

scal

edAI

2 sc

aled

FBA

ref1

FBA

ref2

D2D

ref1

D2D

ref2

Pane

lFr

eq in

21.0

1 Sp

eed

ref1

sel

Spee

d re

fere

nce

chai

n


23.0

8 S

peed

add

itive

23.0

7 S

peed

err

Ftim

e

20.0

1 M

axim

um s

peed

20.0

2 M

inim

um s

peed

0

06.0

2 bi

t 14

Ram

p ou

t zer

o06

.02

bit 1

2 R

amp

in z

ero

T Acc

Com

23.0

5 Ac

c co

mp

Der

Tim

e

23.0

6 A

cc c

omp

Ftim

e

d dt

03.0

5 Sp

eedR

ef ra

mpe

d

03.0

8 A

cc c

omp

torq

03.0

7 Sp

eed

erro

r filt

01.0

1 M

otor

spe

ed rp

m

23.0

3 D

eriv

atio

n tim

e23

.04

Der

iv fi

lt tim

e

23.0

1 Pr

opor

t gai

n

23.1

4 D

roop

ing

rate

23.0

2 In

tegr

atio

n tim

e

23.0

9 M

ax to

rq s

p co

ntro

l

23.1

0 M

in to

rq s

p co

ntro

l

03.0

9 To

rq re

f sp

ctrl

PID

23.1

1 Sp

eedE

rr w

inFu

nc23

.12

Spee

dErr

win

hi

23.1

3 Sp

eedE

rr w

in lo

03.0

6 Sp

eedR

ef u

sed

23.1

5 PI

ada

pt m

ax s

p23

.16

PI a

dapt

min

sp

23.1

7 Pc

oef a

t min

sp

23.1

8 Ic

oef a

t min

sp

x

++

+

Spee

d er

ror h

andl

ing


99.0

5 M

otor

ctrl

mod

e

06.0

1 bi

t 9 L

ocal

fb

12.0

1 Ex

t1/E

xt2

sel

03.0

9 To

rq re

f sp

ctrl

03.1

3 To

rq re

f to

TC

SPEE

D

SCAL

AR

06.0

1 bi

t 11

Pan

el lo

cal

SPEE

D

SPEE

D

Saf

e sp

eed

com

man

d

SPEE

D

Last

spe

ed c

omm

and

SPE

ED

06.0

2 bi

t 14

Ram

p ou

t zer

o06

.02

bit 1

2 R

amp

in z

ero

Spe

ed re

f

SPE

ED

SPE

ED

Torq

ue re

fere

nce

mod

ifica

tion,

ope

ratin

g m

ode

sele

ctio

n


% m3/

h… in

ch28.0

6

04.2

4

04.2

3

[Act

uni

ts]

[Act

uni

ts]

% m3/

h… in

ch28.0

6

04.2

1

04.2

0

[Act

uni

ts]

[Act

uni

ts]

04.0

2

[Act

uni

ts]

04.2

2

[%]

04.0

1

[Act

uni

ts]

Act

val

1 s

rcA

ct v

al 2

src

29.0

1

28.0

1

Act v

al 1

/2 s

el

Act

val

func

Act

max

val

Set

poin

t 1 s

rcS

etpo

int 2

src

Act

uni

t sel

04.2

5

[%]

PID

set

poin

t selPi

d re

f fre

eze

27.3

0P

ID

Pid

out

free

ze27

.31

27.1

2

27.1

3

27.1

4

27.1

5

27.1

6

27.1

8

27.1

9

04.0

5

[%]

04.2

50 P

oint

er

27.0

1

28.0

5

Act

max

val

28.0

5

Act

1

Add

Sub

… Sqr

t add

28.0

4

0 AI

FBA

05.0

5P

oint

er

28.0

30 A

IFB

A05

.05

Poi

nter

28.0

2

0 AI

FBA

29.0

5P

oint

er

29.0

30 A

IFB

A29

.04

Poi

nter

29.0

2

Proc

ess

PID

con

trol

set

poin

t and

act

ual v

alue

sel

ectio

n


01.0

4 M

otor

cur

rent

01.0

5 M

otor

cur

rent

%

01.0

6 M

otor

torq

ue

01.0

7 D

c-vo

ltage

01.1

4 M

otor

spe

ed e

st

03.1

7 Fl

ux a

ctua

lG

ate

sign

als

03.1

3 To

rq re

f to

TC03

.14

Torq

ref u

sed

01.2

3 M

otor

pow

er20

.07

Max

imum

torq

ue1

20.0

8 M

inim

um to

rque

120

.09

Max

imum

torq

ue2

20.1

0 M

inim

um to

rque

220

.06

Torq

lim

sel

20.1

2 P

Mot

orin

g lim

20.1

3 P

Gen

erat

ing

lim

U/F

-cur

veFl

ux

optim

isat

ion

Flux

bra

king

Fiel

d w

eake

ning

DC

vol

tage

lim

iter

Pow

er li

mite

rTo

rque

lim

iter

Sta

rt co

ntro

l

AUTO

FAST

CO

NST

TIM

E

11.0

1 St

art m

ode

11.0

2 D

C-M

agn

time

38.0

1 Fl

ux re

f

38.0

3 U

/F c

urve

func

38.0

4 U

/F c

urve

freq

138

.05

U/F

cur

ve fr

eq2

38.0

6 U

/F c

urve

freq

338

.07

U/F

cur

ve fr

eq4

38.0

8 U

/F c

urve

freq

538

.09

U/F

cur

ve v

olt1

38.1

0 U

/F c

urve

vol

t238

.11

U/F

cur

ve v

olt3

38.1

2 U

/F c

urve

vol

t438

.13

U/F

cur

ve v

olt545

.01

Ener

gy o

ptim 20

.05

Max

imum

cur

rent

Mot

or m

odel

Estim

ate

and

calc

ulat

e

99.1

3 ID

run

mod

e

01.2

2 Po

wer

inu

out

40.0

3 Sl

ip g

ain

97 U

ser m

otor

par

99 M

ot n

om p

ar

47.0

1 O

verv

olt c

trl47

.02

Und

ervo

lt ct

rl01

.01

Mot

or s

peed

rpm

99.0

5 M

otor

ctrl

mod

e

06.0

7 To

rq li

m s

tatu

s

M

40.0

7 IR

-com

pens

atio

n

40.0

4 V

olta

ge re

serv

e

01.2

9 To

rq n

om s

cale

01.3

0 Po

lepa

irs

DTC

cor

e

Dire

ct to

rque

con

trol


Further information

Product and service inquiriesAddress any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.com/drives and selecting Sales, Support and Service network.

Product trainingFor information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.com/drives and select Training courses.

Providing feedback on ABB Drives manualsYour comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.abb.com/drives and select Document Library – Manuals feedback form (LV AC drives).

Document library on the InternetYou can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. Go to www.abb.com/drives and select Document Library. You can browse the library or enter selection criteria, for example a document code, in the search field.

http://www.abb.com/drives




3AU

A00

0005

5144

Rev

B /

EN

EFF

ECTI

VE:

201

1-02

-14

ABB OyAC DrivesP.O. Box 184FI-00381 HELSINKIFINLANDTelephone +358 10 22 11Fax +358 10 22 22681Internet http://www.abb.com

ABB Inc.Automation Technologies Drives & Motors16250 West Glendale DriveNew Berlin, WI 53151 USATelephone 262 785-3200

800-HELP-365Fax 262 780-5135

ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co. Ltd.No. 1, Block D, A-10 Jiuxianqiao BeiluChaoyang DistrictBeijing, P.R. China, 100015Telephone +86 10 5821 7788Fax +86 10 5821 7618Internet http://www.abb.com

En acq810 fw manual b

Technology

local control

external control

application control

undervoltage control

control locations

overvoltage control

acq810 control panel

drive manuals